Samsung ITP-5114D Installation guide

Add to my manuals
423 Pages

advertisement

Samsung ITP-5114D Installation guide | Manualzz

Enterprise IP Solutions

OfficeServ 7400

Programming

Guide

Publication Information

Samsung Business Communications reserves the right without prior notice to revise information in this publication for any reason.

Samsung Business Communications also reserves the right without prior notice to make changes in design or components of equipment as engineering and manufacturing may warrant.

Disclaimer

Samsung Business Communications is not responsible for errors or problems arising from customers not installing, programming or operating their Samsung systems as described in this manual.

Copyright 2006

Samsung Business Communications

All rights reserved. No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form or by any means – graphic, electronic or mechanical, including recording, taping, photocopy or information retrieval system – without express written permission of the publisher of this material.

200

6/05/OS7400(PG) Version 1.1

EU Declaration of Conformity

Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.

259 Gongdan-Dong, Gumi-City Kyungbuk, Korea, 730-030

(factory name, address) declare under our sole responsibility that the product

Digital Keyphone System model "OfficeServ 7400"

to which this declaration relates is in conformity with

Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC

EMC Directive 89/336/EEC:92/31/EEC

By application of the following standards

EN55022: 1998 +A1:2000+A2:2003

EN55024: 1998 +A1:2001+A2:2003

EN61000-3-2: 2000

EN61000-3-3: 1995+A1:2001

EN60 95 0- 1 : 20 01 ( 1s t E di t i o n ) an d / o r EN6 09 50 - 1: 2 00 1

(Manufacturer)

Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd

259, Gongdan-Dong, Gumi-City

Kyungbuk, Korea, 730-030

2005-12-23 YJ Min

...................................................

(place and date of issue)

(Representative in the EU)

Samsung Electronics Euro QA Lab.

Blackbushe Business Park

Saxony Way, Yateley, Hampshire

GU46 6GG, UK

2005-12-23 Peter Park

...................................................

(place and date of issue)

YoungJin Min / General Manager

.................................................................................

(name and signature of authorized person)

Peter Park / Manager

...............................................................................

(name and signature of authorized person)

Intended Use

This telephone system is intended to provide the user with voice communication between the system extensions and connection to the public switched telephone network by digital or analogue links.

The telephone system may be provided with the ability to communicate with local computer networks to provide CTI functions and features. In this case, it is capable of passing information to the computer network via a specified link.

The system is powered by mains voltage and can optionally be powered by batteries. Details of all connections and power arrangements are provided in the instructions for use. It should not be used in any other way.

INTRODUCTION

This is the programming guide for the OfficeServ 7400 keyphone system. You can use a digital phone to quickly and easily change the system setup through MMC (Man Machine

Communication) programming. Each MMC is used for a specific purpose and is given its own number.

This guide describes each MMC program in detail and provides an example of its use. If you have any questions regarding your OfficeServ 7400 system or how to program it, call your authorized Samsung dealer.

Guide Contents

This guide comprises two chapters and an annex.

CHAPTER 1. Overview of MMC Programming

This chapter describes things you need to know before starting MMC programming. For example, it describes the special programming buttons on the digital phone and the precautions you need to take.

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming

This chapter describes in detail how to use each MMC program. MMCs are listed in numerical order.

ANNEX. Abbreviations

Explains abbreviations frequently used in this guide and related guides.

Reference Guides

The following guides are also provided with your OfficeServ 7400 system.

OfficeServ 7400 Installation Guide

Describes the installation procedures and specifications for the OfficeServ 7400 system.

Samsung Business Communications i

Introduction OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

OfficeServ 7400 General Description

Describes the business features available with the OfficeServ 7400 system.

WIP-5000M User Guide

This is a user’s guide for the WIP-5000M mobile telephone designed to use the wireless

LAN provided by the OfficeServ 7400 system.

Conventions Used in this Guide

WARNING

Provides information or instructions that you should follow in order to avoid personal injury.

CAUTION

Provides information or instructions that you should follow in order to avoid service failure or damage to the system.

NOTE

Indicates additional information for reference.

Samsung Business Communications ii

Introduction OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

WARNING

Caution

When using Auto Record (MMC 752)

Make sure that you are not violating any laws on the use of recording equipment.

Samsung is not responsible for any illegal use of this feature.

CAUTION

CALL COST (MMC 508)

Changing this value when there is a call in progress may result in an inaccurate call cost. This MPD facility requires the Meter Pulse Detection version of the trunk module.

If intending to make changes in MMCs 503, 506, 510, 805, 807 or 816

Do not change the default levels without the assistance of your dealer or Samsung Technical Support.

Compliance with the National Version Standards

For the national version, OfficeServ 7400 is designed to comply with the standards of the corresponding country. Therefore, if you need to use MMC 812 (Set

Country Code), please consult your dealer for advice.

Samsung Business Communications iii

TABLE OF CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION i

Guide Contents ................................................................................................................................i

Reference Guides ............................................................................................................................i

Conventions Used in this Guide...................................................................................................... ii

Caution .......................................................................................................................................... iii

CHAPTER 1.

Overview of MMC Programming 1-1

Introduction to Programming............................................................................................................ 1-1

Technician-Level Programming................................................................................................... 1-1

Customer-Level Programming .................................................................................................... 1-1

Station-Level Programming......................................................................................................... 1-1

Phones Used for Programming ........................................................................................................ 1-2

5000 and 5100 Series Phones.................................................................................................... 1-2

Precautions When Programming...................................................................................................... 1-5

Program (MMC) List By Programming Level ................................................................................... 1-6

1 Station-Level Programming ................................................................................................... 1-6

2 Customer-Level Programming............................................................................................... 1-7

3 Technician-Level Programming ............................................................................................1-12

Program (MMC) List by Name ..........................................................................................................1-14

Program (MMC) List by Function .....................................................................................................1-20

Phone Function..........................................................................................................................1-20

Networking Function ..................................................................................................................1-21

VoIP (Voice over Internet Protocol) Function .............................................................................1-21

WLAN (Wireless LAN) Function.................................................................................................1-21

LCR (Least Cost Routing) Function ...........................................................................................1-22

Voice Mail Function....................................................................................................................1-22

Diagnosis Function ....................................................................................................................1-23

Hotel Function............................................................................................................................1-23

Samsung Business Communications iv

Table of Contents OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

CHAPTER 2.

MMC Programming 2-1

Summary of Programming Procedures............................................................................................ 2-1

Programming Procedures ................................................................................................................. 2-2

ANNEX. Abbreviations A-1

A – C ....................................................................................................................................... A-1

D – H ....................................................................................................................................... A-2

I – M ....................................................................................................................................... A-3

N – R ....................................................................................................................................... A-4

S – U ....................................................................................................................................... A-5

V – X ....................................................................................................................................... A-6

LIST OF FIGURES

Figure 1.1 DS-5038S Phone ............................................................................................................. 1-2

Figure 1.2 DS/ITP-5014D & ITP-5114D Phone ................................................................................. 1-3

Figure 1.3 DS/ITP-5021D & ITP-5121D Phone ................................................................................. 1-3

Figure 1.4 DS-5014S/5007S & ITP-5107S Phone............................................................................. 1-4

Samsung Business Communications v

CHAPTER 1. Overview of MMC

Programming

MMC is short for Man Machine Communication, a means of programming your telephone system via a digital display phone. This chapter covers the things you need to know before you start MMC programming. The phone’s special programming buttons, and precautions you should take while programming, are discussed.

Introduction to Programming

Programming means setting and changing the data that is used for the system operating program. There are three levels of MMC programming: technician-, customer-, and stationlevel. Technician- and customer-level programming requires a passcode to access MMCs and is done by the installing technician and system administrator respectively. Station level programming does not require a passcode and can be done by phone users.

You need a digital display (LCD) phone in order to carry out programming.

Technician-Level Programming

This level allows access to all MMCs and is required, normally, at the time the system is installed to set up the system for the customer’s requirements. Some MMCs may cause the system to fail if used without a thorough understanding of system operation. The installing technician decides what MMCs to make accessible at customer level (using MMC 802) to allow the system administrator to refine the system setup when it is operating.

Customer-Level Programming

The system administrator (customer) can do programming allowed by the installer in MMC

802 to change or enter new information for the system when it is in operation.

Station-Level Programming

Programming can be done at station level by the administrator, or individual station users via their own phones, to change the data for individual phones only. The MMCs accessible are fewer than those available at other levels

Samsung Business Communications

1-1

CHAPTER 1. Overview of MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

Phones Used for Programming

You need a digital display (LCD) phone in order to carry out programming. All use special buttons to select options on the display screen.

5000 and 5100 Series Phones

The 5000 and 5100 Series comprise:

(1) large LCD display phones, DS-5012L / 5012LE and ITP-5012L / 5112L, and

(2) 2-line LCD display phones, DS-5007S / 5014S / 5038S / 5014D / 5021D and ITP-

5014D / 5021D / 5114D / 5121D / 5107S.

Some examples are shown in the figures below.

Programmable Buttons (21)

LCD Display

Soft Buttons

Scroll Button

Telephone Status Indicator

‘A’ Button

‘B’ Button

Volume Buttons

Redial Button

Programmable Buttons (17)

Dial Buttons

Speaker Button

Hold Button

Microphone

Conference Button

Transfer Button

Figure 1.1 DS-5038S Phone

Samsung Business Communications

1-2

CHAPTER 1. Overview of MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

Programmable Buttons (14)

LCD Display

Soft Buttons

Scroll Button

Telephone Status Indicator

‘A’ Button

‘B’ Button

Volume Buttons

Redial Button

Dial Buttons

Speaker Button

Hold Button

Navigation Buttons

Microphone

Conference Button

Transfer Button

Figure 1.2 DS/ITP-5014D & ITP-5114D Phone

Programmable Buttons (21)

LCD Display

Soft Buttons

Scroll Button

Telephone Status Indicator

‘A’ Button

‘B’ Button

Volume Buttons

Redial Button

Dial Buttons

Speaker Button

Hold Button

Figure 1.3 DS/ITP-5021D & ITP-5121D Phone

Navigation Buttons

Microphone

Conference Button

Transfer Button

Samsung Business Communications

1-3

CHAPTER 1. Overview of MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

DS-5014S

(Programmable Buttons : 14)

‘A’

Speaker

Dial Buttons

Speaker Button

Hold Button

Microphone

DS-5007S & ITP-5107S

(Programmable Buttons : 7)

‘A’

DS-5000S

(Programmable Buttons : 0)

Programmable Buttons

Soft Buttons

Scroll Button

Status Indicator

LCD screen

Volume Button

Redial Button

Conference Button

Transfer Button

Figure 1.4 DS-5014S/5007S & ITP-5107S Phone

5000/5100 Series 2-line LCD phones have 38, 21, 14 or 7 programmable buttons that can be programmed with functions. Also, there are several other function buttons: the dial buttons, the volume control buttons, the redial button that allows you to redial the last phone number dialled, the conference button for setting up conference calls, the transfer button used to transfer a call to another station, the hold button to hold a call, and the speaker button for using the speakerphone. The navigation buttons (on ‘D’ prefix phones only) are used for easy selection of phone options and menus.

The LCD displays the station status and various other kinds of information. Using three colours (red, green, and yellow) the station status indicator displays the current status of station.

Samsung Business Communications

1-4

CHAPTER 1. Overview of MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

During programming, some of the buttons are used for the following special functions: y y

Volume ( ) buttons : Scroll through items in the display.

Redial ( ) button: Select ‘ALL’ option for making changes to all -- rather than y Speaker ( ) button: Save data and proceed to the next program y Hold ( ) button: Erase the entered data y Transfer ( ) button: Enter programming mode / Save data and exit programming y Soft buttons: Save data and/or move the cursor left and right y ‘A’ button: Select uppercase or lowercase text

NOTE: Large LCD phones do not have programmable buttons. Instead, they display programming functions on the LCD for selection via special buttons. Refer to your keyset user guide for more information.

Precautions When Programming

y y

Programming can be done on any digital LCD phone.

Programming can be done only while the handset is on hook (the phone is in ‘idle’

state). y If the LCD displays an ‘INVALID DATA’ message while programming, reenter the y If no button is pressed for a certain period of time during programming (default is 60 y seconds, but this can be changed), the phone exits from programming mode.

Programming mode halts if the handset is picked up, the Transfer button is pressed, or the phone is unplugged. Any data previously entered in the display is

saved.

Samsung Business Communications

1-5

CHAPTER 1. Overview of MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

Program (MMC) List By Programming Level

The following lists show MMC programs categorized according to their use at the three programming levels: station, customer and technician.

1 Station-Level Programming

MMC No.

MMC: 100

MMC: 101

MMC: 102

MMC: 103

MMC: 104

MMC: 105

MMC: 106

MMC: 107

MMC: 108

MMC: 109

MMC: 110

MMC: 111

MMC: 112

MMC: 113

MMC: 114

MMC: 115

MMC: 116

MMC: 117

MMC: 118

MMC: 119

MMC: 120

MMC: 121

MMC: 122

MMC: 125

MMC Name

STATION LOCK

CHANGE USER PASSCODE

CALL FORWARD

SET ANSWER MODE

STATION NAME

STATION SPEED DIAL

STATION SPEED DIAL NAME

KEY EXTENDER

STATION STATUS

DATE DISPLAY

STATION ON/OFF

PHONE RING TONE

ALARM REMINDER CLOCK

VIEW MEMO NUMBER

PHONE VOLUME

SET PROGRAMMED MESSAGE

ALARM AND MESSAGE

EDIT TEXT MESSAGE

CONFERENCE GROUP

CALLER ID DISPLAY

LARGE LCD OPTIONS

PHONE LANGUAGE

NEWS DISPLAY SPEED

EXECUTIVE STATE

Samsung Business Communications

1-6

CHAPTER 1. Overview of MMC Programming

2 Customer-Level Programming

MMC No.

MMC: 200

MMC: 201

MMC: 202

MMC: 203

MMC: 204

MMC: 205

MMC: 206

MMC: 207

MMC: 208

MMC: 209

MMC: 210

MMC: 211

MMC: 214

MMC: 217

MMC: 220

MMC: 221

MMC: 222

MMC: 224

OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

MMC Name

OPEN CUSTOMER PROGRAMMING

CHANGE CUSTOMER PASSCODE

CHANGE FEATURE PASSCODE

ASSIGN UA DEVICE

COMMON BELL CONTROL

ASSIGN LOUD BELL

BARGE-IN TYPE

ASSIGN VM/AA PORT

ASSIGN RING TYPE

ASSIGN ADD-ON MODULE

CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TENANT

DOOR RING ASSIGNMENT

DISA ALARM RINGING STATION

TRAFFIC REPORT OPTION

ISDN SERVICE TYPE

EXTENSION TYPE

FAX PAIR

AUDIO PROMPT

Samsung Business Communications

1-7

CHAPTER 1. Overview of MMC Programming

MMC No.

MMC: 300

MMC: 301

MMC: 302

MMC: 303

MMC: 304

MMC: 305

MMC: 306

MMC: 308

MMC: 309

MMC: 310

MMC: 312

MMC: 314

MMC: 315

MMC: 316

MMC: 317

MMC: 318

MMC: 319

MMC: 320

MMC: 323

OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

MMC Name

CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER STATION

ASSIGN STATION COS

PICKUP GROUPS

ASSIGN BOSS/SECRETARY

ASSIGN EXTENSION/TRUNK USE

ASSIGN FORCED CODE

HOT LINE/OFF HOOK SELECTION

ASSIGN BACKGROUND MUSIC SOURCE

ASSIGN STATION MOH SOURCE

LCR CLASS OF SERVICE

ALLOW CALLER ID

CONFIRM OUTGOING CALL

CUSTOMER SET RELOCATION

COPY STATION USABLE

ASSIGN STATION/STATION USE

DISTINCTIVE RINGING

BRANCH GROUP

PRESET FORWARD NO ANSWER

CALLING PARTY NUMBER

Samsung Business Communications

1-8

CHAPTER 1. Overview of MMC Programming

MMC No.

MMC: 400

MMC: 401

MMC: 402

MMC: 403

MMC: 404

MMC: 405

MMC: 406

MMC: 407

MMC: 408

MMC: 409

MMC: 410

MMC: 411

MMC: 412

MMC: 413

MMC: 414

MMC: 415

MMC: 416

MMC: 417

MMC: 418

MMC: 419

MMC: 420

MMC: 421

MMC: 422

MMC: 423

MMC: 424

MMC: 426

MMC: 428

MMC: 432

MMC: 433

MMC: 434

MMC: 436

OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

MMC Name

CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TRUNK

TRUNK LINE/PBX LINE

TRUNK DIAL TYPE

TRUNK TOLL CLASS

TRUNK NAME

TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER

TRUNK RING ASSIGNMENT

FORCED TRUNK RELEASE

ASSIGN TRUNK MOH SOURCE

TRUNK STATUS READ

ASSIGN DISA TRUNK

ASSIGN E1 SIGNAL TYPE

ASSIGN TRUNK SIGNAL

VMS CALL TYPE

MPD/PRS SIGNAL

REPORT TRUNK ABANDON DATA

ASSIGN E&M/DID RINGDOWN

E1/PRI CRC4

BRI & PRI CARD RESTART

BRI OPTIONS

PRI OPTIONS

MSN DIGIT

TRUNK COS

S/T MODE

BRI S0 MAPPING

TRUNK GAIN CONTROL

ASSIGN TRUNK/TRUNK USE

SET H-TRK

COST RATE

CONNECTION STATUS

TRUNK TMC GAIN

Samsung Business Communications

1-9

CHAPTER 1. Overview of MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

Timer- and Tone-Related MMCs

MMC No.

MMC: 500

MMC: 501

MMC: 502

MMC: 503

MMC: 504

MMC: 505

MMC: 506

MMC: 507

MMC: 508

MMC: 510

MMC: 511

MMC: 512

MMC: 513

MMC: 514

MMC: 515

MMC Name

SYSTEM-WIDE COUNTERS

SYSTEM TIMERS

STATION-WIDE TIMERS

TRUNK-WIDE TIMERS

PULSE MAKE/BREAK RATIO

ASSIGN DATE AND TIME

TONE CADENCE

ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME

CALL COST

SLI RING CADENCE

MSG WAITING LAMP CADENCE

HOLIDAY ASSIGNMENT

HOTEL TIMER

TONE SOURCE

DAYLIGHT ASSIGNMENT

MMC No.

MMC: 600

MMC: 601

MMC: 602

MMC: 603

MMC: 604

MMC: 605

MMC: 606

MMC: 607

MMC: 608

MMC: 609

MMC: 611

MMC: 612

MMC: 614

MMC: 615

MMC: 616

Samsung Business Communications

MMC Name

ASSIGN OPERATOR GROUP

ASSIGN STATION GROUP

STATION GROUP NAME

ASSIGN TRUNK GROUP

ASSIGN STATION TO PAGE ZONE

ASSIGN EXTERNAL PAGE ZONE

ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK

UCD OPTIONS

ASSIGN REVIEW BLOCK

CALL LOG BLOCK

ALLOW TEXT MESSAGING

ALLOW GROUP CONFERENCE

STATION/TRUNK USE GROUP

MGI GROUP

MGI USER

1-10

CHAPTER 1. Overview of MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

Tables, Codes and Voice Mail MMCs

MMC No.

MMC: 700

MMC: 701

MMC: 702

MMC: 703

MMC: 704

MMC: 705

MMC: 706

MMC: 707

MMC: 708

MMC: 709

MMC: 710

MMC: 711

MMC: 712

MMC: 713

MMC: 714

MMC: 715

MMC: 716

MMC: 717

MMC: 718

MMC: 719

MMC: 720

MMC: 721

MMC: 722

MMC: 723

MMC: 724

MMC: 725

MMC: 726

MMC: 727

MMC: 728

MMC: 740

MMC: 746

MMC: 747

MMC: 750

MMC: 751

MMC: 752

MMC Name

COPY COS CONTENTS

ASSIGN COS CONTENTS

TOLL DENY TABLE

TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE

ASSIGN WILD CHARACTER

ASSIGN SYSTEM SPEED DIAL

SYSTEM SPEED DIAL BY NAME

AUTHORIZATION CODE

ACCOUNT CODE

TOLL PASS CODE/SPECIAL CODE TABLE

LCR DIGIT TABLE

LCR TIME TABLE

LCR ROUTE TABLE

LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE

DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION

PROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE

UK LCR OPTION

UCD AGENT ID

MY AREA CODE

IDLE DISPLAY

COPY KEY PROGRAMMING

SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING

STATION KEY PROGRAMMING

SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING

DIAL NUMBERING PLAN

SMDR OPTIONS

VM/AA OPTIONS

SYSTEM VERSION DISPLAY

CID TRANSLATION TABLE

STATION PAIR

COSTING DIAL PLAN

RATE CALCULATION TABLE

VM CARD RESTART

ASSIGN MAILBOX

AUTO RECORD

Samsung Business Communications

1-11

CHAPTER 1. Overview of MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

MMC No.

MMC: 753

MMC: 754

MMC: 755

MMC: 756

MMC: 757

MMC: 758

MMC: 759

MMC: 760

MMC: 761

MMC: 762

MMC: 763

MMC Name

WARNING DESTINATION

VM HALT

VM ALARM

ASSIGN VMMOH

VM IN/OUT

VM DAY/NIGHT

CLI RINGING

ITEM COST TABLE

TAX RATE SETUP

ROOM COST RATE

SECOND LCR

3 Technician-Level Programming

MMC No.

MMC: 813

MMC: 815

MMC: 816

MMC: 818

MMC: 819

MMC: 820

MMC: 821

MMC: 822

MMC: 823

MMC: 824

MMC: 825

MMC: 826

MMC: 800

MMC: 801

MMC: 802

MMC: 803

MMC: 805

MMC: 806

MMC: 807

MMC: 810

MMC: 811

MMC: 812

MMC Name

ENABLE TECHNICIAN PROGRAM

CHANGE TECHNICIAN PASSCODE

CUSTOMER ACCESS MMC NUMBER

ASSIGN TENANT GROUP

TX LEVEL AND GAIN

CARD PRE-INSTALL

PHONE VOLUME CONTROL

HALT PROCESSING

RESET SYSTEM

SET COUNTRY CODE

HOTEL OPERATION

CUSTOMER DATABASE COPY

CONFERENCE GAIN

PROGRAM DOWNLOAD

SMART MEDIA FILE CONTROL

ASSIGN SYSTEM LINK ID

ASSIGN NETWORK TRUNK

VIRTUAL EXTENSION TYPE

ASSIGN NETWORK COS

NETWORK DIAL TRANSLATION

ASSIGN NETWORKING OPTIONS

ASSIGN SYSTEM REFERENCE CLOCK

Samsung Business Communications

1-12

CHAPTER 1. Overview of MMC Programming

MMC: 851

MMC: 852

MMC: 853

MMC: 854

MMC: 855

MMC: 856

MMC: 857

MMC: 858

MMC: 859

MMC: 860

MMC: 861

MMC: 865

MMC: 889

MMC: 890

MMC: 838

MMC: 840

MMC: 841

MMC: 842

MMC: 844

MMC: 845

MMC: 846

MMC: 847

MMC: 848

MMC: 849

MMC: 850

MMC No.

MMC: 827

MMC: 829

MMC: 830

MMC: 831

MMC: 832

MMC: 833

MMC: 834

MMC: 835

MMC: 836

MMC: 837

OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

MMC Name

CRM DSP MODE

LAN PRINTER PARAMETERS

ETHERNET PARAMETERS

MGI PARAMETERS

VoIP ACCESS CODE

VoIP IP TABLE

H.323 OPTIONS

MGI DSP OPTIONS

H.323 GK OPTIONS

SIP OPTIONS

PRIVATE IP ADDRESSES

IP PHONE INFORMATION

SYSTEM IP OPTIONS

SIP STATION INFORMATION

IP STATION TYPE

WLAN PARAMETERS

WIP INFORMATION

WLAN RESET AND STATUS CHECK

WLAN IP/MAC LIST

WLAN CONFIGURATION

SYSTEM RESOURCE DISPLAY

ALARM REPORTING

SYSTEM ALARM ASSIGNMENTS

MAINTENANCE BUSY

DIAGNOSTIC TIME

DISPLAY SYSTEM OPTIONS

TECH PROGRAMMING LOGS

VIRTUAL CABINET

ASSIGN SYSTEM EMERGENCY ALARM

HARDWARE VERSION DISPLAY

UCD STATUS SERVICE

SYSTEM OPTIONS

FAN POWER CONTROL

DISPLAY SERVER STATUS

INITIALIZE PORT

Samsung Business Communications

1-13

CHAPTER 1. Overview of MMC Programming

Program (MMC) List by Name

This program list is arranged alphabetically.

MMC Name

ACCOUNT CODE

ALARM AND MESSAGE

ALARM REMINDER CLOCK

ALARM REPORTING

ALLOW CALLER ID

ALLOW GROUP CONFERENCE

ALLOW TEXT MESSAGING

ASSIGN ADD ON MODULE

ASSIGN BACKGROUND MUSIC SOURCE

ASSIGN BOSS/SECRETARY

ASSIGN COS CONTENTS

ASSIGN DATE AND TIME

ASSIGN DISA TRUNK

ASSIGN E&M/DID RINGDOWN

ASSIGN E1 SIGNAL TYPE

ASSIGN EXTENSION/TRUNK USE

ASSIGN EXTERNAL PAGE ZONE

ASSIGN FORCED CODE

ASSIGN LOUD BELL

ASSIGN MAILBOX

ASSIGN NETWORK COS

ASSIGN NETWORK TRUNK

ASSIGN NETWORKING OPTIONS

ASSIGN OPERATOR GROUP

ASSIGN REVIEW BLOCK

ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME

ASSIGN RING TYPE

ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK

ASSIGN STATION COS

ASSIGN STATION GROUP

ASSIGN STATION MOH SOURCE

ASSIGN STATION TO PAGE ZONE

ASSIGN STATION/STATION USE

OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

MMC No.

MMC: 505

MMC: 410

MMC: 416

MMC: 411

MMC: 304

MMC: 605

MMC: 305

MMC: 205

MMC: 751

MMC: 823

MMC: 821

MMC: 825

MMC: 600

MMC: 608

MMC: 507

MMC: 208

MMC: 606

MMC: 301

MMC: 601

MMC: 309

MMC: 604

MMC: 317

MMC: 708

MMC: 116

MMC: 112

MMC: 851

MMC: 312

MMC: 612

MMC: 611

MMC: 209

MMC: 308

MMC: 303

MMC: 701

Samsung Business Communications

1-14

CHAPTER 1. Overview of MMC Programming

MMC Name

ASSIGN SYSTEM EMERGENCY ALARM

ASSIGN SYSTEM LINK ID

ASSIGN SYSTEM REFERENCE CLOCK

ASSIGN SYSTEM SPEED DIAL

ASSIGN TENANT GROUP

ASSIGN TRUNK GROUP

ASSIGN TRUNK MOH SOURCE

ASSIGN TRUNK SIGNAL

ASSIGN TRUNK/TRUNK USE

ASSIGN UA DEVICE

ASSIGN VMMOH

ASSIGN VM/AA PORT

ASSIGN WILD CHARACTER

AUDIO PROMPT

AUTHORIZATION CODE

AUTO RECORD

BARGE-IN TYPE

BRANCH GROUP

BRI & PRI CARD RESTART

BRI OPTIONS

BSI RF CARRIER

BRI S0 MAPPING

CALL COST

CALL FORWARD

CALL LOG BLOCK

CALLER ID DISPLAY

CALLING PARTY NUMBER

CARD PRE-INSTALL

CHANGE CUSTOMER PASSCODE

CHANGE FEATURE PASSCODE

CHANGE TECHNICIAN PASSCODE

CHANGE USER PASSCODE

CID TRANSLATION TABLE

CLI RINGING

COMMON BELL CONTROL

CONFERENCE GAIN

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

MMC No.

MMC: 707

MMC: 752

MMC: 206

MMC: 319

MMC: 418

MMC: 419

MMC: 747

MMC: 424

MMC: 508

MMC: 102

MMC: 609

MMC: 119

MMC: 323

MMC: 806

MMC: 201

MMC: 202

MMC: 858

MMC: 820

MMC: 826

MMC: 705

MMC: 803

MMC: 603

MMC: 408

MMC: 412

MMC: 428

MMC: 203

MMC: 756

MMC: 207

MMC: 704

MMC:224

MMC: 801

MMC: 101

MMC: 728

MMC: 759

MMC: 204

MMC: 816

1-15

CHAPTER 1. Overview of MMC Programming

MMC Name

CONFERENCE GROUP

CONFIRM OUTGOING CALL

CONNECTION STATUS

COPY COS CONTENTS

COPY KEY PROGRAMMING

COPY STATION USABLE

COST RATE

COSTING DIAL PLAN

CUSTOMER ACCESS MMC NUMBER

CUSTOMER DATABASE COPY

CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER STATION

CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TENANT

CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TRUNK

CUSTOMER SET RELOCATION

DATE DISPLAY

DAYLIGHT ASSIGNMENT

DIAGNOSTIC TIME

DIAL NUMBERING PLAN

DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION

DISA ALARM RINGING STATION

DISPLAY SERVER STATUS

DISPLAY SYSTEM OPTIONS

DISTINCTIVE RINGING

DOOR RING ASSIGNMENT

E1/PRI CRC4 OPTION

EDIT TEXT MESSAGE

ENABLE TECHNICIAN PROGRAM

ETHERNET PARAMETERS

EXECUTIVE STATE

EXTENSION TYPE

FAX PAIR

FORCED TRUNK RELEASE

H.323 GK OPTIONS

H.323 OPTIONS

HALT PROCESSING

HARDWARE VERSION DISPLAY

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

MMC No.

MMC: 109

MMC: 515

MMC: 854

MMC: 724

MMC: 714

MMC: 214

MMC: 889

MMC: 855

MMC: 318

MMC: 211

MMC: 417

MMC: 117

MMC: 800

MMC: 830

MMC: 125

MMC: 221

MMC: 118

MMC: 314

MMC: 434

MMC: 700

MMC: 720

MMC: 316

MMC: 433

MMC: 746

MMC: 802

MMC: 815

MMC: 300

MMC: 210

MMC: 400

MMC: 315

MMC: 222

MMC: 407

MMC: 836

MMC: 834

MMC: 810

MMC: 859

1-16

CHAPTER 1. Overview of MMC Programming

MMC Name

HOLIDAY ASSIGNMENT

HOT LINE/OFF HOOK SELECTION

HOTEL OPERATION

HOTEL TIMER

IDLE DISPLAY

INITIALIZE PORT

IP PHONE INFORMATION

IP STATION TYPE

ISDN SERVICE TYPE

ITEM COST TABLE

KEY EXTENDER

LAN PRINTER PARAMETERS

LARGE LCD OPTIONS

LCR CLASS OF SERVICE

LCR DIGIT TABLE

LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE

LCR ROUTE TABLE

LCR TIME TABLE

MAINTENANCE BUSY

MGI DSP OPTIONS

MGI GROUP

MGI PARAMETERS

MGI USER

MPD/PRS SIGNAL

MSG WAITING LAMP CADENCE

MSN DIGIT

MY AREA CODE

NETWORK DIAL TRANSLATION

NEWS DISPLAY SPEED

OPEN CUSTOMER PROGRAMMING

PHONE LANGUAGE

PHONE RING TONE

PHONE VOLUME

PHONE VOLUME CONTROL

PICKUP GROUPS

PRESET FORWARD NO ANSWER

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

MMC No.

MMC: 710

MMC: 713

MMC: 712

MMC: 711

MMC: 853

MMC: 835

MMC: 615

MMC: 831

MMC: 616

MMC: 414

MMC: 511

MMC: 421

MMC: 718

MMC: 824

MMC: 122

MMC: 200

MMC: 512

MMC: 306

MMC: 813

MMC: 513

MMC: 719

MMC: 890

MMC: 840

MMC: 844

MMC: 220

MMC: 760

MMC: 107

MMC: 829

MMC: 120

MMC: 310

MMC: 121

MMC: 111

MMC: 114

MMC: 807

MMC: 302

MMC: 320

1-17

CHAPTER 1. Overview of MMC Programming

MMC Name

PRI OPTIONS

PRIVATE IP ADDRESSES

PROGRAM DOWNLOAD

PROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE

PULSE MAKE/BREAK RATIO

RATE CALCULATION TABLE

REPORT TRUNK ABANDON DATA

RESET SYSTEM

ROOM COST RATE

SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING

SET ANSWER MODE

S/T MODE

SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING

SET ANSWER MODE

SET COUNTRY CODE

SET PROGRAMMED MESSAGE

SIP OPTIONS

SIP STATION INFORMATION

SLI RING CADENCE

SMART MEDIA FILE CONTROL

SMDR OPTIONS

STATION GROUP NAME

STATION KEY PROGRAMMING

STATION LOCK

STATION NAME

STATION ON/OFF

STATION PAIR

STATION SPEED DIAL

STATION SPEED DIAL NAME

STATION STATUS

STATION/TRUNK USE GROUP

STATION-WIDE TIMERS

SYSTEM ALARM ASSIGNMENTS

SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING

SYSTEM IP OPTIONS

SYSTEM OPTIONS

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

MMC No.

MMC: 812

MMC: 115

MMC: 837

MMC: 842

MMC: 510

MMC: 819

MMC: 725

MMC: 602

MMC: 722

MMC: 100

MMC: 104

MMC: 110

MMC: 740

MMC: 105

MMC: 106

MMC: 108

MMC: 420

MMC: 838

MMC: 818

MMC: 715

MMC: 504

MMC: 747

MMC: 415

MMC: 811

MMC: 762

MMC: 721

MMC: 103

MMC: 423

MMC: 721

MMC: 103

MMC: 614

MMC: 502

MMC: 852

MMC: 723

MMC: 841

MMC: 861

1-18

CHAPTER 1. Overview of MMC Programming

MMC Name

SYSTEM RESOURCE DISPLAY

SYSTEM SPEED DIAL BY NAME

SYSTEM TIMERS

SYSTEM VERSION DISPLAY

SYSTEM-WIDE COUNTERS

TAX RATE SETUP

TECH PROGRAMMING LOGS

TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE

TOLL DENY TABLE

TOLL PASS CODE/SPECIAL CODE TABLE

TONE CADENCE

TONE SOURCE

TRAFFIC REPORT OPTION

TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER

TRUNK COS

TRUNK DIAL TYPE

TRUNK GAIN CONTROL

TRUNK LINE/PBX LINE

TRUNK NAME

TRUNK RING ASSIGNMENT

TRUNK STATUS READ

TRUNK TMC GAIN

TRUNK TOLL CLASS

TRUNK-WIDE TIMERS

TX LEVEL AND GAIN

UCD AGENT ID

UCD OPTIONS

UCD STATUS SERVICE

UK LCR OPTION

VIEW MEMO NUMBER

VIRTUAL EXTENSION TYPE

VM ALARM

VM CARD RESTART

VM DAY/NIGHT

VM HALT

VM IN/OUT

VM/AA OPTIONS

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

MMC No.

MMC: 426

MMC: 401

MMC: 404

MMC: 406

MMC: 409

MMC: 436

MMC: 403

MMC: 503

MMC: 805

MMC: 717

MMC: 607

MMC: 860

MMC: 716

MMC: 113

MMC: 822

MMC: 755

MMC: 850

MMC: 706

MMC: 501

MMC: 727

MMC: 500

MMC: 761

MMC: 856

MMC: 703

MMC: 702

MMC: 709

MMC: 506

MMC: 514

MMC: 217

MMC: 405

MMC: 422

MMC: 402

MMC: 750

MMC: 758

MMC: 754

MMC: 757

MMC: 726

1-19

CHAPTER 1. Overview of MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

MMC Name

VMS CALL TYPE

VoIP ACCESS CODE

VoIP IP TABLE

WARNING DESTINATION

WIP INFORMATION

WLAN CONFIGURATION

WLAN IP/MAC LIST

WLAN PARAMETERS

WLAN RESET AND STATUS CHECK

Program (MMC) List by Function

Phone Function

MMC Program No.

MMC: 100

MMC: 101

MMC: 102

MMC: 103

MMC: 104

MMC: 105

MMC: 106

MMC: 107

MMC: 108

MMC: 109

MMC: 110

MMC: 111

MMC: 112

MMC: 114

MMC: 115

MMC: 116

MMC: 119

Program Description

STATION LOCK

CHANGE USER PASSCODE

CALL FORWARD

SET ANSWER MODE

STATION NAME

STATION SPEED DIAL

STATION SPEED DIAL NAME

KEY EXTENDER

STATION STATUS

DATE DISPLAY

STATION ON/OFF

PHONE RING TONE

ALARM REMINDER CLOCK

PHONE VOLUME

SET PROGRAMMED MESSAGE

ALARM AND MESSAGE

CALLER ID DISPLAY

MMC No.

MMC: 413

MMC: 832

MMC: 833

MMC: 753

MMC: 846

MMC: 849

MMC: 848

MMC: 845

MMC: 847

Samsung Business Communications

1-20

CHAPTER 1. Overview of MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

Networking Function

MMC Program No.

MMC: 820

MMC: 821

MMC: 822

MMC: 823

MMC: 824

MMC: 825

MMC: 829

MMC: 830

MMC: 837

MMC: 840

MMC: 841

MMC: 844

Program Description

ASSIGN SYSTEM LINK ID

ASSIGN NETWORK TRUNK

SET VIRTUAL EXTENSION TYPE

ASSIGN NETWORK COS

NETWORK DIAL TRANSLATION

ASSIGN NETWORKING OPTION

LAN PRINTER PARAMETER

ETHERNET PARAMETERS

SIP OPTIONS

IP PHONE INFORMATIONES

SYSTEM IP OPTIONS

IP STATION TYPE

VoIP (Voice over Internet Protocol) Function

MMC Program No.

MMC: 831

MMC: 832

MMC: 833

MMC: 834

MMC: 835

MMC: 836

Program Description

MGI PARAMETERS

VOIP ACCESS CODE

VoIP IP TABLE

H.323 OPTIONS

MGI DSP OPTIONS

H.323 GK OPTIONS

WLAN (Wireless LAN) Function

MMC Program No.

MMC: 845

MMC: 846

MMC: 847

MMC: 848

MMC: 849

Program Description

WLAN PARAMETER

WIP INFORMATION

WLAN RESET AND STATUS CHECK

WLAN IP/MAC LIST

WLAN CONFIGURATION

Samsung Business Communications

1-21

CHAPTER 1. Overview of MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

LCR (Least Cost Routing) Function

MMC Program No.

MMC: 710

MMC: 711

MMC: 712

MMC: 713

MMC: 763

Program Description

LCR DIGIT TABLE

LCR TIME TABLE

LCR ROUTE TABLE

LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE

SECOND LCR

Voice Mail Function

MMC Program No.

MMC: 750

MMC: 751

MMC: 752

MMC: 753

MMC: 754

MMC: 755

MMC: 756

MMC: 757

MMC: 758

MMC: 207

MMC: 215

MMC: 216

MMC: 413

MMC: 726

MMC: 730

MMC: 731

MMC: 732

MMC: 733

MMC: 735

MMC: 736

MMC: 739

Program Description

ASSIGN VM/AA PORT

VOICE DIALLER OPTIONS

VOICE DIALLER ASSIGNMENTS

VMS CALL TYPE

VM/AA OPTIONS

AA RECORD GAIN

AA RAM CLEAR

AA TRANSLATION TABLE

AA PLAN TABLE

AA USE TABLE

AUTO ATTENDANT MESSAGE MATCH

ASSIGN AA MOH

VM CARD RESTART

ASSIGN MAILBOX

AUTO RECORD

WARNING DESTINATION

VM HALT

VM ALARM

ASSIGN VM MOH

VM IN/OUT

VM DAY/NIGHT

Samsung Business Communications

1-22

CHAPTER 1. Overview of MMC Programming

Diagnosis Function

MMC Program No.

MMC: 434

MMC: 851

MMC: 852

MMC: 853

MMC: 854

MMC: 855

MMC: 890

Hotel Function

MMC Program No.

MMC: 221

MMC: 222

MMC: 433

MMC: 513

MMC: 748

MMC: 749

MMC: 760

MMC: 761

MMC: 762

OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

Program Description

CONNECTION STATUS

ALARM REPORTING

SYSTEM ALARM ASSIGNMENTS

MAINTENANCE BUSY

DIAGNOSTIC TIME

SYSTEM OPTIONS

INITIALIZE PORT

Program Description

TRAFFIC REPORT OPTION

EXTENSION TYPE

COST RATE

HOTEL TIMER

COSTING DIAL PLAN

RATE CALCULATION TABLE

ITEM COST TABLE

TAX RATE SETUP

ROOM COST RATE

Samsung Business Communications

1-23

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming

This chapter describes how to use each MMC program. MMCs are listed in numerical order beginning at 100.

Summary of Programming Procedures

Please read the following carefully. It describes the basic steps required for successful programming.

1. Enter programming mode. i) Press the Transfer button. ii) Enter either 200 (for customer level) or 800 (for technician level). iii) Enter either the customer passcode or the technician passcode depending on your selection in step (ii). iv) Press dial button 1 (or use the Volume button) to enable programming mode. v) Press the Speaker button to display the program selection mode (or press the Transfer button to leave programming mode if you don’t want to continue).

2. Select a program.

Enter the MMC number you require. Or, select the MMC number with the Volume buttons and press the Speaker button.

3. Start programming.

Follow the description given for the selected MMC.

If this is the first time the system has been programmed after installation, run

MMC 812 to set the appropriate system software version for your country before doing any other programming.

2-1

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

Programming Procedures

This section describes the procedure for each MMC.

[100] STATION LOCK

Allows the system administrator or technician to lock or unlock an individual station or all stations simultaneously. The three options are as follows:

0

1

No

2

Type Description

UNLOCKED Unlocks a locked station.

LOCKED OUT The phone cannot make calls outside the system. It can however make and receive intercom calls and receive incoming Trunk Line calls. When in this mode the Hold button will flash slow RED.

LOCKED ALL The phone cannot make or receive any calls. When in this mode the

Hold button will light steady RED.

CONDITIONS

Check if the station lock function is disabled in MMC 301, ASSIGN STATION COS. If so, the station cannot be locked, but a locked station can be unlocked.

DEFAULT DATA

ALL STATIONS UNLOCKED

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 100.

Display shows:

2. Dial station number (e.g., 205)

OR

Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

OR

Select all stations.

3. Enter 0 to unlock or 1 to lock (e.g., 1)

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

[201] STN LOCK

UNLOCKED

[205] STN LOCK

UNLOCKED

[ALL] STN LOCK

?

[205] STN LOCK

LOCKED OUT

Samsung Business Communications

2-2

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 101

MMC 301

MMC 701

CHANGE USER PASSCODE

ASSIGN STATION COS

ASSIGN COS CONTENTS

Samsung Business Communications

2-3

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[101] CHANGE USER PASSCODE

Allows the system administrator or technician to reset any phone’s passcode to its default value of ‘1234’. This MMC cannot display station passcodes; it can only reset them to default.

Phone users can set or change their individual passcodes. The passcode is used to lock or unlock the phone for toll restriction (call barring) override and to access the DISA feature.

Default passcodes cannot be used for toll restriction override or for DISA access.

DEFAULT DATA

ALL STATION PASSCODES: 1234

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 101.

Display shows:

2. Dial phone number.(e.g., 205)

OR

Use Volume button to scroll through phone numbers and press Right Soft button to move the cursor right.

3. Press Hold button to reset passcode.

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

[201] PASSCODE

PASSCODE:****

[205] PASSCODE

PASSCODE:****

[205] PASSCODE

PASSCODE:1234

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 100 STATION LOCK

Samsung Business Communications

2-4

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[102] CALL FORWARD

Allows the system administrator to program the call forward destinations for other station users. This MMC also allows call forward to be set after the destination has been entered.

Allows several types of call forwarding: FORWARD ALL, FORWARD NO ANSWER,

FORWARD BUSY and FORWARD DND. There is an additional option, FORWARD

BUSY/NO ANSWER, which allows both of these options to be activated at the same time, provided that destinations have been entered for both.

No Type

CONDITIONS y y y

When ‘FORWARD BUSY/NO ANSWER’ is selected, calls are forwarded to stations set in ‘FORWARD BUSY’ and ‘FORWARD NO ANSWER’. Thus, a destination number must be set for both ‘FORWARD BUSY’ and ‘FORWARD NO ANSWER’ before you can select the ‘FORWARD BUSY/NO ANSWER’ option.

If forwarding is set to ‘OFF’ in MMC 701, ASSIGN COS CONTENTS, call forwarding cannot be set but can be cancelled. (Default: ‘OFF’)

Both ‘FORWARD’ and ‘ICM EXT FWD’ must be set to ‘ON’ in MMC 701, ASSIGN

COS CONTENTS in order to forward a call to an external number. If only ‘FORWARD’ is set to ‘ON’, calls can only be forwarded to internal numbers. (Default: ‘OFF’)

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-5

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 102.

Display shows:

2. Dial station number.(e.g., 205)

OR

Press Volume button to select station and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Dial 0-5 to select forward type.

OR

Press Volume button to select forward type (e.g. 1) and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. Dial destination number (e.g., 201)

OR

Press Volume button to select destination and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

5. Dial 1 for YES, 0 for NO.

OR

Press Volume button to select YES or NO and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

6. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

[201] FORWARD

0:FORWARD CANCEL

[205] FORWARD

0:FORWARD CANCEL

[205] FORWARD

1:ALL CALL:NONE

[205] FORWARD

1:ALL CALL:201

[205] FORWARD

CURRENTLY SET :YES

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 301

MMC 501

MMC 502

MMC 701

MMC 722

MMC 723

ASSIGN STATION COS

SYSTEM TIMERS

STATION-WIDE TIMERS

ASSIGN COS CONTENTS

STATION KEY PROGRAMMING

SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING

Samsung Business Communications

2-6

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[103] SET ANSWER MODE

Allows the system administrator to change the answer mode of any phone. Each phone can have its answer mode set to one of the following options:

No Type Description

0 RING MODE

1 AUTO ANSWER MODE After giving a short attention tone, the phone will automatically answer calls on the speakerphone. When a Trunk line is transferred to a phone in Auto Answer, the screened portion of the call will be Auto Answered, but the phone will ring when the transfer is complete if you have not pressed the ANS/RLS or SEND button or lifted the handset.*

2 VOICE ANNOUNCE

The phone will ring in one of eight custom ring patterns. Calls are answered by pressing the ANS/RLS or SEND button or by lifting the handset.

The phone will not ring. After a short attention tone, callers can make an announcement but the ANS/RLS or SEND button or handset must be used to answer calls.

* To answer C.O. calls automatically, also set ON the option AUTO ANS CO in MMC 110.

DEFAULT DATA

ALL PHONES: RING

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 103.

Display shows:

2. Dial phone number.(e.g., 205)

OR

Press Volume button to select phone and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

OR

Select all phones.

3. Dial 0, 1 or 2 to change ring mode.

OR

Press Volume button to select ring mode and press Right Soft button to return to step 2 above.

[201] ANS MODE

RING MODE

[205] ANS MODE

RING MODE

[ALL] ANS MODE

?

[205] ANS MODE

VOICE ANNOUNCE

Samsung Business Communications

2-7

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 111 PHONE RING TONE

OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications

2-8

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[104] STATION NAME

Allows the system administrator or technician to enter a name up to 11 characters to identify an individual station.

ENTERING CHARACTERS

Names are written using the keypad. Each key press selects a character. Pressing the dial pad key moves the cursor to the next position. For example, if the directory name is ‘SAM

SMITH,’ press the number ‘7’ four times to get the letter ‘S’ . Now press the number ‘2’ once to get the letter ‘A’. Continue selecting characters from the table below to complete your message. Pressing ‘A’ button toggles between upper case and lower case.

When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previous character, press the Volume Up button to move the cursor to the right or the Volume Down button to move the cursor to the left. A space can be entered using these keys.

COUNT 1 2 3 4

DIAL 0

DIAL 1

DIAL 2

DIAL 3

DIAL 4

DIAL 5

DIAL 6

DIAL 7

DIAL 8

DIAL 9

DIAL *

<

Space

A

D

G

J

M

P

T

W

:

B

E

H

K

N

Q

>

?

U

X

=

I

L

C

F

O

R

.

,

V

Y

[

The # button can be used for the following special characters:

#, space, &, !, :, ?, ., ,, %, $, -, <, >, /, =, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ; , ”, Æ, ’. \.

@

#

$

%

^

S

)

!

*

Z

]

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

5

4

5

2

3

6

7

0

1

8

9

*

Samsung Business Communications

2-9

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 104.

Display shows:

2. Dial station number (e.g., 205)

OR

Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter the station name using the procedure described above and press Right Soft button

to return to step 2.

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

[201] STN NAME

[205] STN NAME

_

[205] STN NAME

SAM SMITH

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-10

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[105] STATION SPEED DIAL

Allows the system administrator or technician to assign phone numbers to a station’s personal speed dial locations.

CONDITIONS

Each station may have up to 50 locations (or bins) assigned to it in MMC 606 (Assign

Speed Block). The speed dial bins are numbered 00~49. Each assigned phone number consists of a trunk or trunk group access code followed by a separator and up to 24 digits to be dialled. These dial digits may consist of 0~9, * and #. If the system recognizes a valid trunk or trunk group access number, it will automatically insert the separator.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

PROGRAM BUTTONS

B

C

D

E

F

Used to insert a flash code ‘F’

Used to insert a pause code ‘P’

Used to insert a pulse/tone conversion code ‘C’

Used to mask/unmask following digits (shows as ‘[’or ‘]’)

Used to enter name for speed dial bin (see MMC 106)

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 105.

Display shows:

2. Dial station number (e.g., 205)

OR

Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

If selected station has no speed dial bins, the display will be as shown and a new station

may be selected.

3. Dial location number.(e.g., 05)

OR

Press Volume button to select location and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

[201] SPEED DIAL

00:

[205] SPEED DIAL

00:

[205] SPEED DIAL

SPDBLK NOT EXIST

[205] SPEED DIAL

05:_

Samsung Business Communications

2-11

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

4. Enter trunk access code (e.g., 9) followed by the number to be dialled (e.g., 4264100)

OR

Press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

OR

Press Left Soft button to return to step 3.

Press Hold button to clear an entry.

If an error is made, use VOLUME DOWN arrow to step back.

5. Press ‘F’ button to access MMC 106 (Station Speed

Dial Name) to enter a name for speed dial.

OR

Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 106

MMC 606

STATION SPEED DIAL NAME

ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK

[205] SPEED DIAL

05:9-4264100_

Samsung Business Communications

2-12

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[106] STATION SPEED DIAL NAME

Allows a name up to 11 characters to be entered for each personal speed dial location. This allows speed dial numbers to be selected by name when the directory dial feature is used.

ENTERING CHARACTERS

Refer to ‘ENTERING CHARACTERS’ in MMC 104, STATION NAME.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 106.

Display shows:

2. Dial station number.(e.g., 205)

OR

Press Volume button to select station and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

If selected station has no speed dial bins, the display will be as shown and a new station may be selected.

3. Dial speed dial location (e.g., 01)

OR

Press Volume button to scroll through location numbers and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. Enter the location name using the procedure described above and press Right Soft button to

return to step 2.

5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

[201] SPEED NAME

00:

[205] SPEED NAME

00:

[305] SPEED NAME

SPDBLK NOT EXIST

[205] SPEED NAME

01:_

[205] SPEED NAME

01:SAM SMITH

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 105

MMC 606

STATION SPEED DIAL

ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK

Samsung Business Communications

2-13

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[107] KEY EXTENDER

Use this program to view the programmable buttons assigned to stations. In addition, it allows the system administrator to assign key extenders to some keys to make a general access feature key more specific. The feature keys that can have extenders are listed below.

Key Feature Extender

AB Absence

ACC

BOSS

CR

CS

DIR

DP

DS

Account code bin

Boss and Secretary

VM Call Record

UCD Call Status

Directory dial by name type

Direct Pickup

Direct Station Select

000-999

1-4

Mailbox number

UCD group number

1-3

Extension or station group number

Station number

0-5

01-99

Station group number IG In/Out of Group

MMPG

MW

Meet Me Page

Message Waiting

MS Manual Signalling

PAGE Page

PMSG

RSV

SG

SP

SPD

VG

VM

VT

0-9, *

Extension or station group number

Extension or station group number

Programmed Station Messaging

0-9

01-20

1-6

Room Status View (Hotel Application only) 1-5

Station Group

UCD Supervisor

Speed Dial

Station group number

UCD group number

Personal: 00-49

System: 500-999

SVM-800 Group Message

VM Memo

Station group number

Extension or station group number

Voice Transfer VM group number

Samsung Business Communications

2-14

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 107.

Display shows first station:

2. Dial station number (e.g., 205)

OR

Use Volume button to scroll through station numbers and press Right Soft button to move the cursor.

3. Enter key number (e.g., 18)

OR

Use Volume button to scroll through keys and use Right Soft button to move the cursor.

OR

Press the key to be programmed.

4. Dial extender according to above table.

System will return to step 3.

5. Press Left Soft button to return to step 2

OR

Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

[201] EXT (MAST)

01:CALL1

Æ

[205] EXT (MAST)

01:CALL1

Æ

[205] EXT (MAST)

18:DS

Æ

[205] EXT (MAST)

18: DS

Æ DS_

[205] EXT (MAST)

18: DS

Æ DS207

If the Right Soft button will not move the cursor to the right, you are attempting to add an extender to a key that cannot have one.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 720

MMC 721

MMC 722

MMC 723

MMC 724

COPY KEY PROGRAMMING

SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING

STATION KEY PROGRAMMING

SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING

DIAL NUMBERING PLAN

Samsung Business Communications

2-15

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[108] STATION STATUS

This is a READ-ONLY MMC. Displays the following attributes of a station port.

No Status Description

Chassis(1-3)/Slot(1-9)/Port(1-16)

6

9

1 TYPE

2 PICKUP GROUP

3 SGR

4 BOSS-SECR

5 PAGE

COS 1, COS 2

TENANT GROUP

None, 01-99

None, Page Zone (0-4, * )

COS (01-30) per Ring Plan (01-06)

Tenant Group Number (1 or 2)

DEFAULT DATA

PORT #: FOLLOWS HARDWARE POSITION

TYPE: DEPENDENT ON CONNECTED PHONE

PICKUP GRP: NONE

SGR: NONE

BOSS-SECR: NONE

PAGE ZONE: NONE

COS NUMBER: 01 IN ALL RING PLANS

TENANT GRP: 1

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 108.

Display shows first station:

2. Dial station number.(e.g., 205)

OR

Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Dial 0~9 to select station status type.

OR

Press Volume button to select status and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

[201] STN STATUS

PORT:C1-S3-P01

[205] STN STATUS

PORT:C1-S3-P05

[205] STN STATUS

PICKUP GROUP:01

Samsung Business Communications

2-16

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 301

MMC 302

MMC 303

MMC 601

MMC 604

ASSIGN STATION COS

PICKUP GROUPS

ASSIGN BOSS/SECRETARY

ASSIGN STATION GROUP

ASSIGN STATION TO PAGE ZONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-17

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[109] DATE DISPLAY

Allows the system administrator or technician to select the date and time display mode on a per-station basis or system wide.

No

0

1

2

Mode

COUNTRY

CLOCK

DISPLAY

Description

Sets overall display format and has two options:

0 = ORIENTAL

1 = WESTERN

MM/DD DAY HH:MM

DAY DD MON HH:MM

Sets format of clock display and has two options:

0 = 12 HOUR Displays 1 P.M. as 01:00

1 = 24 HOUR Displays 1 P.M. as 13:00

Sets format of DAY and MON display and has two options:

0 = UPPER CASE Displays Friday as FRI and March as MAR

1 = LOWER CASE Displays Friday as Fri and March as Mar

CONDITIONS

NONE

DEFAULT DATA

COUNTRY: WESTERN

CLOCK: 12 HOUR

DISPLAY: LOWER CASE

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 109.

Display shows:

2. Dial station number.(e.g., 205)

OR

Press Volume button to select station and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

OR

Select all stations.

3. Dial 0~2 to select mode.

OR

Press Volume button to scroll through modes and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. Press Volume button to scroll through formats and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

[201] DAY FORMAT

COUNTRY:WESTERN

[205] DAY FORMAT

COUNTRY:WESTERN

[ALL] DAY FORMAT

COUNTRY:?

[205] DAY FORMAT

COUNTRY:ORIENTAL

Samsung Business Communications

2-18

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming

5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 505 ASSIGN DATE AND TIME

OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications

2-19

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[110] STATION ON/OFF

Allows the system administrator to set any of the phone features listed below.

No Feature

00 AUTO HOLD

01 AUTO TIMER

Default

OFF

ON

02 HEADSET USE OFF

03 HOT KEYPAD

04 KEY TONE

05 PAGE REJOIN

06 RING PREF.

07 CALL COST

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

08 AUTO CAMPON OFF

09 AME BGM OFF

10 AME PASSCODE OFF

11 DISP SPDNAME OFF

12 CID REVW ALL ON

13 SECURE OHVA ON

Description

Automatically places an existing Trunk Line call on hold if a CALL key, trunk key or trunk route key is pressed during that call.

Automatically starts the stopwatch timer during a Trunk

Line call.

When ON, this feature disables the hook switch allowing a headset user to answer all calls by pressing the

ANS/RLS button or SEND and END buttons.

When ON, this feature allows you to dial directory numbers without having to first lift the handset or press the

Speaker button.

Allows you to hear a slight tone when pressing buttons on phone.

Allows you to hear the remaining part of page announcements if phone becomes free during a page.

When OFF, requires you to press the fast flashing button to answer a ringing call after lifting the handset.

When ON, the cost of the call in progress will show in the upper right corner of the phone display instead of duration of the call.

When ON, phone users can allow intercom calls to camp-on to other phones without having to press a

CAMP-ON key.

This feature selects whether a station using Answer Machine Emulation will hear their personal greeting or BGM while callers are listening to the personal greeting.

A BGM source must be selected for this to work.

When ON, station users who have AME set must enter their station password to listen to messages being left.

When ON, the speed dial name associated with a speed dial number is displayed on a phone equipped a LCD display when using speed dial.

When ON, saves information on all calls that ring at an extension, When OFF, saves information only on calls that were not answered at the extension or were answered by voice mail.

When ON, OHVA announcements will be heard on the handset. When OFF, OHVA announcements will be heard over the phone speaker.

Samsung Business Communications

2-20

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

No Feature Default

14 NOT CONT.CID ON

15 AUTO ANS CO

16 ENBLOCK 2LCD OFF

17 STN NO RING

OFF

OFF

Description

When OFF, the Caller ID will be displayed for the duration of the call. When ON, displays timer for duration of call (if AUTO TIMER also set on).

When ON, keyset will automatically answer outside calls through the speakerphone. For this to work, the keyset must be set to Auto Answer mode in MMC 103. Calls to groups cannot be auto-answered.

Enables Enbloc dialling for 2-Line LCD phones. This option only works when 2 LINE ENBLOCK option is enabled in MMC 861.

When ON, no tones will be heard when phone rings.

DEFAULT DATA

SEE DESCRIPTION

SOME OPTIONS DEPEND ON COUNTRY

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 110.

Display shows:

2. Dial the station number (e.g. 205)

OR

Press Volume button to select station and press the Right Soft button to move the cursor.

OR

Select all stations

3. Dial option number from above list (e.g. 03

OR

Press Volume button to select option and press the Right Soft button to move the cursor.

4. Dial 1 for ON or 0 for OFF.

OR

Press Volume button to select ON or OFF.

Press Left or Right Soft button to return to step 2.

OR

5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

[201] STN ON/OFF

AUTO HOLD :OFF

[205] STN ON/OFF

AUTO HOLD :OFF

[205] STN ON/OFF

HOT KEYPAD :ON

[201] STN ON/OFF

HOT KEYPAD :OFF

Samsung Business Communications

2-21

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 301

MMC 701

ASSIGN STATION COS

ASSIGN COS CONTENTS

OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications

2-22

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[111] PHONE RING TONE

Allows the system administrator or technician to select the ring tone heard at each phone.

Eight ring tones are available. A short tone burst of the selection will be heard when the dial keypad is pressed.

DEFAULT DATA

FREQUENCY: 5

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 111.

Display shows:

2. Dial phone number (e.g., 205)

OR

Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

OR

Select all stations

3. Dial 1~8 to select ring tone.

OR

Press Volume button to select ring tone and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

[201] RING TONE

SELECTION 5

[205] RING TONE

SELECTION 5

[ALL] RING TONE

SELECTION ?

[205] RING TONE

SELECTION 5

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 114

MMC 318

PHONE VOLUME

DISTINCTIVE RINGING

Samsung Business Communications

2-23

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[112] ALARM REMINDER CLOCK

Allows the system administrator or technician to set or change the alarm clock/appointment reminder feature for any station. Three alarms may be set for each station and each alarm may be defined as a one-time or TODAY alarm, or as a DAILY alarm. The TODAY alarm is automatically cancelled after it rings, while the DAILY alarm rings every day at the same time. Alarm numbers are 1, 2 and 3. In the case of Station Pair assignments (MMC 740) the alarm only rings the station that is programmed and does not ring the paired station.

Description No Type

0 NOTSET

1 TODAY

2 DAILY

Alarm once only

Alarm daily at set time

DEFAULT DATA

ALARMS ARE NOTSET

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 112.

Display shows:

2. Dial station number (e.g., 205)

OR

Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button.

3. Dial 1~3 to select alarm (e.g., 1)

OR

Press Volume button to select alarm and press Right Soft button.

4. Enter alarm time in 24-hour clock format.

(e.g., 1300 for 1pm)

5. Dial entry from above list for alarm type (e.g., 2)

OR

Press Volume button to select alarm type and press

Right Soft button to move cursor and return to step 2.

[201] ALM CLK(1)

HHMM:

ÆNOTSET

[205] ALM CLK(1)

HHMM:

ÆNOTSET

[205] ALM CLK(1)

HHMM:

ÆNOTSET

[205] ALM CLK(1)

HHMM:1300

ÆNOTSET

[205] ALM CLK(1)

HHMM:1300

ÆDAILY

Samsung Business Communications

2-24

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

6. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 116 ALARM AND MESSAGE

Samsung Business Communications

2-25

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[113] VIEW MEMO NUMBER

Used to enter memos (up to 13 characters) on a station. Up to three memos can be entered, depending on your system. MMC 116 (Alarm and Message) can be programmed to remind the keyset user to read the memo(s).

ENTER CHARACTERS

Refer to ‘ENTER CHARACTERS’ in MMC 104, STATION NAME.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 113.

Display shows:

2. Dial the keyset number (e.g., 205)

OR

Press VOLUME keys to select station and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor

3. Dial memo number (1–3)

OR

Press VOLUME keys to select and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor

4. Enter memo via dial keypad.

[201] VIEW MEMO

1:

[205] VIEW MEMO

1:

[205] VIEW MEMO

1:_

[205] VIEW MEMO

1:CALL TOM

5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-26

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[114] PHONE VOLUME

Allows the system administrator to set the ring volume, off-hook ring volume, handset receive volume, speaker volume, background music volume and page volume for any or all phones. Station users can set their own phones if required.

No

0

1

2

3

4

5

Type Description

RING VOLUME This is the volume setting for the phone ringer. There are eight volume levels: level 1 is the lowest and level 8 the highest.

OFF-RING VOL This is the volume of the alert tone that tells you there is a call camped on to your phone. There are eight volume levels: level 1 is the lowest and level 8 the highest.

HANDSET VOL This is the volume setting for conversations on the handset receiver.

There are eight volume levels: level 1 is the lowest and level 8 the highest.

SPEAKER VOL This is the receive volume setting for conversations on the speaker phone of a phone. There are 16 volume levels: level 1 is the lowest and level 16 the highest.

BGM VOLUME This is the volume you will hear background music over the phone speaker at when your phone is idle and BGM is turned on. There are

16 volume levels: level 1 is the lowest and level 16 the highest.

PAGE VOLUME This is the volume you will hear internal page over the phone speaker when your phone is idle and BGM is turned on. There are 16 volume levels: level 1 is the lowest and level 16 the highest.

DEFAULT DATA

RING VOLUME: 4

OFF-HOOK RING VOLUME: 4

HANDSET VOLUME: 4

SPEAKER VOLUME: 13

BGM VOLUME: 13

PAGE VOLUME: 13

Samsung Business Communications

2-27

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 114.

Display shows:

2. Dial phone number (e.g., 205)

3. Dial volume type (e.g. 3)

OR

Press Volume button to select volume type and press

RIGHT soft key to move cursor

4. Press Volume button to select volume. (You will hear a brief tone for the volume you select)

5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

[201] STN VOLUME

RING VOLUME :4

[205] STN VOLUME

RING VOLUME :4

[205] STN VOLUME

SPEAKER VOL :13

[205] STN VOLUME

SPEAKER VOL :08

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 111 PHONE RING TONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-28

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[115] SET PROGRAMMED MESSAGE

Allows the system administrator to set a programmed message at any or all display phones.

There are 20 messages (01-20) available. The last five message can be modified by each phone user.

CONDITIONS

These messages are as set up in MMC 715, PROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE.

DEFAULT DATA

NO MESSAGES SELECTED

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 115.

Display shows:

2. Dial station number (e.g., 205)

OR

Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

OR

Select all stations.

3. Dial message number (e.g., 05)

OR

Press Volume button to select message and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

OR

Dial 00 to cancel an existing message

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

[201] PGMMSG(00)

CANCEL PGM MSG

[205] PGMMSG(00)

CANCEL PGM MSG

[ALL] PGMMSG(??)

[205] PGMMSG(05)

PAGE ME

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 715

MMC 722

MMC 723

PROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE

STATION KEY PROGRAMMING

SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING

Samsung Business Communications

2-29

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[116] ALARM AND MESSAGE

Allows the system administrator or technician to set or change the alarm clock/appointment reminder feature for any station. Three alarms may be set for each station and each alarm may be defined as a one-time or TODAY alarm, or as a DAILY alarm.

The TODAY alarm is automatically cancelled after it rings, while the DAILY alarm rings every day at the same time. It is also possible to set a message to display when the alarm is sounded.

Description No Type

0 NOTSET

1 TODAY

2 DAILY

Alarm once only

Alarm daily at set time

ENTERING CHARACTERS

Refer to ENTERING CHARACTERS in MMC 104, STATION NAME.

DEFAULT DATA

ALARMS ARE NOTSET

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 116.

Display shows:

2. Dial station number (e.g., 205)

OR

Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

OR

Select all stations.

3. Dial 1~3 to select alarm (e.g., 2)

OR

Press Volume button to select alarm and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

[201] ALM REM(1)

HHMM:

ÆNOTSET

[205] ALM REM(1)

HHMM:

ÆNOTSET

[ALL] ALM REM(1)

HHMM:

ÆNOTSET

[205] ALM REM(2)

HHMM:

ÆNOTSET

Samsung Business Communications

2-30

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

4. Enter alarm time in 24-hour clock format.

(e.g., 1300 for 1pm)

Display will automatically advance to step 5.

5. Dial valid entry from above list for alarm type.

(e.g., 2)

OR

Press Volume button to select alarm type and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

6. Enter message and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

7. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 112 ALARM REMINDER CLOCK

[205] ALM REM(2)

HHMM:1300

ÆNOTSET

[205] ALM REM

HHMM:1300

ÆDAILY

[205] ALM REM

Meeting

Samsung Business Communications

2-31

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[117] EDIT TEXT MESSAGE

Allows the system administrator or technician to set or change text messages for any station. One station can use up to 10 text messages.

CONDITIONS

Only stations allowed to use text messages in MMC 611 can be selected here. Large LCD phones are automatically allowed.

ENTERING CHARACTERS

Refer to ENTERING CHARACTERS in MMC 104, STATION NAME.

DEFAULT DATA

BLANK MESSAGE

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 117.

Display shows:

2. Dial station number (e.g., 205)

OR

Press Volume button to select station and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Dial 01~10 to select message.

OR

Press Volume button to select message and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. Enter message and press Right Soft button to return to step 3.

5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

[201] TXTMSG(01)

Blank Message

[205] TXTMSG(01)

Blank Message

[205] TXTMSG(02)

Blank Message

[205] TXTMSG(02)

SAME TIME

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 611 ALLOW TEXT MESSAGING

Samsung Business Communications

2-32

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[118] CONFERENCE GROUP

Allows the system administrator or technician to set conference groups for any station. A station is allowed up to five conference groups, and each group can include 4 members

(excluding the station itself). Names can be allocated to groups.

Conference members can be other stations, station groups, and external telephone numbers

(which must include the outgoing access code).

CONDITIONS

Only stations set to use conference groups in MMC 612 can be selected here. Large LCD phones are automatically set to use conference groups.

ENTERING CONFERENCE GROUP NAME

Refer to ENTERING CHARACTERS in MMC 104, STATION NAME.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 118.

Display shows:

2. Dial station number (e.g., 205)

OR

Press Volume button to select station and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Dial 1~5 to select group.

OR

Press Volume button to select group and press.

Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. Dial 0 to select name or dial 1~4 to select member.

OR

Press Volume button to select name or member and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

OR

Press Left Soft button to return to step 3.

5. Enter conference member dial number and press Right Soft button to return to step 4.

[201] GRP(1)NAME

[205] GRP(1)NAME

[205] GRP(1)NAME

[205] GRP(1)MBR1

NONE

[205] GRP(1)MBR1

9-2794296

Samsung Business Communications

2-33

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

6. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 612 ALLOW GROUP CONFERENCE

Samsung Business Communications

2-34

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[119] CALLER ID DISPLAY

Allows the technician to set the individual station display preference on a per-station basis.

Caller ID or CLI can be selected to either show the name, number first, or no display depending on the type of call. Caller ID or CLI displays have the following options:

No Type

0 NO DISPLAY

1 NUMBER FIRST

2 NAME FIRST

Description

No Caller ID or CLIP data will be displayed.

The Caller ID or CLIP number received from the Central Office will be displayed first.

The Caller ID or CLIP name received will be displayed first.

In the case of CLIP the number must be programmed in the

CLIP translation table(MMC 728). CLIP does not provide names.

DEFAULT DATA

NUMBER FIRST

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 119.

Display shows first station:

2. Enter station number (e.g., 205)

OR

Press Volume button to select station and press Right

Soft button

OR

Select all stations

3. Dial display option 0, 1 or 2 (e.g., 2)

OR

Press Volume button to select option and press

Right or Left Soft button to return to step 2.

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

[201] CID DISP

NUMBER FIRST

[205] CID DISP

NUMBER FIRST

[ALL] CID DISP

NUMBER FIRST

[205] CID DISP

NAME FIRST

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 312

MMC 608

MMC 728

ALLOW CALLER ID

ASSIGN REVIEW BLOCK

CID TRANSLATION TABLE

Samsung Business Communications

2-35

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[120] LARGE LCD OPTIONS

Allows the system administrator to set any of the following options for large LCD phones.

No Option

1 DS KEY DISPLAY

Description

Sets whether to display ‘CALENDAR’ or ‘INFORMATION’ on LCD when idle

Sets whether to display extension numbers or names for ‘DS’ keys on LCD

Sets dial mode to ENBLOCK or OVERLAP

SOFT MENU FIRST

If selected, features assigned to keys are displayed when

SCREEN key is pressed while on a call.

4 CALENDAR

AOM KEY FIRST

If selected, extensions assigned to keys are displayed when

SCREEN key is pressed while on a call.

Sets whether to display PREVIOUS screen or CALENDAR screen on LCD when idle

Sets cursor position on AOM menu screen (01~99, PREV POSI-

TION)

DEFAULT DATA

IDLE DISPLAY: CALENDAR

DS KEY DISPLAY: TEL NUMBER

DIAL MODE: ENBLOCK

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 120.

Display shows:

2. Enter station number (e.g., 203)

OR

Press Volume button to scroll through stations and press Right Soft button to select a station.

OR

Select all stations and press the Right Soft button.

3. Dial the option number from above list (e.g., 1)

OR

Press Volume button to select the option and press Right Soft button to move the cursor.

[201] IDLE DISP

CALENDER

[203] IDLE DISP

CALENDER

[ALL] IDLE DISP

CALENDER

[203] DS KEY DSP

TEL NUMBER

Samsung Business Communications

2-36

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

4. Press Volume button to select display type and press Right

Soft button.

5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

[203] DS KEY DSP

EXT NAME

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 719 IDLE DISPLAY

Samsung Business Communications

2-37

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[121] PHONE LANGUAGE

Allows the system administrator to assign an LCD display based on the user’s own language.

No. Language

00 ENGLISH

01 GERMAN

02 PORTUGAL

03 NORSK

04 DANISH

05 DUTCH

No. Language

06 ITALY

07 SPANISH

08 SWEDISH

09 SPANISH/USA

10 FRENCH/CANADA

11 FINNISH

DEFAULT DATA

ENGLISH

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 121.

Display shows:

2. Dial station number (e.g., 205)

OR

Press Volume button to select station and use

Right Soft button to move cursor.

OR

Select all stations.

3. Dial 00~10 for language required.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button.

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

[201] LANGUAGE

ENGLISH

[205] LANGUAGE

ENGLISH

[ALL] LANGUAGE

?

[205] LANGUAGE

GERMAN

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-38

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[122] NEWS DISPLAY SPEED

Used to set the Smart News display speed between 0300 mS (fastest) and 1 sec (slowest).

This timer is related to the Smart News PC Application Package.

DEFAULT DATA

03 (0300 mS)

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 122.

Display shows first station:

2. Enter station number (e.g., 205)

OR

Press Volume button to scroll through stations and press Right Soft button to select a station.

OR

[201] CALL SPEED

03

Æ

[205] CALL SPEED

03

Æ

Select all stations

3. Dial speed option (03~10)

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

[205] CALL SPEED

03

Æ04

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-39

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[125] EXECUTIVE STATE

Allows the system administrator or technician to set an executive station’s options, as follows.

No Option Description

0 EXEC STATE When working with EASYSET, the state of the executive station can be displayed (e.g. IN A MEETING)

If EXEC STATE set to OTHERS(IN), EASYSET displays this message. 1 STATE(IN)

2 STATE(OUT) If EXEC STATE set to OTHERS(OUT), EASYSET displays this message.

3 ANSWER MODE Set answer mode for executive/secretary calling: Ring, Auto Answer,

Voice Announce. (Refer to MMC 103 for a description of answer modes.)

ENTER CHARACTERS

Refer to ‘ENTER CHARACTERS’ in MMC 104, STATION NAME.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 125.

Display shows:

2. Dial executive station number (e.g., 205)

OR

Press Volume button to select station and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Dial 0~3 to select option (see table above).

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button.

[201] EXEC STATE

IN THE ROOM

[205] EXEC STATE

IN THE ROOM

[205] EXEC STATE

IN THE ROOM

4. Dial 0~9 to select state (e.g. IN A MEETING)

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button.

5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

[205] EXEC STATE

IN A MEETING

Samsung Business Communications

2-40

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications

2-41

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[200] OPEN CUSTOMER PROGRAMMING

Used to open (enable) and close (disable) customer-level programming. If programming is not opened and an attempt is made to access a system MMC, the error message [NOT

PERMIT] will be displayed. A four digits passcode is required to access this MMC. Each digit can be 0-9. When opened, this MMC enables access to all MMCs allowed in MMC

802, Customer Access MMC Number.

No Mode

0

1

DISABLE

ENABLE

Description

Open (enable) customer-level programming

Close (disable) customer-level programming

DEFAULT DATA

DISABLE

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 200.

Display shows:

Incorrect code shows.

ENABLE CUS.PROG.

PASSCODE:

ENABLE CUS.PROG.

PASSCODE:

ENABLE CUS.PROG.

DISABLE

ENABLE CUS.PROG.

PASSCODE ERROR

ENABLE CUS.PROG.

ENABLE

3. Press Volume button arrow key to select ENABLE or DISABLE and press Right Soft button.

OR

Dial 1 for ENABLE or 0 for DISABLE.

4. Press Speaker button to advance MMC entry level and press Volume button to select MMC.

OR

Enter MMC number and press Right Soft button to enter MMC.

5. Press Transfer button to exit.

201:CUS.PASSCODE

SELECT PROG. ID

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 201

MMC 501

MMC 802

CHANGE CUSTOMER PASSCODE

SYSTEM-WIDE TIMERS

CUSTOMER ACCESS MMC NUMBER

Samsung Business Communications

2-42

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[201] CHANGE CUSTOMER PASSCODE

Used to change the passcode allowing access to MMC 200, Open Customer Programming, from its current value.

CONDITIONS y y

The passcode is four digits long. Each digit can be 0-9.

The current (old) passcode is required for this MMC.

DEFAULT DATA

PASSCODE: 1234

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 201.

2. Enter new passcode via dial keypad.

(maximum four digits)

3. Verify new passcode via dial keypad.

Passcode verified (go to step 4)

OR

Passcode failure (return to step 2)

CUST. PASSCODE

NEW CODE:_

CUST. PASSCODE

NEW CODE:****

CUST. PASSCODE

VERIFY :****

CUST. PASSCODE

VERIFY :SUCCESS

CUST. PASSCODE

VERIFY :FAILURE

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 200 OPEN CUSTOMER PROGRAMMING

Samsung Business Communications

2-43

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[202] CHANGE FEATURE PASSCODE

Used to change the passcodes for the following features.

No Feature Description

0

1

RING PLAN

DISA ALARM

The passcode required to place the system in different ring plans (RP) or change the ring time override (RTO).

The passcode required to clear a DISA ALARM generated when the number of DISA attempts are exceeded.

2

5

ALARM CLR

DELETE

The passcode required to clear an ALARM generated by the disconnection of BI-PMS SIO. (Hotel Application only).

This passcode is used to allow items to be deleted from a room bill.

(Hotel Application only).

6 WLAN REGST The passcode required to register a WIP phone.

CONDITIONS y y

The passcode is four digits long. Each digit can be 0~9.

The current passcode is required for this MMC.

DEFAULT DATA

RING PLAN: 0000

DISA ALARM: 5678

ALARM CLR: 8765

DECT REGST: 4321

DELETE: 9999

WLAN REGST: 0000

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 202.

Display shows:

2. Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to move cursor to passcode entry.

3. Enter new passcode via digits from dial keypad.

CHANGE PASSCODE

RING PLAN :0000

CHANGE PASSCODE

DISA ALARM :5678

CHANGE PASSCODE

DISA ALARM :9999

Press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

Continue to change other passcodes.

Samsung Business Communications

2-44

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 410

MMC 507

ASSIGN DISA TRUNK

ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME

OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications

2-45

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[203] ASSIGN UA DEVICE

Assigns ringing device to be accessed when a Universal Answer (UA) key is pressed or the

UA pickup code is dialled. UA assignment is made in MMC 601, Assign Station Group, for a group and then the group is entered here. The device type is automatically determined by the directory number (DN) entered.

Only one of the above options can be selected. If the ability to ring more than one item (e.g., all four external page zones) is required, a station group containing all four zone codes must be created.

Ringing Device

NONE (NO UA)

Description

No phone number

STN GROUP

RING PAGE

COMMON BELL

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

Station group number

External speaker phone number

Common bell phone number

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 203.

Display shows current assignment:

2. Dial DN of UA device (e.g., 205)

OR

Use Volume buttons to scroll through available devices.

3. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

ASSIGN UA PORT

NONE-NO UA

ASSIGN UA PORT

205 -STATION

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 204

MMC 601

MMC 605

COMMON BELL CONTROL

ASSIGN STATION GROUP

ASSIGN EXTERNAL PAGE ZONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-46

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[204] COMMON BELL CONTROL

Determines whether the common bell relay contacts have an interrupted or continuous closure when activated. If interrupted is chosen, the relay follows an internal Trunk Line ring pattern of one second closed followed by three seconds open.

CONDITIONS y When the common bell is not used for night time ring, the common bell must be set to a station group so that all stations in the group ring.

DEFAULT DATA

CONTINUOUS

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 204.

Display shows current setting:

2. Dial common bell number.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection of common bell numbers and press Right Soft button to advance cursor.

3. Dial 0 for continuous or 1 for interrupted operation.

OR

Use Volume button to scroll through options and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

[3801]COM. BELL

CONTINUOUS

[3801]COM. BELL

CONTINUOUS

[3802]COM. BELL

INTERRUPTED

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 203

MMC 601

ASSIGN UA DEVICE

ASSIGN STATION GROUP

Samsung Business Communications

2-47

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[205] ASSIGN LOUD BELL

Designates the station that controls the loud bell ring output of a MIS module. (Each MIS module provides one loud bell port.) The loud bell will follow the ring cadence of the designated station.

CONDITIONS

Only a station can be assigned to control the loud bell, not a station group.

DEFAULT DATA

UNASSIGNED

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 205.

Display shows current setting.

2. Dial loud bell number (e.g., 3902)

OR

Use Volume button to scroll through loud bell numbers and press Right Soft button to move the cursor.

3. Enter station number (e.g., 201)

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

[3901]LOUD BELL

RING PAIR:NONE

[3902]LOUD BELL

RING PAIR:NONE

[3902]LOUD BELL

RING PAIR:201

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-48

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[206] BARGE-IN TYPE

Sets the type of barge-in that is permitted.

No Type

0 NO BARGE-IN

1 WITH TONE

2 WITHOUT TONE

Description

Barge-in feature is unavailable regardless of a station’s barge-in status.

Barge-in will have an intrusion tone and display at the station barged-in on.

Barge-in is allowed. There is no barge-in tone or display at the station barged-in on and the barging-in station will be muted.

DEFAULT DATA

NO BARGE-IN

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 206.

Display shows:

2. Dial 0-2 to select barge-in type (e.g., 2)

OR

Press Volume button to select barge-in type and press Right Soft button.

BARGE IN TYPE

NO BARGE IN

BARGE IN TYPE

WITHOUT TONE

3. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 301

MMC 701

ASSIGN STATION COS

ASSIGN COS CONTENTS

Samsung Business Communications

2-49

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[207] ASSIGN VM/AA PORT

Enables SLI ports to be designated as NORMAL or VMAA. VMAA ports receive digits designated in MMC 726 (VM/AA Options) and also receive a true disconnect signal on completion of a call. Only SLI modules, not keyset daughterboards, support disconnect signal. Do not make VMAA ports data; this will return them to a single line port and stop voice mail integration. VMAA ports have the equivalent of data protect written in the program and are protected against tones.

This MMC is not used to assign voice mail module ports. Voice mail module ports are assigned as voice mail ports automatically when the system detects an SVM-

400 or SVMi-20E module.

DEFAULT DATA

NORMAL PORT

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 207.

[209] VMAA PORT

NORMAL PORT

2. Dial station number (e.g., 205)

OR

Press Volume button to select station and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Dial 1 or 0 to select port type.

(1:VMAA, 0:NORMAL)

OR

Press Volume button to select type and press

Right Soft button.

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

[205] VMAA PORT

NORMAL PORT

[205] VMAA PORT

VMAA PORT

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 726 VM/AA OPTIONS

Samsung Business Communications

2-50

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[208] ASSIGN RING TYPE

Allows programming of single lines to have ICM ringing, Trunk Line ringing and data secure. With the many types of external ringing devices, all configurations can be met. All devices will also have a positive disconnect signal. Do not make VM/AA ports data; this will return them to a single line port and stop voice mail integration.

No Type Description

0 ICM RING

1 CO RING

Follows normal SLI ring cadence.

Follows Trunk line ring cadence.

2 DATA RING Follows Trunk line ring cadence and does not support off-hook ring.

DEFAULT DATA

ICM RING

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 208.

Display shows:

2. Dial station number (e.g., 205)

OR

Press Volume button to select station and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Dial 1, 2 or 0 to select port type (e.g., 2)

OR

Press Volume button to select type and press

Left or Right Soft button to return to step 2 above.

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

[209] RING TYPE

ICM RING

[205] RING TYPE

ICM RING

[205] RING TYPE

DATA RING

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-51

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[209] ASSIGN ADD-ON MODULE

Designates to which phone an add-on module (AOM) is assigned. There is no limit to the number of AOMs that can be assigned in the system. A maximum of four AOMs can be assigned to a keyset.

CONDITIONS

An AOM cannot be designated as Master. If no AOM exists in the system, the ‘AOM NOT

EXIST’ message is displayed.

DEFAULT DATA

MASTER:NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 209.

Display shows first AOM:

[301] AOM MASTER

MASTER:NONE

[301] AOM MASTER

MASTER:NONE

OR

Use Volume button to scroll through AOM numbers and use Soft buttons to move cursor.

3. Enter station number (e.g., 301)

OR

Use Volume button for selection of stations and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

[301] AOM MASTER

MASTER:201

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-52

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[210] CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TENANT

Allows the system administrator to set system features on a per-tenant basis. Each system option has a corresponding dialling number, as listed below. All options toggle ON/OFF.

No Option

00 DISA PSWD

01 LCR ENABLE

05 DISA MOH

06 TRANSFER

MOH

09 ALARM MOH

12 CONF TONE

Default

ON

OFF

03 PERI UCD RPT OFF

04 CID CODE INS OFF

OFF

OFF

08 DID BSY ROUT OFF

ON

OFF

13 RECALL PIKUP ON

Description

When ON, a caller must enter extension number and DISA password when they call a DISA trunk. When OFF, extension number and DISA password are not required and the caller has full access to all features allowed on this trunk.

This option determines whether the system will or will not route outgoing calls based on the information in the LCR routing tables

Periodic UCD Information provider. Enables UCD Statistics data on a per-UCD group basis to print out on the IO port which has been set as PERI UCD in real time (every 3~99 seconds). This allows the information to be interfaced and manipulated by an external package or third party provided software.

When ON, the system will insert the country code when receiving CID information. This feature can use the CID display callback feature.

When ON, outside parties will hear trunk MOH instead of dial tone from the time the system answers a DISA trunk until the caller dials a digit.

When ON, outside parties will hear trunk MOH instead of ringback tone from the time a transfer is completed until the call is answered by an internal party.

When ON, a DID call directed to a busy station will re-route to the destination in MMC 406 for that trunk, if CW is set to

OFF in MMC 714. If the CW option is set to ON the call will camp on. When OFF and the CW option is set to OFF, the call will re-route to the operator.

When ON, a station user answering an alarm ring will hear station MOH instead of dial tone.

When ON, provides conference tone. (Available in Australia and Italy only.)

When ON, a call recalling to a station can be picked up using

Direct Call Pickup, Pickup Group and My Group features.

This applies to held calls recalling and transferred calls recalling to a station.

Samsung Business Communications

2-53

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

No Option Default

14 ICM EXT FWD OFF

16 DID ERR TONE OFF

18 KTS DISC ALM OFF

19 OFF HOOK ALM OFF

20 SL SELF RING OFF

21 SGR INC BUSY OFF

24 TRANSFER

CANCEL

26 RECALL DISC

29 ARD TONE CHK ON

30 VPN ENABLE

31 IN TOLL CHK

32 ISDN

PROGCON

33 INCLUDE VAT

36 DSS KEY DPU

OFF

OFF

OFF

37 BEGN DGT DSP OFF

FACC

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

Description

When ON, call forward external is allowed when intercom calls are placed to a station that has Call Forward External programmed and set.

This option provides error tone when an invalid DID number is received.

When ON, generates a system alarm when a phone disconnects or connects.

When ON, generates a system alarm when a phone stays off-hook longer than this timer.

When ON, generates ring of 10 seconds when a single line phone dials itself and hangs up (self test).

When ON, generates busy tone when all station group members are busy for a group call. This does not work for station groups which have Unconditional Ring mode set.

When OFF, a single line phone can handle 2 calls simultaneously using the hook-flash to toggle between them. When

ON, a single line phone can connect to the second call, but pressing the hook-flash will not toggle between the two calls it will disconnect the second call and reconnect the single line phone to the first call.

When ON, the system disconnects a transferred call when it recalls.

When system detects CO BUSY TONE from Central Office, it returns to auto redial state.

When ON, VPN is enabled. (Australia only.)

When OFF, the system doesn’t toll restrict incoming calls.

When ON, if an outgoing call receives PROGRESS message from ISDN trunk, the call will connect without CON-

NECT message.

When ON, an “Inclusive VAT of” line is printed on Hotel invoices (Hotel Application).

When ON, pressing a DS key will pick up the call at a ringing station

When ON, and an outside call is made via speed dial or LNR where more than 11 digits are dialled, then only the first 11 dialled digits are shown on the phone display.

When OFF, phone users cannot use one-touch account code (ACC) key.

Samsung Business Communications

2-54

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

No Option Default

39 SGR ALL OUT OFF

40 CHAIN FWD

43 NTWK

AUTOTMR

44 USE EURO

COD

OFF

46 PERI UCD SIO OFF

47 AUTO

CLEANED

ON

41 TRK MONITER OFF

42 VOIP MFRALOC OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

48 REDIAL REVW OFF

50 ISDN KEYFAC

52 CHK SPV TRK

BUSY

OFF

OFF

OFF

54 ORG DIAL LOG OFF

Description

When ON, the last remaining station group member can leave a group.

If ON, an incoming call forwarded from a station to another station may then be forwarded to the mailbox of the second station, if the latter is set for ‘forward to voice mail’. If this option is OFF, the call may only be forwarded to the mailbox of the first station.

If ON, the system will monitor the trunk supervision signalling. That is, if a disconnection signal is received from the exchange, the call will be cleared and the extension will go back on hook.

If ON, this allocates a DTMF receiver for a VOIP tandem caller breaking out on another trunk group.

If OFF, the call timer in the phone display will not function if the call is from a network connection (Q-SIG).

If ON, the unit of currency shown in call displays and on

SMDR reports will be Euros (€). (This will also display on

Hotel Application invoices.)

When ON, the steps verifying the staff code will be omitted in

Hotel operation.

When ON, the PERI UCD data will be sent to the SMDR IO port.

Normally, when a room is checked-out, the room status is changed to NEED CLEAN. When the option is set to ON, the room status will be changed to AVAILABLE instead. (Hotel

Application.)

When ON, the CALL LOG review will appear when the Redial or LNR button is pressed.

If ON, allows Keypad Facility messages to be sent to the exchange to invoke network features.

When ON, if trunks don’t have the supervision feature they cannot make outgoing transfers or unsupervised conferences.

When ON, and a call arrives at a busy station that is not set for forward busy, if a preset no answer destination is available the call is re-routed to that destination.

When ON, all dialled digits will be saved in the outgoing call log for Large LCD phones. When OFF, invalid dialling such as dialling of a non-existent station number will not be saved in the outgoing call log for Large LCD phones.

Samsung Business Communications

2-55

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

No Option Default

55 TIE TRSF RCL ON

56 VOIP REALRBT OFF

57 CO-CO TM ALL OFF

60 SMDR

AUT2ACC

OFF

64 IPNW REAL RB OFF

MOH

69 DISA NO ACT

70 ICM

AUTOHOLD

OFF

67 TRSF VT KEY ON

68 PAIR NO RING OFF

OFF

OFF

Description

When ON and a trunk call transferred to the tie line is not answered within the transfer recall time, the call recalls to the original transferring station.

When ON, the system will connect the real path of the outgoing trunk to the incoming VoIP trunk user instead of providing virtual ringback tone.

When ON, this timer prevents system trunk calls from locking up.

When ON, the AUTHORIZATION CODE will be printed in

ACCOUNT field of SMDR.

When ON, the system will connect the real path of the outgoing trunk to the VoIP networking trunk user instead of providing virtual ringback tone.

When ON, an incoming trunk call is connected to MOH automatically after the DISA ANSWR timer (MMC 503) expires and the caller hears MOH. If the TRK AUTOMOH DISC timer in MMC501 expires before the call is answered, it is disconnected. (To use this feature, MMC 400 AUTO AN-

SWER option must set to ON.)

When ON, works like the VT key when the user transfers the call to Voice Mail using the TRSF key.

When ON, if a paired phone is busy the call camps on and a message waiting indication is set at the busy phone and does not ring the free paired extension.

When ON, a DISA call will go to the station assigned in MMC

406 after the DISA NO ACT timer expires.

When ON, will allow internal calls to be put on hold automatically when another call is taken.

DEFAULT DATA

SEE DESCRIPTION

SOME OPTIONS DEPEND ON COUNTRY

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 210.

Display shows:

2. Dial option number (e.g., 00)

Press Right Soft button to move cursor.

TEN. ON AND OFF

DISA PSWD :OFF

TEN. ON AND OFF

DISA PSWD :OFF

Samsung Business Communications

2-56

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming

3. Dial 1 for ON or 0 for OFF.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button.

4. Repeat steps 2-3 for other options.

OR

Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

TEN. ON AND OFF

DISA PSWD :ON

Samsung Business Communications

2-57

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[211] DOOR RING ASSIGNMENT

Designates which station or group of stations will ring when a door phone button is pressed.

If the ring plan destinations are not entered the default ring plan 1 is used. Available ring plans are 1 to 6.

DEFAULT DATA

STATION GROUP: 500

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 211.

Display shows first door phone:

2. Dial door phone number (e.g., 230)

OR

Press Volume button to scroll through door phone numbers and use the Right Soft button to move cursor.

OR

Select All door ring.

3. Enter new ring plan number selection via dial keypad.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button.

4. Press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

OR

Press Left Soft button to return to step 3.

OR

Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

[229] DOOR RING

1:500 2:500

[230] DOOR RING

1:500 2:500

[ALL] DOOR RING

1:500 2:500

[250] DOOR RING

1:301 2:500

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 601 ASSIGN STATION GROUP

Samsung Business Communications

2-58

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[214] DISA ALARM RINGING STATION

Assigns the DISA alarm to ring at a specific phone. It is recommended that the person who can clear the alarm also receives the notification.

CONDITIONS y y

A valid destination can be either a station group or an individual station.

The alarm ringing station or group will follow the ring plan time destination.

DEFAULT DATA

ALL RING PLANS: 500

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 214.

Display shows:

2. Enter valid destination number for ring plan.

(e.g., 217)

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance cursor.

3. Enter valid destination number for another ring plan (e.g., 249)

OR

Press Volume button to make selection.

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

DISA ALARM RING

1:500 2:500

DISA ALARM RING

1:217 2:500

DISA ALARM RING

1:217 2:249

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 202 CHANGE FEATURE PASSCODE

MMC 601 ASSIGN STATION GROUP

Samsung Business Communications

2-59

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[217] TRAFFIC REPORT OPTION

This MMC is used to print a traffic report and select options. The traffic report can be printed on demand, or every hour, or at a programmed time each day, or for up to three separately-timed shifts. Automatic printing will always clear the totals.

When report MANUAL PRINT OUT is selected, the options are:

No Option Description

0 PRINT AND CLEAR A report is printed and all totals are reset to 0.

1 PRINTOUT ONLY A report is printed and all the totals are saved.

2 CANCEL PRINTOUT Cancels printout.

When AUTO PRINT OPTN is selected, the options are:

No Option Description

0 AUTO PRINT OFF Automatic print feature is disabled.

1 DAILY A report is printed at a programmable time every day and all the totals are reset to ‘0’

2 EVERY HOUR

SHIFT

A report will be printed every hour

Up to three separate Start and End times may be programmed to report traffic within different shifts. A report is printed at the end of each End time and all totals are reset to ‘0’

When a report is printed, the totals represent call statistics accumulated from the date of the last report stated as BEGINNING: D & T up to the date of this printout stated as ENDING

D & T.

If there are no trunks in a group, the trunk group report for that group will not print.

CONDITIONS

If this function is required in an OfficeServ 7000 series system with an MCP card, you must connect the LAN cable to the MCP card and be connected to a terminal supporting the TCP/IP function.

DEFAULT DATA

AUTO PRINT OFF

Samsung Business Communications

2-60

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 217.

Display shows:

2. Dial 0 for manual or 1 for automatic print.

OR

Press Volume button to select and press Right

Soft button.

3. If AUTO selected, dial 0, 1, 2 or 3 for automatic print option.

OR

Press Volume button to select option and press

Right Soft button.

4. Enter daily report time (HHMM)

5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

TRAFFIC REPORT

MANUAL PRINTOUT

TRAFFIC REPORT

AUTO PRINT OPTN

TRAFFIC REPORT

DAILY HHMM:2359

TRAFFIC REPORT

DAILY HHMM:2200

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 829 LAN PRINTER PARAMETERS

Samsung Business Communications

2-61

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[220] ISDN SERVICE TYPE

Assigns the ISDN service type of a single line telephone port. Service consists of BC

(Bearer Capability) and HLC (High Layer Capability).

No Type

0 VOICE

1 FAX 3

2 AUDIO 3.1

3 MODEM

DEFAULT DATA

VOICE

Description

G3 FAX service

3.1 kHz Audio service

MODEM service

BC

Speech

3.1 kHz Audio

3.1 kHz Audio

3.1 kHz Audio

HLC

-

FAX G2/G3

None

Telephony

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 220.

Display shows:

2. Enter the station number (e.g., 210)

OR

Press Volume button to select station and press

Right Soft button.

3. Select service type (0-3)

OR

Press Volume button to select option and press

Right Soft button.

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

[209] ISDN SVC

VOICE

[210] ISDN SVC

VOICE

[210] ISDN SVC

AUDIO 3.1

Samsung Business Communications

2-62

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[221] EXTENSION TYPE

This MMC assigns station ports for a specific use. Each phone can be designated as one of five types (see table). These types can be changed by dialling the type number or by scrolling through the types and pressing the Right Soft button to select the type.

No Type Description

0

1

NORMAL STATION

GUEST SMOKING

This is the default setting. The station will operate in the normal manner associated with this type of station. Ports designated as

VMAA in MMC 207 must be designated as normal in this MMC.

When a station is designated as this type it will appear in room status and check-in features as a smoking room.

2 GUEST NO SMOKING When a station is designated as this type it will appear in room status and check-in features as a non-smoking room.

3 MEETING ROOM Stations designated as Meeting Rooms will have the same attributes as guest rooms with regard to cleaning and occupied status but will not show up while scrolling through room status lists.

4 ADMINISTRATOR

5 FAX STATION

Only stations designated as administrator stations can use Hotel features (check in, etc.)

When a station is designated as this type it can be assigned as a

‘pair’ station to a GUEST SMOKING ROOM or GUEST NO

SMOKING ROOM in MMC 222.

CONDITIONS

This MMC can be used only when the Hotel function is enabled in MMC 813, HOTEL

OPERATION.

DEFAULT DATA

NORMAL STATION

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 221.

Display shows:

2. Dial station number (e.g., 214)

OR

Press Volume button to select station and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

[201] PHONE USE

NORMAL STATION

[214] PHONE USE

NORMAL STATION

Samsung Business Communications

2-63

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

3. Dial 0 - 5 to select station type.

OR

Press Volume button to select option and press Right Soft button.

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 813 HOTEL OPERATION

[214] PHONE USE

GUEST NO SMOKING

Samsung Business Communications

2-64

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[222] FAX PAIR

Enables a guest room to have a normal phone line and fax line simultaneously. Only a

Guest No Smoking Room or Guest Smoking Room can be assigned a fax pair station which is already assigned as a fax station in MMC 221.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

CONDITIONS

This MMC can be used only when the Hotel function is enabled in MMC 813, HOTEL

OPERATION.

This MMC can be used only when there is station that set GUEST SMOKING, GUEST NO

SMOKING in MMC 222, and if not, display “ROOM NOT EXIST”:

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 222.

Display shows:

2. Dial guest extension number (e.g. 205)

OR

Press Volume button to select and press Right

Soft button.

3. Dial fax station number (e.g. 301)

OR

Press Volume button to select and press Right

Soft button.

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 221

MMC 813

EXTENSION TYPE

HOTEL OPERATION

[201] FAX PAIR

NONE

[205] FAX PAIR

NONE

[205] FAX PAIR

301

Samsung Business Communications

2-65

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[224] AUDIO PROMPT

This feature requires an SVMi-20E module to be installed in the system. The system will play a selected recorded prompt (1–9999) when a call is answered. Prompts 1005–9999 can be customised in programming; 1–1004 are default system prompts and should not be changed.

This MMC has the following options.

No

0

Option

STN GROUP

1

2

3

PROMPT NO

GROUP BUSY

RBT SOURCE

Description

Determines which VMS UCD group or SVMi-20E port will be connected when a call is answered.

Determines which prompt will be played when a call is answered.

This destination is a recorded message 1-9999.

Determines which tone source will be connected when all VMS UCD group members are busy. This destination can be NONE, TONE or external music on hold.

If NONE is set then dial tone is connected; if TONE is set then hold tone is connected.

Determines which VMS UCD group or port is used as the Ring

Back Tone (RBT) source.

CONDITIONS

NONE

DEFAULT DATA

STN GROUP: NONE

PROMPT NO: 0001

GROUP BUSY: NONE

RBT SOURCE: NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 224.

Display shows:

2. Dial 0, 1 or 2 for option select (e.g. 0).

OR

Press Volume button to select option and press

Right Soft button.

AUDIO PROMPT

STN GROUP :NONE

AUDIO PROMPT

STN GROUP :NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-66

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming

3. Enter the station group number.

OR

Press Volume button to select and press Right

Soft button to return to step 2.

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

AUDIO PROMPT

STN GROUP :578

Samsung Business Communications

2-67

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[300] CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER STATION

Allows the following features to be enabled/disabled on a per-station basis.

No Option Default Description

01 MICROPHONE ON

02 OFF-HOOK RING ON

03 SMDR PRINT ON

04 TGR ADV.TONE ON

05 VMAA FORWARD ON

07 NGT PASSCODE ON

08 INTRCOM SMDR OFF

09 FWD DELAY USE OFF

11 FORWARD OVRD OFF

12 RECL TO OPER OFF

13 SLT LP OPEN OFF

15 CID TO SLT OFF

22 NO RCL FLASH OFF group by dialling its directory number (DN). This selection should be turned off when using LCR.

Allows phones to be used in speakerphone mode.

Will allow a short burst of ring tone to indicate another call.

When the station is set for no Trunk Line calls to and from this station, the station will not print on SMDR.

This includes transferred calls or calls picked up from hold or park.

When this feature is set to ON, a warning tone will be heard each time LCR advances to the next route.

This feature selects whether Trunk Line calls can be forwarded to voice mail: ON, permits forward to voice mail; OFF, no forward to voice mail.

When ON, the steps verifying the ring plan passcode will be added in Ring Plan change.

When set to OFF, the station will not print intercom calls on SMDR.

When ON, calls will overflow to the Forward No Answer destination when the Forward No Answer timer expires even when the Forward No Answer feature is not activated at the called party extension.

When set to ON and the station calls another station which has forwarding set, the call will not forward.

When set to ON, if the station transfers a call and the destination doesn’t answer, the call will recall to the operator instead of the station.

When ON, SLI port receives real disconnect signal instead of busy or error tone. (VMAA or DATA ports always receive real disconnect signal.)

When a MIS module is installed and this option is set to

ON, the system will provide the CID signal to SLTs.

When the hook switch is flashed or the flash key is pressed, a recall signal will not be sent to the system.

Samsung Business Communications

2-68

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

DEFAULT DATA

SEE DESCRIPTION

SOME OPTIONS DEPEND ON COUNTRY

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 300.

Display shows:

2. Dial station number (e.g., 205)

OR

Press Volume button to select station.

OR

Select all stations and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Press Volume button to select feature and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. Dial 1 for ON or 0 for OFF.

OR

Press Volume button to select and press

Right Soft button.

5. Press Left Soft button to return to step 2.

Press Right Soft button to return to step 1.

OR

Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

[201] CUS.ON/OFF

ACCESS DIAL :ON

[205] CUS.ON/OFF

ACCESS DIAL :ON

[ALL] CUS.ON/OFF

ACCESS DIAL :ON

[ALL] CUS.ON/OFF

ACCESS DIAL :ON

[ALL] CUS.ON/OFF

ACCESS DIAL :OFF

RELATED ITEMS

LCR PROGRAMMING:

MMC 710

MMC 711

MMC 712

LCR DIGIT TABLE

LCR TIME TABLE

LCR ROUTE TABLE

Samsung Business Communications

2-69

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[301] ASSIGN STATION COS

Used to assign a class of service to each phone. There are 30 different classes of service

(defined in MMC 701, Assign COS Contents) and six ring plans based on the Ring Plan

Time in MMC 507 that can apply to the COS. Classes of service are numbered 01-30. The default is COS 01.

DEFAULT DATA

RING PLANS 1-6: 01

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 301.

Display shows first station:

2. Dial station number (e.g., 205)

OR

Use Volume button to scroll through stations.

Press Right Soft button to advance step 3.

OR

Use Volume button to scroll through stations and press Left Soft button to advance to step 4.

OR

Select all stations.

3. Enter new ring plan selection via dial keypad.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. Enter ring plan class of service (e.g., 05)

OR

Use Volume button to scroll through classes of service and press Right Soft button to advance to the next ring plan.

OR

Use Volume button to scroll through classes of service and press Left Soft button to return to step 2.

[201] STN COS

1:01 2:01 3:01

[205] STN COS

1:01 2:01 3:01

[ALL] STN COS

1:01 2:01 3:01

[205] STN COS

1:01 2:01 3:01

[205] STN COS

1:05 2:01 3:01

Samsung Business Communications

2-70

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

5. Enter the next ring plan class of service (e.g., 05)

OR

Use Volume button to scroll through classes of service and press Right Soft button to move cursor to the next ring plan.

OR

Use Volume button to scroll through classes of service and press Left Soft button to return to previous step.

6. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS

[205] STN COS

1:05 2:01 3:01

Samsung Business Communications

2-71

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[302] PICKUP GROUPS

Allows the assignment of stations into call pickup groups. There is a maximum of 99 pickup groups. An unlimited number of members can belong to each group. Stations can only be in one pickup group at any given time.

DEFAULT DATA

NO PICKUP GROUPS ASSIGNED

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 302.

Display shows:

2. Dial station number (e.g., 205)

OR

Use Volume button to select station number and press Right Soft button.

OR

Select all stations.

3. Dial pickup group number (e.g., 05)

OR

Press Volume button to select group number.

4. Press Right Soft button to return to step 2 to enter more stations.

OR

Press Left Soft button to return to step 3.

OR

Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

[201] PICKUP GRP

PICKUP GRP:NONE

[205] PICKUP GRP

PICKUP GRP:NONE

[ALL] PICKUP GRP

PICKUP GRP:??

[205] PICKUP GRP

PICKUP GRP:05

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 107

MMC 722

MMC 723

KEY EXTENDER

STATION KEY PROGRAMMING

SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING

Samsung Business Communications

2-72

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[303] ASSIGN BOSS/SECRETARY

Assigns BOSS phones to SECRETARY phones. One BOSS station can have up to and including four SECRETARY stations and one SECRETARY station can have up to and including four BOSS stations.

CONDITIONS y y y

A dedicated BOSS button must be programmed on the SECRETARY phone(s).

A dedicated BOSS button must also be programmed on the BOSS phone.

A station designated as BOSS may not be assigned as a secretary of another BOSS.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

PROGRAM BUTTONS

F BUTTON Used to toggle BOSS/SECRETARY field

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 303.

Display shows:

2. Dial BOSS station number (e.g., 205)

OR

Press Volume button to select station and press

Right Soft button.

3. Dial SECRETARY number (1, 2, 3 or 4)

OR

Press Volume button to select number and press

Right Soft button.

4. Dial SECRETARY station number (e.g., 201)

OR

Press Volume button to select station.

Press Right Soft button to return to step 3 to enter more SECR numbers.

5. Press Left Soft button to return to step 2 and continue entries.

OR

Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

BOSS STN:NONE

SECR 1:NONE

BOSS STN:205

SECR 1:NONE

BOSS STN:205

SECR 1:NONE

BOSS STN:205

SECR 1:201

BOSS STN:205

SECR 2:202

Samsung Business Communications

2-73

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING

OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications

2-74

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[304] ASSIGN EXTENSION/TRUNK USE

Allows you to select which stations are allowed to make calls through C.O. lines or to answer calls for C.O. lines (on a station and trunk use group basis).

CONDITIONS y Stations are set within use group numbers 001~300 and trunks are set within use group numbers 301~500 in MMC 614, ASSIGN USE GROUP. y If a station group is set to NO Dial, stations cannot place calls on that trunk group. y If a station group is set to NO Answer, stations cannot answer incoming calls on that trunk group.

Note: MMC 406, Trunk Ring Assignment, overrides this MMC for the Answer option.

DEFAULT DATA

DIAL: YES

ANS: YES

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 304.

Display shows:

2. Dial the station use group number (e.g., 005)

OR

Press Volume button to select station use group and press Right Soft button.

OR

Select all station use groups.

3. Dial the station use group number.(e.g., 304)

OR

Press Volume button to select trunk use group and press Right Soft button.

OR

Select all trunk use groups.

4. Press Volume button to select YES/NO option.

OR

Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO and press Right

Soft button to move cursor to ANS option.

(001) USE (301)

DIAL:YES ANS:YES

(005) USE (301)

DIAL:YES ANS:YES

(ALL) USE (301)

DIAL:YES ANS:YES

(005) USE (304)

DIAL:YES ANS:YES

(005) USE (ALL)

DIAL:YES ANS:YES

(005) USE (304)

DIAL:NO ANS:YES

Samsung Business Communications

2-75

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming

5. Press Volume button to select YES/NO Option.

OR

Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO and press Right

Soft button to return to step 2.

6. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 316

MMC 614

COPY STATION USABLE

STATION/TRUNK USE GROUP

OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

(005) USE (304)

DIAL:NO ANS:YES

Samsung Business Communications

2-76

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[305] ASSIGN FORCED CODE

This MMC allows one of the four options to be selected: the assignment of account codes with verification, account codes without verification and authorization codes (or none of these) on a per-station basis or on an all-station basis. The system supports 500 authorization codes and 999 account codes which may or may not require verification.

No Type

0 NONE

1 AUTHORIZE CODE

Description

2

3

ACCT VERIFIED

ACCT NO VERIFIED

Forces user to enter a valid Authorization code of four or more digits listed in the AUTHORIZATION CODE Table (MMC

707).

Forces user to enter a valid Account code listed in the AC-

COUNT CODE Table (MMC 708).

Forces user to enter an Account code which is not verified.

User can enter any code up to 12 digits (including ∗ and #).

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 305.

Display shows:

2. Dial station number (e.g., 205)

OR

Press Volume button to select station and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Dial a feature option 0-3 (e.g., 2)

OR

Press Volume button to select option and press

Right Soft button to return step 2.

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

[201] FORCD CODE

NONE

[205] FORCD CODE

NONE

[205] FORCD CODE

ACCT VERIFIED

MMC 707

MMC 708

AUTHORIZATION CODE

ACCOUNT CODE

Samsung Business Communications

2-77

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[306] HOT LINE/OFF HOOK SELECTION

Allows a station to make a predetermined call, similar to a ring-down circuit, upon the expiration of a timer (see MMC 502, STATION TIMERS, Off-Hook Selection Timer).

CONDITIONS y The hotline destination can be a station, a station group, a trunk, a trunk group or an external number. y There is a maximum of 18 digits in the dial string for external numbers. The access code for trunk or trunk group access (e.g. 0 or 9) is not counted as part of the 18.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

PROGRAM BUTTONS

B

C

D

E

ACTION

Used to insert a flash code ‘F’

Used to insert a pause code ‘P’

Used to insert a pulse/tone conversion code ‘C’

Used to mask/unmask following digits-shows as ‘[’ or ‘]’

DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 306.

Display shows:

2. Dial station number.

OR

Use Volume button to scroll through stations.

Press Right Soft button to move the cursor.

3. Enter the hot line destination, a station or trunk ID (e.g., 9 or 701) with a maximum of

18 outgoing digits after the access code for the CO call (see above list of options if needed)

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 502

[201] HOT LINE

NONE

[205] HOT LINE

NONE

[205] HOT LINE

9-1305P4264100_

STATION-WIDE TIMERS (OFF-HOOK SELECTION TIMER)

Samsung Business Communications

2-78

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[308] ASSIGN BACKGROUND MUSIC SOURCE

Assigns a background music source to phones. There is one internal music source and two additional external music sources are provided if a MIS module is installed in the system. A

3-chassis system has six external music sources. The default directory numbers for the music sources are 371 (internal) , 372~ 377 (external).

CONDITIONS

To use an external sound source, connect the corresponding port of the MOH source to the external sound source of the module. If ‘NONE’ is set for background music or if a sound source is not connected to the external sound source port designated as the background music source, music will not be played even if the background music function is enabled.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 308.

Display shows current setting.

2. Dial phone number (e.g., 205)

OR

Use Volume button to scroll through phone numbers and press Right Soft button to move the cursor.

OR

Select all stations.

3. Enter source number (e.g., 3761)

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

[201] BGM SOURCE

BGM SOURCE:NONE

[205] BGM SOURCE

BGM SOURCE:NONE

[ALL] BGM SOURCE

BGM SOURCE:?

[205] BGM SOURCE

BGM SOURCE:3761

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 309

MMC 408

ASSIGN STATION MOH SOURCE

ASSIGN TRUNK MOH SOURCE

Samsung Business Communications

2-79

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[309] ASSIGN STATION MOH SOURCE

Assigns a Music On Hold source to phones. There is one internal music source and two additional external music sources are provided if a MIS module is installed in the system.

The default directory numbers for the music sources are 3761 (internal) and 3762-3763

(external).

CONDITIONS

To use an external sound source, connect the corresponding port of the MOH source to the external sound source of the MIS module.

DEFAULT DATA

TONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 309.

Display shows current setting:

2. Dial phone number (e.g., 205)

OR

Use Volume button to scroll through phone numbers and press Right Soft button to move the cursor.

OR

Select all stations.

3. Enter source number (e.g., 3761)

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

[201] STN MOH

MOH SOURCE:NONE

[205] STN MOH

MOH SOURCE:NONE

[ALL] STN MOH

MOH SOURCE:?

[205] STN MOH

MOH SOURCE:3761

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 308

MMC 408

ASSIGN BACKGROUND MUSIC SOURCE

ASSIGN TRUNK MOH SOURCE

Samsung Business Communications

2-80

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[310] LCR CLASS OF SERVICE

Assigns the LCR class of service allowed on a per-station/per-trunk basis. There are eight classes which may be assigned. LCR class of service allows specific users to ‘trunk advance’ up to a matching LCR class of service programmed in MMC 712.

DEFAULT DATA

LEAST COST ROUTING COS: 1

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 310.

Display shows:

2. Dial station/trunk number (e.g., 205)

OR

Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

OR

Select all stations.

3. Dial 1-8 to select class type (e.g., 3)

OR

Press Volume button to select class type and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

[201] LCR CLASS

LCR CLASS 1

[205] LCR CLASS

LCR CLASS 1

[ALL] LCR CLASS

LCR CLASS ?

[205] LCR CLASS

LCR CLASS 3

RELATED ITEMS

LCR PROGRAMMING:

MMC 710

MMC 711

MMC 712

MMC 713

LCR DIGIT TABLE

LCR TIME TABLE

LCR ROUTE TABLE

LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE

Samsung Business Communications

2-81

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[312] ALLOW CALLER ID

Allows the system administrator or technician to allow or deny CID data to be sent from, or displayed at, LCD phones.

Option

RCV

SND

DEFAULT DATA

Description

Set whether to display CID.

Set whether to send CID for ISDN calls.

RCV: YES

SND: YES

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 312.

Display shows:

2. Dial station number (e.g., 205)

OR

Press Volume button to select station and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

OR

Select all stations

3. Dial 0 or 1 to select Receive option.

OR

Press Volume button to select receive option and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. Dial 0 or 1 to select Send option.

OR

Press Volume button to select send option and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

[201] CID/ANI

RCV:YES SND:YES

[205] CID/ANI

RCV:YES SND:YES

[ALL] CID/ANI

RCV:YES SND:YES

[205] CID/ANI

RCV:YES SND:YES

[205] CID/ANI

RCV:YES SND:YES

MMC 119 CALLER ID DISPLAY

Samsung Business Communications

2-82

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[314] CONFIRM OUTGOING CALL

Allows outgoing call restriction by call duration time: calls can be disconnected or the user can receive ‘confirm tone’ (refer to the CO Confirm timer in MMC 501).

No Type Description

0 NONE

1 CONFIRM TONE Caller hears confirmation tone at programmed time

2 DISCONNECT Call is disconnected.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 314.

Display shows:

2. Dial station number (e.g., 205)

OR

Press Volume button to select station and use

Right Soft button to move cursor.

OR

Select all stations.

3. Dial a feature option 0-2.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 501 SYSTEM-WIDE TIMERS

[201] CO CONFIRM

NONE

[205] CO CONFIRM

NONE

[ALL] CO CONFIRM

NONE

[205] CO CONFIRM

CONFIRM TONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-83

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[315] CUSTOMER SET RELOCATION

Allows the system administrator or technician to exchange similar phones in the system without hardware changes. All the button settings, features, etc. for a phone can be copied to another. The user can then relocate to the new station and work as normal. Refer to the tables (below) listing which phones/AOMs can be exchanged.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 315.

Display shows:

2. Enter number of original station (e.g., 202)

Press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter second station number (e.g., 210)

Press Right Soft button to enter data.

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

SET RELOCATION

EXT_ EXT

SET RELOCATION

EXT202 EXT_

SET RELOCATE

EXT202 EXT210

SET RELOCATION

EXT_ EXT

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

Exchange Allowed Table (1)

Add-On

Modules

48B

64B

48B 64B

YES YES

YES YES

Samsung Business Communications

2-84

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming

Exchange

Allowed

Table (2)

SLT

SLT

(Analogue)

YES

2100B 5007S

5000/5100 Series Digital Keysets (DS)

5014S 5038S 5014D 5021D 5012L 5012LE 5014D 5021D

5000/5100 Series IP Keysets (ITP)

5012L

OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

5107S 5114D 5121D 5112L

Soft-

Phone

NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO

2100B

NO YES NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO

DS-5007S

DS-5014S

NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO

NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO

DS-5038S

NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO

DS-5014D

DS-5021D

DS-5012L

DS-5012LE

ITP-5014D

ITP-5021D

ITP-5012L

ITP-5107S

ITP-5114D

ITP-5121D

NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO

NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO

NO NO NO NO NO NO NO YES YES NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO

NO NO NO NO NO NO NO YES YES NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO

NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO YES YES NO YES 1 NO NO

NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO YES YES NO YES 1 NO NO

NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO YES NO NO NO YES

YES 1 NO

YES

YES NO NO NO NO

YES 2 NO NO YES

YES 3 YES NO NO YES

YES

YES

NO NO

NO NO

ITP-5112L

NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO YES NO NO NO YES YES

SoftPhone

NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO YES NO NO NO YES YES

1 – Set Relocation can only be performed from the ITP-5107S. 2 – Set Relocation can only be performed from the ITP-5114D. 3 – Set Relocation can only be performed from the ITP-5121D

2-84

Samsung Business Communications

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[316] COPY STATION USABLE

Provides a tool for copying station/trunk use assignments in MMC 304 from one station user group to another. This can be done on a station use group basis or for all station use groups.

Use groups are set up in MMC 614.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 316.

Display shows:

2. Enter station use group number (e.g., 005)

OR

Press Volume buttons to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter station use group number to copy from.

Cursor returns to step 2.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection.

4. Press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

OR

Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

(001)COPY USABLE

FROM:NONE

(005)COPY USABLE

FROM:NONE

(005)COPY USABLE

FROM:003

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 304

MMC 614

ASSIGN EXTENSION/TRUNK USE

STATION/TRUNK USE GROUP

Samsung Business Communications

2-85

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[317] ASSIGN STATION/STATION USE

This MMC is used to determine whether stations in one use group can make intercom calls to stations in other use groups (within the same tenant).

Use groups are set up in MMC 614.

DEFAULT DATA

DIAL: YES

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 317.

Display shows:

2. Dial the first station use group number (e.g., 005)

OR

Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button.

OR

Select all station use groups.

3. Dial the second station use group number (e.g., 004)

OR

Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button.

4. Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO (NO means first group cannot dial second group)

OR

Press Volume button to select YES/NO and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

(001) USE (001)

DIAL:YES

(005) USE (001)

DIAL:YES

(ALL) USE (001)

DIAL:YES

(005) USE (004)

DIAL:YES

(005) USE (004)

DIAL:NO

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 614 STATION/TRUNK USE GROUP

Samsung Business Communications

2-86

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[318] DISTINCTIVE RINGING

Allows the technician to select the ring tone heard at a keyset when called by a specific station or when a specific trunk rings that keyset. There is also a cadence control option to perform a similar function for SLTs.

There are eight ring tones available along with a Follow Station option (default) for keysets.

There are five cadences and a Follow Station option (default) for SLTs. See table, below.

It also allows the technician to assign the call priority for a group call when called by a specific station or when a specific trunk rings that phone. When calls come into a station group and all group members are busy, the system will assign a priority to a specific station or a specific trunk so that high priority calls will be placed at the front of the group queue.

If this option is set to NO, the call held longest in the group queue has the highest priority.

There are nine priority levels: level 1 is the highest and level 9 is the lowest.

Option No Description

TONE

Option

CADENCE

Option

Calls will ring with the keyset user’s choice of ring frequency.

1~8 Calls from the programmed station or trunk will ring with this frequency.

Calls will ring with the normal SLT ring cadences.

1 Calls from the programmed station or trunk will ring with the intercom ring cadence.

2

3

4

5

Calls from the programmed station or trunk will ring with the CO ring cadence.

Calls from the programmed station or trunk will ring with the DOOR ring cadence.

Calls from the programmed station or trunk will ring with the ALARM ring cadence.

Calls from the programmed station or trunk will ring with the CALLBACK ring cadence.

CONDITIONS y y

Digital phone (keyset) rings are distinguished by their tone. If the T (TONE) of the calling internal/external phone is set to ‘NO’, the bell rings according to the normal setting in MMC 111, PHONE RING TONE, for the receiving station. If T is set to 1-8, the bell rings according to the designated ring tone.

SLT rings are distinguished by their ringing interval. If the C (CADENCE) of the calling internal/external phone is set to ‘NO’, the bell rings according to the interval set in

MMC 510, SLI RING CADENCE, for each calling station type. If C is set to 1-5, the bell rings according to that interval regardless of the calling station type.

Samsung Business Communications

2-87

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

DEFAULT DATA

T: NO (FOLLOW STATION SETTING)

C: NO (FOLLOW STATION SETTING)

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 318.

Display shows first station:

2. Dial trunk or station number (e.g., 705)

OR

Press Volume button to select trunk or station and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Dial 1-8 to select ring tone.

OR

Press Volume button to select ring tone and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. Dial 1-5 to select ring cadence.

OR

Press Volume button to select ring cadence and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

5. Enter priority level via dial keypad.

(1-9 or NO)

6. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

[201] RING TONE

T:NO C:NO PRI:NO

[705] RING TONE

T:NO C:NO PRI:NO

[705] RING TONE

T:5 C:NO PRI:NO

[705] RING TONE

T:5 C:3 PRI:NO

[705] RING TONE

T:5 C:3 PRI:NO

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 111

MMC 510

PHONE RING TONE

SLI RING CADENCE

Samsung Business Communications

2-88

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[319] BRANCH GROUP

Assign stations to branch groups. There is a maximum of four branch groups. When a C.O. line is ringing at a station, other stations assigned the same branch group can answer the incoming call by going off hook.

This MMC is currently not valid in the UK/EU.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION

1. Press Transfer button and enter 319.

Display shows.

2. Dial station number (e.g., 205).

OR

Press Volume button to select station and use

Right Soft button to move cursor.

OR

Select all stations.

3. Dial a branch group number (01-04).

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

DISPLAY

[201] BRANCH GRP

BRANCH GRP:NONE

[205] BRANCH GRP

BRANCH GRP:NONE

[ALL] BRANCH GRP

BRANCH GRP:??

[205] BRANCH GRP

BRANCH GRP:04

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-89

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[320] PRESET FORWARD NO ANSWER

Allows a technician to assign a default destination for Forward No Answer (FNA) to each station on the system. These destinations may be the same or different for each station. The preset FNA destination will be temporarily overwritten if the station user enters a different

FNA destination. If you cancel the new destination, the preset destination will once more be in effect. Preset FNA time follows the station ‘NO ANS FWD’ timer (MMC 502).

Preset FNA can be assigned respectively for each type of call.

No

0

1

2

Type

INT

EXT

BOTH

Description

Preset FNA applies only to intercom calls.

Preset FNA applies only to incoming calls.

Preset FNA applies to both intercom and incoming calls.

If PRE FWD BUSY option in MMC 210 is set ON, the forward busy follows this feature.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 320.

Display shows:

2. Dial station number (e.g., 205)

OR

Press Volume button to select station and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

OR

Select all stations.

3. Dial valid number via keypad.

OR

Press Volume button to select call type and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

[201] PRESET FNA

NONE OPT:BOTH

[205] PRESET FNA

NONE OPT:BOTH

[ALL] PRESET FNA

NONE OPT:BOTH

[205] PRESET FNA

202 OPT:BOTH

Samsung Business Communications

2-90

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

4. Dial call type 0, 1 or 2 (e.g. 1)

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to return to step 2.

5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 102 CALL FORWARD

[205] PRESET FNA

202 OPT:EXT

Samsung Business Communications

2-91

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[323] CALLING PARTY NUMBER

Allows a number up to16 digits to be entered and associated with a station or trunk number on a per PRI/BRI basis. When this station makes an outgoing call on this PRI, the number entered here will be the Calling Party Number sent on the call. There are four tables for the system. If there are no entries in the tables the system uses the number for the trunk entered in MMC 405, TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER, for the Calling Party Number.

DEFAULT DATA

EMPTY

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 323.

Display shows:

2. Dial extension or trunk number (e.g., 230)

OR

Press Volume button to select extension and press Right Soft button to move the cursor.

3. Dial table number.

OR

Press Volume button to select table number and press Right Soft button to move the cursor.

4. Enter the Calling Party Number.

5. Repeat steps 3 & 4 to enter other tables and Calling

Party Numbers.

OR

Repeat steps 2, 3, & 4 to enter other station or trunk and Calling Party Numbers.

6. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

[201] SEND CLIP

1:

[230] SEND CLIP

1:

[230] SEND CLIP

2:

[230] SEND CLIP

2:3055922900

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 419

MMC 420

MMC 834

BRI OPTIONS

PRI OPTIONS

H.323 OPTIONS

Samsung Business Communications

2-92

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[400] CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TRUNK

Assigns several options (listed below) on a per-trunk basis.

No Option

0 1A2 EMULATION

1 TRUNK INC DND

2 TRUNK FORWARD ON

3 LCR ALLOW

6 EFWD EXT CLI

7 REPEAT CLI

8 TONECHK DISC

9 AUTO ANSWER

Default

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

Description

When this option is set to ON up to 4 internal stations can participate in a conversation on this trunk by pressing the trunk key.

When this option is set to ON a trunk that is programmed to ring a specific station(a private line or DIL) will ring at that station if the station is in DND.

When this option is set to OFF this trunk will not follow a ringing stations call forwarding.

Allows LCR to be switched ON/OFF when a trunk is accessed using a DT key or by dialling its port number

(e.g. 701).

This option determines what kinds of CLI number will be sent to the external forwarded outgoing call.(Station or

Received CLI from Trunk)

This option determines what kinds of CLI number will be sent to the trunk to trunk call.(Trunk or Received CLI from Trunk)

When this option is set to ON, loop trunk can be disconnected by detecting busy tone. (To use this feature, the

LP TRK TONE DISC option in MMC 861 must be set to

ENABLE.)

When this option is set to ON, Auto Answer mode can be assigned on a per-trunk basis.

DEFAULT DATA

1A2 EMULATE : OFF

TRK INC. DND : OFF

TRK FORWARD : ON

EFWD EXT CLI : ON

REPEAT CLI : ON

Samsung Business Communications

2-93

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 400.

Display show:

2. Dial trunk number (e.g., 704)

OR

Press Volume button to select trunk.

OR

Select all trunks and press Right Soft button to move cursor to options.

3. Dial option number from above list

OR

Press Volume button to select option and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. Dial 1 for ON or 0 for OFF.

OR

Press Volume button to select ON/OFF and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

[701] TRK ON/OFF

1A2 EMULATE:OFF

[704] TRK ON/OFF

1A2 EMULATE:OFF

[ALL] TRK ON/OFF

1A2 EMULATE:?

[704] TRK ON/OFF

TRK FORWARD:ON

[704] TRK ON/OFF

TRK FORWARD:OFF

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-94

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[401] TRUNK LINE/PBX LINE

Used to select the mode of the trunk lines: CO LINE or PBX LINE. If PBX mode is chosen, this allows PBX access codes to be recognised, thus allowing more complete toll restriction

(call barring). This mode is assigned on a per-trunk basis.

DEFAULT DATA

ALL TRUNKS: CO LINE

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 401.

Display shows:

2. Dial trunk number (e.g., 704)

OR

Use Volume button to scroll through trunk numbers and press Right Soft button to move.

OR

Select all trunks

3. Dial 1 for PBX or 0 for CO (e.g. 1)

OR

Use Volume button to scroll through options

Press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

[701] PBX LINE

CO LINE

[704] PBX LINE

CO LINE

[ALL] PBX LINE

?

[704] PBX LINE

PBX LINE

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-95

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[402] TRUNK DIAL TYPE

Used to determine the dialling type of each trunk line. There are two options:

No Type Description

1 DIAL PULSE TYPE

DEFAULT DATA

ALL TRUNKS: DTMF

Dial Pulse

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 402.

Display shows:

2. Dial trunk number (e.g., 704)

OR

Use Volume button to scroll through trunk numbers and press Right Soft button to move the cursor.

OR

Select all.

3. Dial 0 for DTMF or 1 for PULSE.

OR

Use Volume button to scroll through options

Press Right Soft buttons to return to step 2.

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 501

MMC 503

SYSTEM TIMERS

TRUNK-WIDE TIMERS

[701] DIAL TYPE

DTMF TYPE

[704] DIAL TYPE

DTMF TYPE

[ALL] DIAL TYPE

?

[704] DIAL TYPE

DIAL PULSE TYPE

Samsung Business Communications

2-96

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[403] TRUNK TOLL CLASS

Assigns toll class level assignments on a per-trunk or all-trunk basis in a day or night condition. The options for toll level will follow either the station class or the class of service defined in MMCs 702, Toll Deny Table, and 703, Toll Allowance Table. The toll classes available are listed below with their entry numbers.

No

4

5

2

3

6

7

0

1

8

F-STN

CLS-A

CLS-B

CLS-C

CLS-D

CLS-E

CLS-F

CLS-G

CLS-H

Class Description

Follow station toll restriction

Follow toll class A (Unrestricted)

Follow toll class B

Follow toll class C

Follow toll class D

Follow toll class E

Follow toll class F

Follow toll class G

Follow toll class H (All restricted)

DEFAULT DATA

ALL TRUNKS: F-STN

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 403.

Display shows:

2. Dial trunk number (e.g., 704)

OR

Use Volume button to scroll through trunk numbers and press Right Soft button to move the cursor.

OR

Select all.

3. Dial ring plan number (1~6)

OR

Use Volume button to scroll through ring plan numbers and press Right Soft button to move the cursor.

[701] TOLL CLASS

1:F-STN 2:F-STN

[704] TOLL CLASS

1:F-STN 2:F-STN

[ALL] TOLL CLASS

1:F-STN 2:F_STN

[704] TOLL CLASS

1:F-STN 2:F-STN

Samsung Business Communications

2-97

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

4. Enter day toll class (e.g., 2 for CLS-B)

OR

Press Volume button to scroll through toll classes and use Right Soft button to move the cursor.

5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 301

MMC 507

MMC 701

ASSIGN STATION COS

ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME

ASSIGN COS CONTENTS

[704] TOLL CLASS

1:CLS-B 2:F-STN

Samsung Business Communications

2-98

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[404] TRUNK NAME

Allows a name up to 11 characters long to be entered to identify an individual trunk.

ENTERING CHARACTERS

Refer to ENTERING CHARACTERS in MMC 104, STATION NAME.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 404.

Display shows:

2. Dial trunk (e.g., 704)

OR

Press Volume button to select trunk and press

Right Soft button to move the cursor.

Press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

[701] TRUNK NAME

[704] TRUNK NAME

[704] TRUNK NAME

TELECOMS

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 104

MMC 405

STATION NAME

TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER

Samsung Business Communications

2-99

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[405] TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER

Allows a number up to 11 digits long to be entered to identify an individual trunk.

ENTERING NUMBERS

Numbers are written using the keypad. Each press of a key selects the digit and moves the cursor to the next position.

The # button can be used for special characters:

#, space, &, !, :, ?, ., %, $, -, <, >, /, =, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ; , \ , " , ~.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 405.

Display shows:

2. Dial trunk (e.g., 704)

OR

Press Volume button to select trunk and press

Right Soft button to move the cursor.

3. Enter trunk number using the dial keypad

[701] CO TEL NO.

[704] CO TEL NO.

[704] CO TEL NO.

3054264100

4. Press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

OR

Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 404 TRUNK NAME

Samsung Business Communications

2-100

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[406] TRUNK RING ASSIGNMENT

Enables ringing to a specific station or to a group of stations when incoming calls are received. This MMC controls ring plan destinations for ring down trunks. If the ring plan destinations are not entered, the default ring plan is ring plan 1.

DEFAULT DATA

ALL TRUNKS RING DEFAULT OPERATOR GROUP

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 406.

Display shows:

2. Dial trunk number (e.g., 704)

OR

Use Volume button to scroll through trunk numbers and press Right Soft button to move the cursor.

OR

Select all.

3. Dial ring plan number or press Right Soft button to move to the next step.

4. Dial station number or station group number

(e.g., 205)

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button to move cursor to the next ring plan destination and repeat step 4.

OR

Press Left Soft button to return to step 3.

5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

[701] TRK RING

1:500 2:500

[704] TRK RING

1:500 2:500

[All] TRK RING

1:500 2:500

[704] TRK RING

1:500 2:500

[704] TRK RING

1:205 2:500

[704] TRK RING

1:205 2:501

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 202

MMC 507

MMC 601

CHANGE FEATURE PASSCODES

ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME

ASSIGN STATION GROUP

Samsung Business Communications

2-101

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[407] FORCED TRUNK RELEASE

Provides a positive forced trunk release to a specific trunk or all trunks in the event of a trunk lock-up.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 407.

Display shows:

2. Dial in trunk number (e.g., 704)

OR

Press Volume button selected trunk and press

Right Soft button.

OR

Select all trunks.

3. Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO.

(Pressing 1 or 0 will return to step 2)

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

[701] TRK RELS.

RELEASE?_Y:1,N:0

[704] TRK RELS.

RELEASE?_Y:1,N:0

[ALL] TRK RELS.

RELEASE?_Y:1,N:0

[704] TRK RELS.

RELEASE?_Y:1,N:0

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-102

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[408] ASSIGN TRUNK MOH SOURCE

Allows the system administrator to select which Music-On-Hold (MOH) source can be heard on each trunk. There is one internal music source (371) and a maximum of six external music sources are available with a MIS module installed in a 3-chassis system (372 ~

377).

Note: When enabled, the AA (Auto Answer) MOH option will allow an MOH source to play to callers who are automatically answered by the system before being connected to a station, voice mail or auto attendant. This AA MOH source can be the same as the source set for MOH.

CONDITIONS

To use an external sound source, connect the corresponding port of the source to the external sound source of the MIS module.

DEFAULT DATA

TONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 408.

Display shows current setting.

2. Dial trunk number (e.g., 704)

OR

Use Volume button to scroll through trunk numbers and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

OR

Select all.

3. Enter MOH source number (e.g., 3761)

OR

Press Volume button to select option and press

Right Soft button.

4. Enter AA source number

OR

Press Volume button to select option and press

Right Soft button to return to step 2

5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

[701] TRK MOH

MOH:TONE AA:TONE

[704] TRK MOH

MOH:TONE AA:TONE

[ALL] TRK MOH

MOH:? AA:?

[705] TRK MOH

MOH:3761 AA:TONE

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 756 ASSIGN VMMOH

Samsung Business Communications

2-103

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[409] TRUNK STATUS READ

This is a READ-ONLY MMC. Allows the status of trunks to be read in a format that will enable the servicing personnel to quickly identify the ownership and position of a trunk.

No Type

00

01

PORT

TYPE

02

03

1A2 EMULATE

TRK FORWARD

04 LINE

05 DIAL

06-11 TOLL TYPE 1-6

12-17 RING PLAN 1-6

18

19

MOH SOURCE

DISA LINE

Description

Port Number (Chassis/Slot/Port)

LOOP, GND, E & M, DID, BRI, PRI, VOIP

1A2 Emulation On/Off

Trunk Forward On/Off

CO/PBX

Ring Plan Toll Restriction (1-6)

Ring Plan Ring Destination (1-6)

MOH Source

DISA Status

DEFAULT DATA

FOLLOWS TRUNK

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 409.

Display shows:

2. Enter trunk number via dial keypad (e.g., 704)

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to advance cursor.

3. Enter desired option 00-19 (e.g., 01)

OR

Press Volume button to make selection.

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

[701] TRK STATUS

PORT:C1-S5-P01

[704] TRK STATUS

PORT:C1-S5-P04

[704] TRK STATUS

TYPE:LOOP TRUNK

Samsung Business Communications

2-104

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 400

MMC 401

MMC 402

MMC 403

MMC 404

MMC 406

MMC 408

MMC 410

CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TRUNK

TRUNK LINE/PBX LINE

TRUNK DIAL TYPE

TRUNK TOLL CLASS

TRUNK NAME

TRUNK RING ASSIGNMENT

ASSIGN TRUNK MUSIC ON HOLD SOURCE

ASSIGN DISA TRUNK

Samsung Business Communications

2-105

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[410] ASSIGN DISA TRUNK

Allows the system to have Direct Inward System Access (DISA). Because there is a possibility that unauthorized calls will be made via this feature, several safeguards have been added. Users must be informed of these to prevent unnecessary service calls. DISA can lock out when a predetermined number of invalid consecutive calls are attempted. Callers will then receive error tone until the programmable timer has expired.

CONDITIONS y y

The * key may be used to initiate new dial tone while in a station to station call.

The # button may be used to terminate the DISA call and disconnect the central office line. DISA lines must be assigned to the ring plan(s).

DEFAULT DATA

ALL TRUNKS: NORMAL

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 410.

Display shows:

2. Dial trunk number (e.g., 704)

OR

Press Volume button to select trunk and press

Right Soft button.

OR

Select all trunks.

OR

3. Press Volume button to select a Ring Plan (e.g. 3)

OR

Using the dial keypad, press 1 to select or 0 not to select the Ring Plan (e.g. 1 to select).

Press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

[701] 123456

DISA LINE:000000

[704] 123456

DISA LINE:000000

[ALL] 123456

DISA LINE:000000

[704] 123456

DISA LINE:001000

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 500 SYSTEM-WIDE COUNTERS

Samsung Business Communications

2-106

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[411] ASSIGN E1 SIGNAL TYPE

Defines the type of signalling for each E1 trunk assigned to the module. There are four kinds of trunk, as detailed below. There are three types of signalling associated with E&M and DID. E1 channels (1-30) that are not used should have TYPE programmed as UN-

USED.

Trunk Signalling Comments

BR_14301_OPT

RU_LOOP

BRAZIL, L, I, ERICSSON, 2/1914, FOR TEST

RUSSIA, L, I/O, LOOP START

E&M IMMEDIATE

DELAYED

ITU_WINK

ITU_WINK_MPD

BR_CONTINU

BR_PULSED

BR_R2_DIGIT

BR_BLD_160

BR_BLD_157

BR_14102_NOT

BR_14102_OPT

RU_ADSE

RU_HARRIS_UK

RU_USER_ROM

AR_WINK

AR_WINK_MPD

CHINA_NO1

POL_WINK_MPD

COMMON, E/D, I/O, IMMEDIATE START

COMMON, E/D, I/O, DELAY

COMMON, E/D, I/O, WINK START

COMMON, E/D, I/O, WINK START WITH MPD

BRAZIL, E/D, I/O, CONTINUE

BRAZIL, E/D, I/O, PULSED

BRAZIL, E/D, I/O, R2 DIGITAL

BRAZIL, E, I/O, ERICSSON, 2/1914, 14102_N

BRAZIL, E, I/O, ERICSSON, 2/1914, 14102_O

BRAZIL, E, I/O, ERICSSON, 1/1914

BRAZIL, E, I/O, ERICSSON, 1/1914

RUSSIA, E/D, I/O, PABX

RUSSIA, E/D, I/O, HARRIS, PABX, UK_EM

RUSSIA, E/D, I/O, USER ROM

ARGENTINA, E/D, I/O, WINK

ARGENTINA, E/D, I/O, WINK-MPD

CHINA, E/D, I/O, NO.1 OF CHINA

POLAND, E/D, I/O, POLAND WINK MPD

DID IMMEDIATE

DELAYED

ITU_WINK

ITU_WINK_MPD

BR_CONTINU

BR_PULSED

BR_R2_DIGIT

RU_ADSE

RU_HARRIS_UK

RU_USER_ROM

AR_WINK

AR_WINK_MPD

CHINA_NO1

POL_WINK_MPD

UNUSE -

COMMON, E/D, I/O, IMMEDIATE START

COMMON, E/D, I/O, DELAY

COMMON, E/D, I/O, WINK START

COMMON, E/D, I/O, WINK START WITH MPD

BRAZIL, E/D, I/O, CONTINUE

BRAZIL, E/D, I/O, PULSED

BRAZIL, E/D, I/O, R2 DIGITAL

RUSSIA, E/D, I/O, PABX

RUSSIA, E/D, I/O, HARRIS, PABX, UK_EM

RUSSIA, E/D, I/O, USER ROM

ARGENTINA, E/D, I/O, WINK

ARGENTINA, E/D, I/O, WINK-MPD

CHINA, E/D, I/O, NO.1 OF CHINA

POLAND, E/D, I/O, POLAND WINK MPD

-

Samsung Business Communications

2-107

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

CONDITIONS

An E1 module must be installed in the system, otherwise the message ‘NO E1 TRUNK

CARD’ is displayed.

This MMC is not currently valid in the UK/EU.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 411.

Display shows:

2. Enter desired trunk number (e.g., 705)

OR

Press Volume button to make selection.

Press Right Soft button to move cursor.

OR

Select all trunks.

3. Press Volume button to select trunk type and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. Press Volume button to signalling select and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

[701] E1 SIGNAL

UNUSE

[705] E1 SIGNAL

UNUSE

[ALL] E1 SIGNAL

?

[705] E1 SIGNAL

E&M:IMMEDIATE

[705] E1 SIGNAL

E&M:ITU_WINK

RELATED ITEMS

TRUNK PROGRAMMING

MMC 400

MMC 401

MMC 402

MMC 403

MMC 404

MMC 405

CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TRUNK

TRUNK LINE/PBX LINE

TRUNK DIAL TYPE

TRUNK TOLL CLASS

TRUNK NAME

TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER

Samsung Business Communications

2-108

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming

MMC 406

MMC 407

MMC 408

MMC 409

MMC 410

MMC 411

MMC 412

MMC 413

MMC 414

MMC 415

MMC 416

MMC 417

MMC 418

MMC 419

MMC 420

MMC 421

MMC 422

MMC 423

MMC 424

MMC 426

MMC 433

MMC 434

MMC 436

TRUNK RING ASSIGNMENT

FORCED TRUNK RELEASE

ASSIGN TRUNK MOH SOURCE

TRUNK STATUS READ

ASSIGN DISA TRUNK

ASSIGN E1 SIGNAL TYPE

ASSIGN TRUNK SIGNAL

VMS CALL TYPE

MPD/PRS SIGNAL

REPORT TRUNK ABANDON DATA

ASSIGN E&M/DID RINGDOWN

E1/PRI CRC4 OPTION

BRI AND PRI CARD RESTART

BRI OPTIONS

PRI OPTIONS

MSN DIGIT

TRUNK COS

S/T MODE

BRI S0 MAPPING

TRUNK GAIN CONTROL

COST RATE

CONNECTION STATUS

TRUNK TMC GAIN

OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications

2-109

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[412] ASSIGN TRUNK SIGNAL

Allows the assignment of analogue DID or E&M modules for proper signalling. These trunks can also use the translation tables in MMC 714.

No Signalling condition type

CONDITIONS

An analogue E&M/DID Trunk module must be installed in the OfficeServ 7400 system.

Otherwise, the ‘NO E&M/DID TRUNK’ message is displayed.

DEFAULT DATA

IMMEDIATE START

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 412.

Display shows:

2. Enter desired trunk number (e.g., 705)

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

OR

Select all trunks.

3. Enter desired trunk type selection from above list.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button.

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

[701] TRK SIGNAL

IMMEDIATE START

[705] TRK SIGNAL

IMMEDIATE START

[ALL] TRK SIGNAL

IMMEDIATE START

[705] TRK SIGNAL

WINK START

Samsung Business Communications

2-110

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 416

MMC 714

OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

ASSIGN E&M/DID RINGDOWN

DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION

Samsung Business Communications

2-111

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[413] VMS CALL TYPE

Defines the type of signalling for voice mail-assigned trunk.

Type Description Default

NO

YES

NO

CONDITIONS

This program applies to the SVM-800 voice mail system which is no longer supplied or supported by Samsung.

DEFAULT DATA

SEE TABLE

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 413.

Display shows:

2. Enter desired trunk number (e.g., 702)

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

OR

Select all trunks.

3. Enter 1 for YES, or 0 for NO.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button.

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

[701] CTYPE AP:N

AT:N AA:Y VM:N

[702] CTYPE AP:N

AT:N AA:Y VM:N

[702] CTYPE AP:N

AT:N AA:Y VM:N

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-112

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[414] MPD/PRS SIGNAL

Used on a per-trunk basis to define if a Trunk line is to be either a Metering Pulse Detection (MPD) or a Polarity Reversal Signal (PRS) trunk.

An MPD Trunk will detect a C.O-provided meter pulse. A Polarity Reversal trunk will detect the line reversal signal which may be provided by the Trunk Line when the other party answers the outgoing call or the outside party clears the call.

Type

PRS 1

PRS 2

PRS 3

MPD

Description

When first PRS is detected, call duration timer is started. When second PRS is detected, call duration timer is stopped. The call is not released.

When first PRS is detected, call duration timer is started. When second PRS is detected, call duration timer is stopped and the call is released.

The call duration timer starts based on the timer. When first PRS is detected, call duration timer is stopped and call is released.

Metering Pulse Detection.

CONDITIONS y y

If the trunk is designated as PRS, the call duration timer will be started and the results printed on the SMDR record.

PRS is also essential for dropping a trunk-to- trunk conversation which is unsupervised by an internal party.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE (NORMAL)

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 414.

Display shows:

2. Dial desired trunk number (e.g., 705)

OR

Press Volume button to select trunk and use

Right Soft button to move cursor.

[701] TRK PRS

NONE

[705] TRK PRS

NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-113

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

3. Dial 0 for PRS 1, 1 for PRS 2, 2 for PRS 3, 3 for

MPD or 4 for NORMAL.

OR

Press Volume button to scroll through options and use Left or Right Soft button to return to step 2.

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC503 TRUNK-WIDE TIMERS

[705] TRK PRS

PRS 2

Samsung Business Communications

2-114

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[415] REPORT TRUNK ABANDON DATA

Allows the system administrator or technician to enable or disable the reporting of abandoned Trunk Line calls for which CLIP information has been collected on a per-trunk basis.

There are two options for this MMC:

No Option Description

0 REPORT: NO Abandoned call records for incoming calls with CLIP information will not be printed on SMDR or stored in the system call abandon list. These records will continue to be stored in the station review list.

1 REPORT: YES Abandoned call records for incoming calls with CLIP information will be printed on SMDR and stored in the system call abandon list. These records will also be stored in the station review list.

DEFAULT DATA

ALL TRUNKS REPORT: YES

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 415.

Display shows:

2. Dial trunk number (e.g., 705)

OR

Use Volume button to select trunk and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO

OR

Use Volume button to select option and press

Right Soft button to return to step 2.

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

[701] TRK ABNDN

REPORT:YES

[705] TRK ABNDN

REPORT:YES

[705] TRK ABNDN

REPORT:NO

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 725 SMDR OPTIONS

Samsung Business Communications

2-115

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[416] ASSIGN E&M/DID RINGDOWN

This MMC defines which ring destination table an E&M or DID trunk will follow for incoming calls. There are three options for each trunk as defined below.

No Option Description

0 FOLLOW INCOM DGT When a trunk is set to this option, calls will ring at the destination that matches the digits received from the Trunk line.

1 FOLLOW DID TRANS When a trunk is set to this option, calls will ring at the destination defined in MMC 714 that matches the digits received from the TRUNK LINE.

2 FOLLOW TRK RING If this option is selected, press the Right Soft button and ‘NO.

RCV DIGIT’ will appear on the display. Here is where the number of incoming digits from Trunk Line must be entered (0-4).

When a trunk is set to this option, calls will ring at the destination defined in MMC 406 for that trunk. If the destination defined in MMC 406 is a VMAA port or group then the system will repeat the digits received from the CO to the port when it answers.

CONDITIONS

R2MFC trunk lines only support the ‘FOLLOW INCOM DGT’ and ‘FOLLOW DID

TRANS’ options.

DEFAULT DATA

FOLLOW INCOMING DIGIT

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 416.

Display shows:

2. Enter desired trunk number (e.g., 705)

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

OR

Select all trunks.

3. Dial option number (0~2)

OR.

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to return step 2.

If FOLLOW TRK RING is selected, the

LCD display shows step 4.

[701] EM/DD RING

FOLLOW INCOM DGT

[705] EM/DD RING

FOLLOW INCOM DGT

[ALL] EM/DD RING

FOLLOW INCOM DGT

[705] EM/DD RING

NO. RCV DIGIT:00

2-116

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

4. Enter the number of incoming digits.

5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 714

[705] EM/DD RING

NO. RCV DIGIT:00

DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION

Samsung Business Communications

2-117

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[417] E1/PRI CRC4 OPTION

This option is used to enable/disable CRC4 generation and checking.

CONDITIONS y y

This is useful with some networks which do not support CRC4 framing but only

PCM30 framing.

After changing this option, MMC 418 must be used to restart the module to make the change effective.

DEFAULT DATA

TEPRI CRC4: ON

TEPRI2 Port 1 CRC4: ON, Port 2 CRC4: OFF

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 417.

Display shows:

2. Enter first trunk number in PRI module (e.g. 701)

OR

Press Volume button to select trunk and use

Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter 1 for ON 0 for OFF.

OR

Press Volume button to select and press

Right Soft button.

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

[701] E1/PRI CRC

ON

[701] E1/PRI CRC

ON

[701] E1/PRI CRC

OFF

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 418 BRI & PRI CARD RESTART

Samsung Business Communications

2-118

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[418] BRI AND PRI CARD RESTART

This MMC is used to restart a BRI or PRI module at the module level. This action is required to update the processor on the BRI or PRI module with any changes in the relevant

MMCs and to put these changes into effect.

CONDITIONS y y

A BRI module or TEPRI module or TEPRI2 module must be installed in the system.

Before setting the PRI program, the J2 jumper of the TEPRI or TEPRI2 module must be set ON to PRI mode.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 418.

Display shows first BRI or PRI circuit:

2. Dial first trunk on a BRI or PRI module (e.g., 733)

OR

Press Volume button to select the first trunk and press Right Soft button to move the cursor.

3. Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO.

Pressing 1 will advance to step 4.

4. Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO.

Pressing 1 or 0 will return to step 2.

5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

[725] RESTART

CARD RESTART?NO

[733] RESTART

CARD RESTART?NO

[733] RESTART

CARD RESTART?YES

[733] RESTART

ARE YOU SURE?YES

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 419

MMC 420

MMC 423

MMC 424

BRI OPTIONS

PRI OPTIONS

S/T MODE

BRI S0 MAPPING

Samsung Business Communications

2-119

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[419] BRI OPTIONS

Assigns several options on a per-BRI basis. There are different options depending on whether the BRI is programmed as a trunk or station in MMC 423.

OPTIONS FOR BRI PORTS PROGRAMMED AS TRUNKS

No Option Description

0 CHANNEL ANY When this option is set to YES, the system will place calls on any free channel of that BRI if the channel chosen by the user is busy. If set to

NO, they will receive a busy signal if they attempt to access a busy channel even if the other channel on that BRI is free.

1 BRI MODE

P-P NOR

BRI access mode select.

Point to Point NORmal. This operates like a standard telephone line with one CO number per channel and ring according to MMC 406.

P-P DID

P-M NOR

P-M MSN

Point to Point Direct Inward Dial. This operates in a similar manner to an analogue DID circuit with multiple CO numbers pointed to a single channel and translated within the system (MMC714) to a single device.

Point to Multi-point NORmal. This type of circuit operates in a similar manner to P-P NORmal but allows multiple devices to be attached to the circuit. Ringing is defined in MMC 406.

Point to Multi-point MSN. This setting is used when the line uses the

MSN supplementary service. Ringing is defined in MMC 421.

2 DLSEND

ENBLOCK

OVERLAP

BRI dial sending mode select.

Digits will be collected and sent in a single block similar to a cellphone.

Digits will be sent as they are dialled by the user.

3 CLIP TABLE

4 NB TYPE

Used to select the Calling Party Number to send to the network. If

NONE, MMC405 TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER is sent to the network; otherwise, the Calling Party Number entry in MMC 323 corresponding with the selected number is sent to the network.

Used to select the type of the Calling Party Number to send to the network.

NETWORK Network specific number

Samsung Business Communications

2-120

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

No Option Description

5 NB PLAN

UNKNOWN

ISDN

DATA

Used to select the type of the Calling Party Number Plan to send to the network.

Unknown numbering plan

ISDN numbering plan (CCITT E.163-164)

Data numbering plan (CCITT X.121)

TELEX

NATIONAL

Telex numbering plan (CCITT F.69)

National standard numbering plan

PRIVATE Private numbering plan

EXTEN Local plan

OPTIONS FOR BRI PORTS PROGRAMMED AS STATIONS

No Option Description

0 ANY CHANNEL When this option is set to YES, the system will place calls on any free channel of that BRI if the channel chosen by the user is busy (e.g., Preferred channel selection). If set to NO, the user will receive a busy signal if they attempt to access a busy channel even if the other channel on that BRI is free (e.g., Exclusive channel selection).

1 POWER FEED This field determines if power to a BRI access will be supplied (YES or

NO)

CONDITIONS y y

A BRI module must be installed in the system. Otherwise, the ‘NO BRI CARD’ message is displayed.

If any changes are made in this MMC, the BRI module that is affected by these changes MUST be restarted using MMC 418 in order for the changes to become effective.

DEFAULT DATA

For BRI Ports programmed as Trunks:

CHANNEL ANY: YES

BRI MODE: P-P DDI

DLSEND: OVERLAP

CLIP TABLE: NONE

NB TYPE: NATIONAL

NB PLAN: ISDN

For BRI Ports programmed as Stations:

CHANNEL ANY : YES

POWER FEED : NO

Samsung Business Communications

2-121

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 419.

Display shows first BRI channel.

2. Dial BRI trunk number (e.g., 727)

OR

Press Volume button to select BRI trunk and press Right Soft button.

[725] BRI-TRK

CHANNEL ANY:YES

[727] BRI-TRK

CHANNEL ANY:YES

OR

Press Volume button to select option item and

press Right Soft button.

[727] BRI-TRK

CHANNEL ANY:NO

[727] BRI-TRK

BRI MODE:P-M MSN

[727] BRI-TRK

DLSEND :OVERLAP

[727] BRI-TRK

CLIP TABLE :NONE

[727] BRI-TRK

NB TYPE:UNKNOWN

[727] BRI-TRK

CLIP TABLE:1 OR

Press Volume button to select BRI station and press Right Soft button.

5. Dial BRI station number (e.g., 729)

OR

Press Volume button to select BRI station and press Right Soft button.

[729] BRI-STN

CHANNEL ANY:YES

OR

Press Volume button to select BRI station and

press Right Soft button.

OR

Press Volume button to select option item and

press Right Soft button.

8. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

[729] BRI-STN

CHANNEL ANY:YES

[729] BRI-STN

POWER FEED :NO

[729] BRI-STN

POWER FEED :YES

2-122

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 323

MMC 405

MMC 418

MMC 421

MMC 423

MMC 714

CALLING PARTY NUMBER

TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER

BRI & PRI CARD RESTART

MSN DIGIT

S/T MODE

DID NAME AND NUMBER TRANSLATION

Samsung Business Communications

2-123

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[420] PRI OPTIONS

This MMC allows the technician to program a PRI trunk module.

No Option Description

0 CHANNEL ANY When this option is set to YES, the system will place calls on any free channel of that PRI if the channel chosen by the user is busy. If set to

NO, they will receive a busy signal if they attempt to access a busy channel even if the other channel on that PRI is free.

1 PRI MODE

NORMAL

PRI access mode select.

Point to Point NORMAL. This operates like a standard telephone line with one CO number per channel and ring according to MMC 406.

DID

2 DLSEND

ENBLOCK

OVERLAP

3 CLIP TABLE

Point to Point Direct Inward Dial. This operates in a similar manner to an analogue DID circuit with multiple CO numbers pointed to a single channel and translated within the system (MMC714) to a single device.

PRI dial sending mode select.

Digits will be collected and sent in a single block similar to a cellphone.

4 NB TYPE

Digits will be sent as they are dialled by the user.

Used to select the Calling Party Number to send to the network. If

NONE, MMC405 CO TRUNK NUMBER is sent to the network; otherwise, the Calling Party Number entry in MMC 323 corresponding with the selected number is sent to the network.

Used to select the type of the Calling Party Number to send to the network.

NETWORK Network specific number

5 NB PLAN

UNKNOWN

ISDN

Used to select the type of the Calling Party Number Plan to send to the network.

Unknown numbering plan

ISDN numbering plan (CCITT E.163-164)

DATA

TELEX

NATIONAL

PRIVATE

Data numbering plan (CCITT X.121)

Telex numbering plan (CCITT F.69)

National standard numbering plan

Private numbering plan

EXTEN Local plan

6 SAME CONNID When this option is set to OFF, ISDN port is searched by CONN ID and if set to ON, searched by data channel id.

Samsung Business Communications

2-124

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

CONDITIONS y y

Before setting the PRI program, the J2 jumper of the TEPRI or TEPRI2 module must be set to ON for PRI mode.

After changing data in this program, run MMC 418 to apply the new settings.

DEFAULT DATA

CHANNEL ANY: YES

PRI MODE: DDI

DLSEND: OVERLAP

CLIP TABLE: NONE

NB TYPE: NATIONAL

NB PLAN: ISDN

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 420.

Display shows:

2. Dial first PRI trunk number in PRI module (e.g., 730)

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button.

[701] PRI OPTION

CHANNEL ANY:YES

[730] PRI OPTION

CHANNEL ANY:YES

OR

Press Volume button to select option.

4. Press Volume button to make selection.

Then press Right Soft button.

5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

[730] PRI OPTION

PRI MODE:DDI

[730] PRI OPTION

PRI MODE:NORMAL

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 323

MMC 405

MMC 418

MMC 714

CALLING PARTY NUMBER

TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER

BRI & PRI CARD RESTART

DID NAME AND NUMBER TRANSLATION

Samsung Business Communications

2-125

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[421] MSN DIGIT

Provides a method of assigning an incoming MSN call to a specific station. If any entry in the MSN DIGIT TABLE matches an incoming call’s called party number, either the specific station is alerted, if it is programmed to accept the call, or the call is cleared if it is programmed to reject the call.

If the incoming called party number does not have a matching entry in the MSN table,

MMC 406 ringing destination is alerted or the call is optionally released.

You can give each MSN number to a specific station and you can select the call waiting option: when a destination is busy, the incoming call must be cleared or camped-on to the station (which is alerted to the call).

CONDITIONS y y

A BRI module must be installed in the system. Otherwise, the ‘NO BRI CARD’ message is displayed.

For each BRI access, two adjacent ports are assigned. You need only change the value for one of the two ports; the value for the other port will be changed automatically.

DEFAULT DATA

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 421.

Display shows:

2. Enter trunk number (e.g., 704)

OR

Press Volume button to scroll through ISDN ports and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter the location 1-8 (e.g., 4)

OR

Press Volume button to select location and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. Enter digits to be translated (e.g., 4603881) via dial keypad and press Right Soft button to move

to the destination selection (Max. Digit is 12)

[701] MSN DGT (1)

DGT:

[704] MSN DGT (1)

DGT:

[704] MSN DGT (4)

DGT:

[704] MSN DGT (4)

DGT:4603881

Samsung Business Communications

2-126

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

5. Enter destinations for the six ring plans via the dial keypad (e.g., 204 for ring plan 1)

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button.

6. Enter 1 for YES or 0 for NO.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button.

7. Enter 1 for ACCEPT or 0 for REJECT.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button.

8. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 423 S/T MODE

[704] MSN DGT (4)

1:204 2:NONE

[704] MSN DGT (4)

CW:NO OPT:ACEPT

[704] MSN DGT (4)

CW:NO OPT:ACEPT

Samsung Business Communications

2-127

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[422] TRUNK COS

Used to assign a class of service to each trunk for each of the six ring plans available.

There are 30 different classes of service that are defined in MMC 701, Assign COS Contents. Classes of service are numbered 01-30. Trunk COS applies on Tandem connections.

DEFAULT DATA

ALL RING PLANS: COS 01

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 422.

Display shows first trunk:

2. Dial trunk number (e.g., 705)

OR

Use Volume button to scroll through trunks.

Press Right Soft button to advance to step 3.

OR

Use Volume button to scroll through trunks and press Left Soft button to advance to step 4.

OR

Select all trunks.

3. Enter ring plan class of service (e.g., 05)

OR

Use Volume button to scroll through classes of service and press Right Soft button to advance to step 4.

OR

Use Volume button to scroll through classes of service and press Left Soft button to return to step 2.

4. Enter the next ring plan class of service (e.g., 05)

OR

Use Volume button to scroll through classes of service and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

OR

Use Volume button to scroll through classes of service and press Left Soft button to return to the previous step.

5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

[701] TRK COS

1:01 2:01 3:01

[705] TRK COS

1:01 2:01 3:01

[ALL] TRK COS

1:01 2:01 3:01

[705] TRK COS

1:05 2:01 3:01

[705] TRK COS

1:05 2:05 03:01

Samsung Business Communications

2-128

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS

OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications

2-129

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[423] S/T MODE

Allows the technician to select whether a BRI circuit is a station port or a trunk port.

No

0

1

Type

TRUNK

STATION

Description

The BRI trunk port used for ISDN trunk.

The BRI trunk port used for ISDN phone.

CONDITIONS

The BRI module must be installed in the system, otherwise the message ‘NO BRI CARD’ is displayed.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 423.

Display shows first BRI:

2. Dial trunk number (e.g., 727)

OR

Use Volume button to scroll through BRI numbers and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

OR

[725] S/T MODE

TRUNK

[727] S/T MODE

TRUNK

[ALL] S/T MODE

Select all.

3. Enter circuit type (e.g. station).

OR

Press Volume button to select option and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

TRUNK

[727] S/T MODE

STATION

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 424

MMC 418

MMC 419

MMC 421

BRI S0 MAPPING

BRI AND PRI CARD RESTART

BRI OPTIONS

MSN DIGIT

Samsung Business Communications

2-130

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[424] BRI S0 MAPPING

This MMC assigns an ISDN terminal number to a BRI station port.

CONDITIONS

This function can be used only when the BRI card is installed in the system.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 424.

Display shows first terminal number:

2. Dial terminal number.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection of terminal numbers and press Right Soft button to advance cursor.

3. Dial BRI port number.

OR

Use Volume button to scroll through ports and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

[8701]S0 MAPPING

NONE

[8704]S0 MAPPING

NONE

[8704]S0 MAPPING

712

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 419

MMC 423

BRI OPTIONS

S/T MODE

Samsung Business Communications

2-131

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[426] TRUNK GAIN CONTROL

Allows loss levels to be adjusted on a per-trunk basis. There are two adjustments available in this MMC: ‘TX’ is the transmit level adjustment of the trunk to the station. ‘RX’ is the receive level adjustment of the station to the trunk.

There are four types of adjustment:

No Trunk Gain Description

0 +0.0 adjustment

1

2

3

+1.9

-6.0

-2.5

Up 1.9 dB

Down 6.0 dB

Down 2.5 dB

DEFAULT DATA

TX: +0.0

RX: +0.0

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 426.

Display shows:

2. Enter desired trunk number (e.g., 705) via the dial keypad.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

OR

Select all.

3. Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor and

return to step 1.

5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

[701] TRUNK GAIN

RX:+0.0 TX:+0.0

[705] TRUNK GAIN

RX:+0.0 TX:+0.0

[ALL] TRUNK GAIN

RX:+0.0 TX:+0.0

[705] TRUNK GAIN

RX:+0.0 TX:+0.0

[701] TRUNK GAIN

RX:+0.0 TX:-2.5

Samsung Business Communications

2-132

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications

2-133

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[428] ASSIGN TRUNK/TRUNK USE

This MMC is used to allow or restrict trunks from making outgoing calls to other trunks within the same system. By default (DIAL=YES) all trunks can use other trunks. To prevent use, select NO.

DEFAULT DATA

DIAL: YES

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 428.

Display shows:

2. Dial the trunk use group number (e.g., 305)

OR

Press Volume button to selection and press

Right Soft button.

OR

Select all trunk use groups.

3. Dial the trunk use group number (e.g., 304)

OR

Press Volume button to selection and press Right

Soft button.

4. Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO.

OR

Press Volume button to select YES/NO and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

(301) USE (301)

DIAL:YES

(305) USE (301)

DIAL:YES

(ALL) USE (301)

DIAL:YES

(305) USE (304)

DIAL:YES

(305) USE (304)

DIAL:NO

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 614 STATION/TRUNK USE GROUP

Samsung Business Communications

2-134

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[432] SET H-TRK

Defines the type of signalling for each H-trunk assigned.

DEFAULT DATA

E&M

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 432.

Display shows:

2. Enter desired trunk number (e.g., 705)

OR

Press Volume button to make selection.

Press Right Soft button to move cursor.

OR

Select all trunks.

3. Press Volume button to select trunk type and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

[701] SET H-TRK

E&M

[705] SET H-TRK

E&M

[ALL] SET H-TRK

E&M

[705] SET H-TRK

DID

Samsung Business Communications

2-135

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[433] COST RATE

In this MMC, the TRUNK COST RATE flags are entered for each trunk. DIAL PLANs are defined in MMC 746 (Costing Dial Plan). RATE CALCULATION TABLES are defined in

MMC 749. Each trunk may be defined with up to eight cost rates. Enter one or more of the eight COST RATES per trunk. If an entry is left blank, no call costing will be calculated for that particular DIAL PLAN.

Call type 8 is fixed for incoming calls. Select cost rate type 8 only if you want incoming call costing for a trunk.

DEFAULT DATA

ALL TRUNKS/ALL DIAL PLANS: ALL COST RATES ASSIGNED

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 433.

Display shows trunk number and Cost Rate

[701] :12345678

CR :11111111

2. Dial trunk number (e.g., 705)

OR

Press Volume button to select trunk and press Right

Soft button to move cursor.

OR

Select all.

3. Press Volume button to move cursor along the line until the cursor is under the Cost Rate number (e.g., 2).

Enter 1 for YES or 0 for NO (and press Right Soft button to return to step 1 if required).

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 746

MMC 747

COSTING DIAL PLAN

RATE CALCULATION TABLE

[705] :12345678

CR :11111111

[701] :12345678

CR :10111111

Samsung Business Communications

2-136

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[434] CONNECTION STATUS

This read-only MMC will confirm the connection status of stations or trunks. Display status displays the status of a station or trunk at the time requested. If a conference is in progress with the selected trunk or station, the display will show one of the conference parties and an arrow (Æ). The technician or system administrator can then display the other parties in the conference. If a station or trunk is in an idle state, the display will show

‘IDLE’. If the station or trunk selected is not a valid selection, the display will show ‘IN-

VALID DATA’. If the station or trunk is made busy by the CPU, the display will show

‘MADE BUSY’. If the station is in busy state with no other connection, the display will show ‘BUSY’ only.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

Display trunk connection status

1. Press Transfer button and enter 434.

2. Enter station or trunk number.

Display shows connection status:

3. Enter another station or trunk.

OR

Press Transfer button to exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

Display station connection status

1. Press Transfer button and enter 434.

DISPLAY STATUS

201 IDLE

DISPLAY STATUS

702 227

DISPLAY STATUS

702 227

2. Enter station or trunk number.

Display shows connection status.

3. Enter another station or trunk.

OR

Press Transfer button to exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

DISPLAY STATUS

201 IDLE

DISPLAY STATUS

235 715

DISPLAY STATUS

235 715

Samsung Business Communications

2-137

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming

Display trunk status in conference

1. Press Transfer button and enter 434.

2. Enter station or trunk number.

Display shows connection status:

3. Press Right Soft button to display the next station or trunks involved.

4. Enter another station or trunk.

OR

Press Transfer button to exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

Display status no connection

1. Press Transfer button and enter 434.

2. Enter station or trunk number.

Display shows connection status.

3. Enter another station or trunk.

OR

Press Transfer button to exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

Display status no connection

1. Press Transfer button and enter 434.

2. Enter invalid station or trunk number.

Display shows INVALID DATA:

3. Enter another station or trunk.

OR

Press Transfer button to exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

DISPLAY STATUS

201 IDLE

DISPLAY STATUS

702 227 ,215

Æ

DISPLAY STATUS

702 216

Æ

DISPLAY STATUS

216 702 ,227

Æ

DISPLAY STATUS

201 IDLE

DISPLAY STATUS

702 NONE

DISPLAY STATUS

702 NONE

DISPLAY STATUS

201 IDLE

DISPLAY STATUS

INVALID DATA

DISPLAY STATUS

201 IDLE

Samsung Business Communications

2-138

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

Display connection status with invalid trunk or station number

1. Press Transfer button and enter 434.

2. Enter invalid station or trunk number

Display shows INVALID DATA:

3. Enter another station or trunk.

OR

Press Transfer button to exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

Display connection status with trunk or station number in maintenance busy

1. Press Transfer button and enter 434.

2. Enter station or trunk number.

Display shows connection status:

3. Enter another station or trunk.

OR

Press Transfer button to exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 108

MMC 409

STATION STATUS

TRUNK STATUS READ

DISPLAY STATUS

201 IDLE

DISPLAY STATUS

INVALID DATA

DISPLAY STATUS

201 IDLE

DISPLAY STATUS

201 IDLE

DISPLAY STATUS

725 MADE BUSY

DISPLAY STATUS

725 MADE BUSY

Samsung Business Communications

2-139

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[436] TRUNK TMC GAIN

Allows loss levels of TMC for analogue trunks to be adjusted on a per-trunk basis. There are two adjustments available in this MMC: ‘TX’ is the transmit level adjustment of the trunk to the station. ‘RX’ is the receive level adjustment of the station to the trunk.

DEFAULT DATA

TX: +0 dB

RX: +0 dB

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 436.

Display shows:

2. Enter desired trunk number (e.g., 705) via the dial keypad.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

OR

Select all.

3. Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor and

return to step 2.

5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

[701] TMC GAIN

RX:+0 dB TX:+0 dB

[705] TMC GAIN

RX:+0 dB TX:+0 dB

[ALL] TMC GAIN

RX:+0 dB TX:+0 dB

[705] TMC GAIN

RX:+0 dB TX:+0 dB

[701] TMC GAIN

RX:+0 dB TX:-2 dB

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-140

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[500] SYSTEM-WIDE COUNTERS

Used to set the values of the system counters. The counters are listed below with a brief description of each.

No Counter

CNTER

COUNTER

2 DISA CALL CNTER

3 DISA LOCK CNTER

COUNTER

ALARM

6 UCDS AUDIO ALARM

7 UCD CS LEVEL 1

8 UCD CS LEVEL 2

Default

5

5

99

3

99

0

0

0

0

Description

The number of times that an alarm reminder will ring a station before cancelling. RANGE = 1-99.

The number of times the system will redial an outside number after the auto redial feature has been activated. RANGE = 1-99.

Sets the maximum number of intercom calls that can be made after accessing a DISA line.

RANGE = 1-99.

Number of attempts the system will allow to incorrectly access a DISA line before locking out the

DISA line. RANGE = -99

Number of times the system will allow a user to signal New Call on a Trunk line during one call.

RANGE = 1-99.

Used to set the Visual alarm threshold. It is triggered when the number of calls waiting to be answered in the UCD group reaches this value.

RANGE = 0-25.

Used to set the Audio alarm threshold. It is triggered when the number of calls waiting to be answered in the UCD group reaches this value.

RANGE = 0-25.

Provides call wait indication level 1 if number of calls waiting to be answered in UCD group reaches this value. RANGE = 0-25.

Provides call wait indication level 2 if number of calls waiting to be answered in UCD group reaches this value. RANGE = 0-25.

DEFAULT DATA

SEE DESCRIPTION

Samsung Business Communications

2-141

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 500.

Display shows:

2. Enter number from above list (e.g., 6)

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter in new value via dial keypad.

If entry is valid, system will return to step 2.

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

ALARM REM.CNTER

05

Æ

UCDS AUDIO ALARM

00

Æ

UCDS AUDIO ALARM

00

Æ02

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-142

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[501] SYSTEM TIMERS

Allows the technician to adjust individual timers as necessary.

TIMER TABLE

Timer Name

ALARM TIME

ALERT TONE TIME

ALM REM.INTERVAL

ALM REM RING OFF

ATT. RECALL TIME

AUTO REDIAL INT.

AUTO REDIAL RLS.

BOOTH TIME OUT

(Hotel application only)

CALLBACK NO ANS

CAMP ON RECALL

CID MSG RECEIVE

CID DSP ALLOC TM

CLI DISPLAY TIME

CO CLEAR TIME

Default Range Unit Description

100 0-2500 MIN This is the time the system alarm key will start ringing after the alarm key has been silenced.

1000 100-2500

MSEC

This timer sets the duration of the attention tone preceding a call to a phone in the Voice

Announce or Auto Answer mode. This tone will also precede a forced Auto Answer call.

25

10

1-250 SEC This timer controls the time between ring attempts at a station when alarm reminder is set.

1-25 SEC This timer controls the length of the ring cycle duration when an alarm reminder is set at a station.

30

30

45

005

0-250 SEC This controls how long a transfer recall will ring at a station before recalling the operator.

1-250 SEC This timer controls the time between attempts after RETRY dialling is set on a station.

1-250 SEC This timer controls the duration of a Ring No

Answer condition on a retry number dialled before the auto redial is automatically cancelled.

0-250 MIN Controls the time for which a booth phone is enabled.

30

30

6

500

5

30

1-250 SEC This timer controls the time before the callback is automatically cancelled when a callback detects Ring No Answer.

0-250 SEC This timer controls the time a camped-on call will stay at a destination before recalling to the transferring station.

1-25 SEC The amount of time that the system will allow a valid message from the analogue CID trunk.

000-500

MSEC

Caller ID (CLI) Digital Signal Processor Allocation timer - the length of time the DSP is incircuit to decode analogue Caller ID.

1-25 SEC The amount of time that the Caller ID information remains on the phone’s display.

0-250 SEC The length of time a Direct Trunk Select key remains busy after cleardown.

Samsung Business Communications

2-143

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

Timer Name

CO CONFIRM TIME

CO-CO DISCONNECT

CONFIRM TONE TM

CRD TONE INT TM

DIAL PASS TIME

DISA DISCONNECT

DISA LOCK OUT TM

DISA NOANS DISC.

DISA PASS CHECK

DISA NO ACTION

DISPLAY DELAY TM

DOOR LOCK RELES.

DOOR RING DETECT

DOOR RING OFF TM

E-HOLD RECALL TM

Default Range Unit Description

3

20

1000 100-2500

MSEC

30

The tone heard when a feature is activated or deactivated.

0-250 SEC This is the call record tone interval time. An entry other than zero will cause a tone to be heard by all the parties in a recorded conversation. The range for the tone is 001(every second) to 255

(every 255 seconds). A value of 000 means no tone. Requires an SVMi module.

3

30

0-25 SEC This timer monitors the time before connecting the transmit of the phone to the trunk side of an outgoing call.

1-250 MIN This timer controls the maximum duration of a

DISA call.

30

30

30

0-250 MIN According to MMC 314 CO CONFIRM type, the outgoing call will be disconnected after this timer expires or the outgoing caller will hear the confirm tone.

1-250 MIN This timer monitors the duration of an unsupervised conference; when it expires, both trunks are disconnected.

1-250 MIN This timer controls how long a DISA call is not allowed to be made after the DISA error counter has expired (MMC 500).

0-250 SEC This timer determines when a DISA call is disconnected by force when a called party does not answer.

1-250 MIN This timer defines the period before the system clears the incorrect passcode counter.

10

2

500

50

30

45

0-250 SEC This timer controls how long a DISA line will wait for further action from the caller.

1-250 SEC This timer controls how long a display is shown in the LCD and how long error tone is heard.

100-2500

MSEC

10-250

MSEC

This timer controls how long the door lock relay will be activated.

This timer controls the time before a call is answered by the door phone.

1-250 SEC This timer controls the duration of ringing at the door ring destination before automatically cancelling.

0-250 SEC This timer controls how long a call is held exclusively at a station before recalling.

Samsung Business Communications

2-144

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

Timer Name

FIRST DIGIT TIME

HOK FLASH MAX TM

HOK FLASH MIN TM

HOOK OFF TIME

HOOK ON TIME

INQUIRY RELEASE

INTER DIGIT TIME

ISDN INT DGT TM

KMMC LOCK OUT TM

LCR ADVANCE TIME

LCR INTER DIGIT

LONG KEY DETECT

LONG KEY REPEAT

MCL DELAY TIME

MS LED ON TIME

Default Range Unit

10

120

80

100

200

30

10

7

60

5

5

600

300

4

5

Description

1-250 SEC This timer controls how long the system will

20-2500

MSEC

20-2500

MSEC

20-2500

MSEC

20-2500

MSEC wait for dialling to begin before dropping the dial tone and returning the you to error tone.

This timer monitors the duration of a hook- switch flash to ensure that the flash is valid and not a line noise or an accidental hookswitch bounce LONGEST duration.

This timer monitors the duration of a hookswitch flash to ensure that the flash is valid and not a line noise or an accidental hookswitch bounce SHORTEST duration.

This timer controls the time before dial tone is sent to a single line station.

This timer sets the minimum amount of time that the system will recognize as an SLT hang up.

1-250 SEC This timer monitors the duration of the interaction of the Soft button to determine when to return the LCD back to a normal status. This timer affects only display phones.

1-250 SEC This timer controls the grace period between dialling valid digits before dropping the call and returning you back to error tone.

1-15 SEC This timer controls the grace period between dialling valid digits and the end of the dialling string on an ISDN call.

10-50 SEC This timer controls the grace period between programming actions while in a programming session. The timer automatically returns the system to secure programming status.

1-250 SEC This timer controls the time before selecting the next allowable route when a station is allowed to route advance.

1-250 SEC This timer controls the grace period between dialling valid digits before accessing a trunk.

0-2500

MSEC

This timer controls the time a key must be held down before the key press is repeated.

0-2500

MSEC

0-9 SEC

1-10 SEC

This timer controls the time between repeated digits on a long key press.

This timer controls the time when the system should start transmitting Authorisation Code after sending MCL access code (Cable &

Wireless 131 access). Available in UK only.

This timer controls the duration a Manual Signalling key will remain on after use.

Samsung Business Communications

2-145

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

Timer Name

OFF HOOK RING INT

OHVA ANSWER TIME

PAGE TIME OUT

PAGE TONE TIME

PARK RECALL TIME

PC-MMC LOCK TIME

PERI UCD REPORT

POWER DOWN TIME

RECALL

DISCONNECT

RECALL WAIT TIME

ROUTE OPTIMISE

SMDR START /DP

SMDR START /DTMF

SYS HOLD RECALL

TRANSFER RECALL

Default Range Unit Description

15

10

20

500

1-250 SEC This timer controls the time between ring bursts to a user who has a camped-on call.

1-250 SEC This timer controls the time allowed to answer an OHVA call before automatic rejection.

1-250 SEC This timer controls the duration of a page announcement.

100-2500

MSEC

This timer controls the duration of tone burst heard over the page prior to the page announcement.

45

5

5

2000

0-250 SEC This timer controls how long a call is parked before recalling to the call park originator.

1-60 MIN This timer monitors PC programming activity, drops the link if no action is created and returns the system back to secure program status.

3-99 SEC

500-9900

MSEC

This timer determines the interval between periodic UCD reports provided to an SIO port.

This timer monitors the power to the ROM pack to begin shutdown status.

2

15

5

30

15

45

20

1-250 MIN This is the time an attendant recall will ring before being disconnected.

0-250 SEC This is the time any recall (hold or transfer) continues to recall at your station before it recalls to the operator.

0-250 SEC When a call is made via Q-SIG signalling, route optimization is activated after this time.

1-250 SEC This grace period timer starts SMDR recording for rotary dialling.

1-250 SEC This grace period timer starts SMDR recording for touchtone dialling. This timer also controls the LCD duration timer on the phones. The duration time displayed and the SMDR time duration will be the same.

0-250 SEC This timer determines the time calls can be left on hold before recalling to the holding station. This is a system-wide timer. Setting the timer to 000 means that no recalling will take place.

0-250 SEC This timer determines how long transferred calls ring before recalling. This is a systemwide timer.

Samsung Business Communications

2-146

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

Timer Name

TRK AUTOMOH DISC

TSW CONN. DELAY

UCDS AUDIO ALARM

UCDS VISUAL ALARM

VOIP RE-ROUTE TM

Default

Range Unit Description

60 1-250 SEC When set to ON, incoming trunk calls are connected to MOH automatically after the

DISA ANSWR timer (MMC 503) expires. In this case the caller hears MOH. If the TRK

AUTOMOH DISC timer expires before the call is answered, the call is disconnected.

0 0-10 SEC When an incoming trunk makes an outgoing call to another trunk, the system connects the voice path after this time.

0

0

0-990 SEC When an SVMi-20E module is installed and the digital UCD package enabled, this counter determines the maximum number of seconds a call has been waiting at the UCD group before the

UCD group’s SUPV key begins to flash along with an audio alarm. For more UCD alarm conditions, see MMC 500.

0-250 SEC When an SVMi-20E module is installed and the digital UCD package enabled, this counter determines the maximum number of seconds a call at the UCD group before the UCD group’s SUPV key begins to flash as an alarm. For more UCD alarm conditions, see

MMC 500.

15 0-25 SEC If an outgoing call made via a VoIP trunk does not receive an acknowledgement message from the called party within this time, the call is treated as failed.

Some timers are disabled when their value is set to ‘0’.

DEFAULT DATA

SEE DESCRIPTION

SOME TIMERS DEPEND ON COUNTRY

Samsung Business Communications

2-147

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 501.

Display shows first timer value:

2. Press Volume button to select timer and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter new value using keypad; if valid, system returns to step 2 with new value.

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

AA INT DGT TIME

05 SEC

Æ

KMMC LOCK OUT TM

060 SEC

Æ

KMMC LOCK OUT TM

060 SEC

Æ250

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-148

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[502] STATION-WIDE TIMERS

Allows certain station timer values to be changed on a per-station basis or for all stations.

No Item Description

0 NO ANS FWD This timer controls how long the station will ring before Forward on No

Answer takes place (1-250 sec)

1 DTMF DUR. This timer governs the duration of DTMF digits which are transmitted to an external VMS system port. This can be used when a VMS system fails to recognise the default DTMF digit duration being transmitted from the

SLT port (100-9900 ms)

2 F-DGT DELY This timer will be valuable for the system administrator to insert a suitable delay before generating DTMF digits for In-Band integration (100-

9900 ms)

3 OFFHK SEL. This timer controls the grace period before placing an internal/external call as programmed in MMC 306 (0-250 sec)

4 EFWD DELAY This timer controls the External Call Forward feature which will allow a station to ring before the call is placed on external call forwarding.

(1-250 sec)

5 CC RNG DLY If a station does not answer an incoming call within this time, other stations with a CC key for that station will ring.

CONDITIONS

NONE

DEFAULT DATA

NO ANS FWD: 015 SEC

DTMF DUR: 100 MSEC

F-DGT DELY: 600 MSEC

OFFHK SEL: 008 SEC

EFWD DELAY: 010 SEC

CC RNG DLY: 010 SEC

Samsung Business Communications

2-149

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 502.

Display shows:

2. Dial station number (e.g., 205)

OR

Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button.

OR

Select all stations and press Right Soft button.

[201] NO ANS FWD

015 SEC

Æ

[205] NO ANS FWD

015 SEC

Æ_

3. Enter new value (must be three digits) via dial keypad (e.g., 020)

System will return to step 2.

4. Dial timer number from above list (e.g., 1)

OR

Press Volume button to select and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

5. Enter new timer value (must be four digits, e.g.,

0200)

System returns to step 2.

6. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

[ALL] NO ANS FWD

015 SEC

Æ_

[205] NO ANS FWD

015 SEC

Æ020

[205] DTMF DUR.

0100 MS

Æ_

[205] DTMP DUR.

0100 MS

Æ0200

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 102

MMC 306

CALL FORWARD

HOT LINE/OFF HOOK SELECTION

Samsung Business Communications

2-150

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[503] TRUNK-WIDE TIMERS

Allows certain trunk timer values to be changed on a per-trunk basis or for all trunks.

It is not advisable to change these values, with the exception of trunk Flash Time, without assistance from Technical Support.

No

00

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

Item Description

ANS.BAK TM ANSWER BACK TIME. This timer is used for certain types of E & M signalling and does not affect normal

CO lines.

CLEARING This timer ensures that a call is fully disconnected at the CO by preventing CO access outgoing or receiving incoming ring between a disconnect and the expiration of this timer.

CO SUPV TM CO SUPERVISION TIME. this is the minimum length of loop open disconnect received from the

CO that will be seen as a valid hang up on the system.

DTMF DUR. DTMF DURATION. This is the length of the DTMF digits that will be sent to the CO on this line.

F-DGT DELY First-DIGIT DELAY. This is the length of time the system will wait for CO line conditions to stabilize after seizure before sending DTMF digits.

FLASH TIME This is the duration of the momentary open sent on a circuit when FLASH key is pressed.

NO RING TM This is the length of time the system will wait after detecting a ring burst on a line before deciding the call has disconnected.

PAUSE TIME This is the length of time the system will wait before sending the next digit for a pause in a speed dial bin.

PRS DET TM This means the duration of PRS signal pulse. If the

PRS signal is reversed when opposite party is answered and maintain the status before the opposite party disconnect the call, the PRS DET TM must be set to 0.

RNG DET TM RING DETECT TIME. This is the minimum length of ring signal the system will regard as a valid ring.

WINK TIME This is the duration of the acknowledgment signal that the system will send on an E&M circuit

MF/DP INT This is the interval between sending digit. In case of

DTMF signal, over the 500ms will be serviced as

100 ms.

MFR DLY TM This is a delay time to allocate the MFR after incoming trunk is detected. This is to prevent the wrong detection of DTMF signal by noise.

Range

0-2500 MSEC

100-9900 MSEC

10-2500 MSEC

100-9900 MSEC

100-9900 MSEC

20-2500 MSEC

1-25 SEC

1-25 SEC

0-2500 MSEC

10-2500 MSEC

100-300 MSEC

100-9900 MSEC

0-25 SEC

Samsung Business Communications

2-151

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

No

13

14

Item Description

DISA ANSWR This is a delay time to answer the DISA trunk call or to answer the trunk when TRK AUTO ANSWER is set to ON (MMC400).

CONN DELAY This is the delay time to connect a voice path when users make outgoing calls via a loop trunk. This is to prevent users hearing noise when the loop trunk is seized.

DEFAULT DATA

ANS.BAK TM: 0600 MSEC

CLEARING: 2000 MSEC

CO SUPV TM: 0400 MSEC

DTMF DUR.: 0100 MSEC

F-DGT DELY: 0600 MSEC

FLASH TIME: 0090 MSEC

NO RING TM: 04 SEC

PAUSE TIME: 03 SEC

PRS DET TM: 0000 MSEC

RNG DET TM: 0300 MSEC

WINK TIME: 200 MSEC

MF/DP INT: 0800 MSEC

MFR DLY TIME: 00 SEC

DISA ANSWR: 01 SEC

CONN DELAY: 0000 MSEC

Range

0-9 SEC

0-2500 MSEC

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 503.

Display shows:

2. Dial trunk number (e.g., 704)

OR

Press Volume button to select trunk and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

OR

Select all trunks.

3. Dial timer number from the list.

OR

Press Volume button to select timer and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. Enter new timer value (must be four digits, e.g., 0200)

System returns to step 2.

[701] ANS.BAK TM

0600 MS

Æ

[704] ANS.BAK TM

0600 MS

Æ

[ALL] ANS.BAK TM

0600 MS

Æ_

[704] DTMF DUR.

0100 MS

Æ_

[704] DTMF DUR.

0100 MS

Æ 0200

Samsung Business Communications

2-152

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-153

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[504] PULSE MAKE/BREAK RATIO

Allows the ability to change the value of pulses per second and the duration of the make/break time. This will only affect rotary dial trunks.

No

0

1

Item

MAKE/BREAK RATIO

PULSE PER SECOND

Description

Make/Break ratio of dial pulse (01-99)

Number of dial pulses per second (10 or 20)

DEFAULT DATA

MAKE/BREAK: 33 MAKE

PULSES PER SECOND: 10 PPS

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 504.

Display shows:

2. Dial 0 or 1 for option.

OR

Press Volume button for selection and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Dial new value.

System returns to step 2.

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

MAKE/BREAK RATIO

33 MAKE

Æ

PULSE PER SECOND

10 PPS

Æ_

PULSE PER SECOND

10 PPS

Æ 20

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 402 TRUNK DIAL TYPE

Samsung Business Communications

2-154

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[505] ASSIGN DATE AND TIME

Allows the system date and time to be set. This will set the system-wide clock.

Type Description Range

YY Year 00-99

MM Month 01-12

DD Date 01-31

W Day 0-6 (0: SUN, 1: MON, 2: TUE, 3: WED, 4: THU, 5: FRI, 6: SAT)

HH Hour 00-23

MM Minute 00-59

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 505.

Display shows:

2. Enter new time and date using above table.

System returns to step 2.

3. Verify time and date.

Re-enter if necessary.

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

OLD:0111095:0901

NEW:YYMMDDW:HHMM

OLD:0111095:0901

NEW:0111121:1445

OLD:0111121:1445

NEW:YYMMDDW:HHMM

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 861 SYSTEM OPTIONS (AUTO UPDATE TIME)

Samsung Business Communications

2-155

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[506] TONE CADENCE

Provides the ability to customize the tone cadence on a system-wide basis. The system provides 11 types of tone and three types of tone provided from Central Office or a PBX system can be detected.

Please call Technical Support before changing any cadences as some systems may require default settings.

No Item Description

00 BUSY TONE The called station is busy.

01 CONFM/BARGE A feature has been successfully activated/cleared or a Barge-In with

Tone has been performed.

02 DIAL TONE The system is ready to interpret key presses/dialled digits.

03 DND/NO MORE The called station is in DND or has no free CALL buttons.

04 ERROR TONE An error has been made.

05 HOLD/CAMPON This is the system generated hold tone.

06 MSGWAT TONE This is the tone heard at an SLT with a message waiting.

07 RGBACK TONE The called station is ringing.

08 RING TONE

09 TRANSFER

TONE

This is the tone heard from a ROP device or Loud Bell when these devices are called.

This is the tone heard when the transfer button is pressed or an SLT hook flashes.

10 DID RNGBACK This is the tone heard by the outside party when they dial a DID number.

11 CO BUSY This is used to detect the busy tone provided from Central Office or a PBX system.

12 CO RINGBACK This is used to detect the ring back tone provided from Central Office or

PBX system.

13 CO DIAL This is used to detect the dial tone provided from Central Office or PBX system.

DEFAULT DATA

TONE

BUSY TONE

CONFIRM/BARGE-IN

DIAL TONE

ON

500

200

OFF ON

500

200

CONTINUOUS

500

200

(unit: milliseconds)

OFF

500

5000

Samsung Business Communications

2-156

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

TONE

DND/NO MORE TONE

ERROR TONE

HOLD/CAMP-ON TONE

ON

250

500

500

OFF

250

500

3500

ON

250

500

500

(unit: milliseconds)

OFF

250

500

3500

RING BACK TONE 400 200 400 2000

1000 3000 1000 3000

TRANSFER TONE 100 100 100 100

DID 1000 3000 1000 3000

CO BUSY TONE

CO RINGBACK TONE

350

400

350

200

350

400

350

2000

CO DIAL TONE CONTINUOUS

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 506.

Display shows:

2. Dial tone number from above list (00-13, e.g., 09)

OR

Press Volume button to select tone, press Left Soft button and advance to step 3.

3. Dial tone option 0 for CONTINUOUS or 1 for IN-

TERRUPT.

OR

Press Volume button to select tone control and press

Right Soft button to advance step 4.

OR

Press Left Soft button to return to step 2.

4. Dial new value for interrupt times.

(must be four digits)

Press Right Soft button advances cursor and press Left Soft button retreats cursor.

If valid entry, system returns to step 2.

5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

BUSY TONE

INTERRUPT TONE

TRANSFER TONE

INTERRUPT TONE

TRANSFER TONE

INTERRUPT TONE

TRANSFER TONE:0100

9900 0100 9900

Samsung Business Communications

2-157

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[507] ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME

Use this MMC to program Ring Plans time settings. Ring Plans provide six separate ringing destinations based on day of the week and time of day. The start time within a plan is the time the system will switch from one ringing destination to the next. The end time is the time the system will switch from that plan to the previous plan.

An RPO (Ring Plan Override) button is not needed as the system will switch automatically; however, it is helpful to have a dedicated button so the status can be manually changed if needed. If a ring plan has no time entry the ring plan defaults to ring plan 1. The ring plans correlate with all MMCs that program ring or termination destinations and station and trunk COS.

The following example may be useful when assigning ring plan times:

RING PLAN Start Time End Time

(MON: 1)

(MON: 2)

(MON: 3)

(MON: 4)

(MON: 5)

(MON: 6)

ST: 0000

ST: 0800

ST: 1000

ST: 1200

ST: 1300

ST: 1400

END: 23:59

END: 2200

END: 2000

END: 1800

END: 1600

END: 1500

Using a 24-hour clock in the example above, notice that the END time is within the same

24-hour period as the START time. The system will stay in the last active Ring Plan from the previous day until the end time which is 23:59. Monday starts Ring Plan 1 at 00:00.

The system will stay in Ring Plan 1 until Ring Plan 2 starts (08:00) and will stay in Ring

Plan 2 until Ring Plan 3 starts (10:00), and so on. As each ring Plan start it will override the previous Ring Plan.

If a Ring Plan expires and there are no additional Ring Plans set, the system will default to the Ring Plan with a time that extends past the expired Ring Plan time.

CONDITIONS y y y

When using a Samsung built-in Voice Mail module that only has day/night mode, the day/night must be set for each RING PLAN in MMC 758, VM DAY/NIGHT.

Ring Plans must be programmed in sequence (RP 1, 2, 3, 4, etc.) A Ring Plan cannot be omitted (i.e. you cannot program RP 1, 2, 5, etc.)

A higher numbered Ring Plan cannot have a START time which begins before a lower numbered Ring Plan

Samsung Business Communications

2-158

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

Ring Plan 1 is the default Ring Plan for each day. If no Ring Plan destination is entered, the operator group is the default destination.

DEFAULT DATA

START: NONE

END: NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 507.

Display shows:

2. Dial day number (0-6, e.g., 3 for Weds)

OR

Press Volume button to select day.

Press Right Soft button to advance cursor to step 3.

3. Dial ring plan number (1-6, e.g., 2)

OR

Press Volume button to select day.

Press Right Soft button to advance cursor to step 4.

4. Dial start time (e.g., 1030)

If valid, cursor moves to end time.

Enter end time.

If valid, system returns to step 2.

Begin again.

5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

RING PLAN (SUN:1)

ST: END:

RING PLAN (WED:1)

ST: END:

RING PLAN (WED:2)

ST:_ END:

RING PLAN (WED:1)

ST:1030 END:1800

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 722

MMC 723

STATION KEY PROGRAMMING

SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING

Samsung Business Communications

2-159

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[508] CALL COST

Set the Call Cost attributes generated by the system during a call. This information can be displayed on the phone during a call or as an SMDR record.

No

0

1

Display Description

UNIT COST PER MP When the system is installed to receive metering pulses on a C. O. outgoing call. It is used for generating total call cost by multiplying it by the number of pulses. Allows a maximum value of 9999. (Currency is PENCE or ECENTS depending on USE EURO option setting in MMC 210.)

CALL COST RATE This generates additional call cost calculated by multiplying this rate by the original call cost. Ranges from 100 to

255.

CAUTION

Changing these values when there is a call in progress may result in an inaccurate call cost. This facility requires the Metering Pulse Detection version of the trunk module.

DEFAULT DATA

UNIT COST PER MP : 0200 PENCE, CALL COST RATE : 100 PERCENT

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 508.

Display shows:

2. Dial 0 or 1

OR

Press Volume button to select and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter new value (e.g. 110)

System returns to step 2.

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

UNIT COST PER MP

0200 PENCE £

CALL COST RATE

100 %

£

CALL COST RATE

110 % £

Samsung Business Communications

2-160

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 110 STATION ON/OFF (CALL COST OPTION)

Samsung Business Communications

2-161

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[510] SLI RING CADENCE

Provides the ability to customize the ring cadence for single line ports on a system-wide basis. There are five cadences available.

Please call Technical Support before changing any cadences as some peripheral systems may require default settings.

No

1

2

3

4

5

Item Description

STN RING

TRK RING

This is the cadence intercom calls will ring at.

This is the cadence trunk calls will ring at.

DOOR RING This is the cadence door phone calls will ring at.

ALM RING

CBK RING

This is the cadence alarm reminder calls will ring at.

This is the cadence callbacks will ring at.

DEFAULT DATA

Item ON OFF ON

(unit: milliseconds)

OFF

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 510.

Display shows:

2. Dial cadence number from above list (e.g., 3)

OR

Press Volume button to select

Press Left Soft button and advance to step 3.

3. Dial new value for interrupt times.

(must be four digits)

Press Right Soft button to advance cursor.

Press Left Soft button to retreat cursor.

If valid entry, system returns to step 2.

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

1:STN RING :0400

0200 0400 3000

3:DOOR RING:0400

0100 0400 2000

3:DOOR RING:0100

9900 0100 9900

Samsung Business Communications

2-162

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications

2-163

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[511] MSG WAITING LAMP CADENCE

This MMC defines the cadence (flash rate) of single line telephone message waiting lamps on phones connected to systems with an MWSLI module. There are two choices for the

MW lamp cadence: continuous and interrupted.

No

0

1

Item Description

INTERRUPTED The MW lamp will flash at a rate determined by the timer settings.

The shortest ‘on’ time is 100 ms and the longest ‘on’ time is 3000 ms.

The timer is adjusted in 100 ms increments.

CONTINUOUS When an MWSLI port has a message, the lamp will be lit steady.

CONDITIONS

Systems with MWSLI modules only.

DEFAULT DATA

INTERRUPT LED: 1000MS-ON 1000MS-OFF

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 511.

Display shows:

2. Press 0 or 1 to select CADENCE.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection.

Press Right Soft button to advance step 3.

3. Dial new values for interrupt times (four digits)

MW LAMP CADENCE

2000 2000

Press Right Soft button to move cursor back.

If valid entry, system returns to step 2.

Press Left Soft button to move cursor back.

If valid entry, system returns to step 2.

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MW LAMP CADENCE

INTERRUPT LED

MW LAMP CADENCE

INTERRUPT LED

NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-164

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[512] HOLIDAY ASSIGNMENT

This MMC defines up to 60 holiday dates throughout the year. The system will override the normal ring plan for these days and remain in the ring plan associated with the holiday.

Dates are entered in a month-day format: for example, July 4th would be 0704. One ring plan applies to all holidays.

DEFAULT DATA

NO HOLIDAY ASSIGNED

FOLLOWS RING PLAN 1

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 512.

Display shows the Ring Plan:

2. Press Right Soft button advance cursor.

Press Volume button to select a Ring Plan.

OR

Use the dial keypad to select a Ring Plan.(e.g., 2)

3. Press Right Soft button to enter and advance cursor.

RING PLAN

FOLLOW 1

RING PLAN

FOLLOW 2

4. Press Volume button to scroll to assign Holiday and press Right Soft button to advance cursor

5. Press Volume button to select entry and press Right

Soft button enter and advance cursor

6. Dial date for holiday using the dial keypad

(e.g., 0704)

7. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 507 ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME

RING PLAN

FOLLOW 2

ASSIGN HOLIDAY

01:

ASSIGN HOLIDAY

05:

ASSIGN HOLIDAY

05:0704

Samsung Business Communications

2-165

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[513] HOTEL TIMER

This MMC is where the Hotel timers for guest-rooms are set. These are system-wide timers that affect all rooms. Refer to your Hotel documentation for more details.

No Item

0 CHECK OUT TIME

1 ROOM CLEAN TIME

2 CHECK IN END TM

Description

If a room is occupied after the checkout time, an additional day’s room charge will be automatically added to the room bill. (If a room is flagged as Occupied and HOLD then the additional day’s room charge will not be added. Setting a room status to HOLD allows a late checkout to be performed.)

This is the time each day that the system will flag all occupied rooms as NEEDS CLEANING.

This is used to decide if an additional day’s room charge will be automatically added to the room bill when the first Check Out Time is reached. For example, if you set the Check In End time as 5 am, all rooms checked in before 5 am will be automatically charged an extra day at the Check Out Time (which might be, say, 11 am). Rooms checked in after 5 am will not be charged extra until the next day, if still occupied at the Check Out Time.

CONDITIONS

This function can be used only when the Hotel function is enabled in MMC 813, HOTEL

OPERATION.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 513.

Display shows:

2. Select the timer using the Volume buttons.

3. Enter new time using 24-hour clock format system returns to step 2.

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

CHECK OUT TIME

HH:MM : :

ROOM CLEAN TIME

HH:MM : :

ROOM CLEAN TIME

HH:MM : 11:30

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-166

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[514] TONE SOURCE

This program can assign an external tone source (e.g. a music source) instead of the normal system tone (TONE) for certain calls. The tones that can be changed are:

No Type

DEFAULT DATA

TONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 514.

Display shows:

2. Enter the tone number 0-6 (e.g. 1)

OR

Press Volume button to select tone number and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Dial a number for external tone source (e.g. 3762)

OR

Press Volume button to select tone number and press Right Soft button to store.

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

BUSY TONE

TONE

DIAL TONE

TONE

DIAL TONE

3762

Samsung Business Communications

2-167

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[515] DAYLIGHT ASSIGNMENT

Defines up to 10 summertime periods. The system time will automatically increase by an hour at 2 a.m. on the assigned Start date and will automatically decrease by an hour at 3 a.m. on the assigned End date.

Dates are entered as follows:

NO= entry number 01–10

YY= year (last 2 digits, e.g. 06 for 2006)

START = start date (MMDD, e.g. 0801 is 1st August)

END = end date (MMDD, e.g. 0910 is 10th September)

For example, the entry might be:

NO : YY : START : END

01 : 05 : 3103 : 2710

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 515.

Display shows:

2. Dial 01–10 to select entry number (e.g. 01)

OR

Press Volume button to select and press Right

Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter dates as described above.

NO : YY : START : END

01 : : :

NO : YY : START : END

01 :_ : :

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 505

MMC 861

NO : YY : START : END

01 : 05 : 3103 : 2710

ASSIGN DATE AND TIME

SYSTEM OPTIONS (AUTO UPDATE TIME)

Samsung Business Communications

2-168

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[600] ASSIGN OPERATOR GROUP

Used to assign an operator group for each ring plan.

DEFAULT DATA

RING PLAN 1-6: 500

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 600.

Display shows:

2. Dial the ring plan number (1~6)

OR

Press Right Soft button to advance the cursor.

3. Dial the group number.

OR

Press Volume button to select group and press

Right Soft button.

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

OPERATOR GROUP

1:500 2:500

OPERATOR GROUP

1:500 2:500

OPERATOR GROUP

1:501 2:500

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 601 ASSIGN STATION GROUP

Samsung Business Communications

2-169

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[601] ASSIGN STATION GROUP

This MMC is used to build all station groups. There are 80 programmable groups available.

The options for setting up these groups are as follows:

No Option

0 TYPE

Description

This is the type of group you are creating and can be one of the following:

0 NORMAL: Used to assign stations in a ring group. The members can be stations, common bell contacts or Ring over Page relays.

1 VMAA: Used to group a number of voice mail port extensions. These must have been defined in MMC 207 as VMAA ports or they cannot be entered here. Check all programming in MMC 726 to ensure that the In band DTMF codes are properly set.

2 UCD: Used to build a UCD group. The system will support two methods of UCD:

TYPE 1 UCD

The group OVERFLOW/N-ANS destination(see below) is defined as an SLT port to which you must connect some type of announcement device to play to callers while they are on hold.

Please note that this type of UCD group has the following limitations. a) The announcement device must be able to terminate the announcement with a hook-flash and a transfer back to the UCD group. b) Only one caller at a time can hear the announcement. c) Each caller connected to the announcement must hear the announcement in its entirety. d) It is possible that a new caller may ‘jump ahead’ in the queue if a previous caller is currently connected to the announcement device.

TYPE 2 UCD

The group OVERFLOW/N-ANS destination (see below) is defined as a VMS UCD group on an installed SVMi-20E module.

The digital announcer in the SVMi-20E module supplies two recorded announcements to callers in a queue. The first announcement is played only once, the second announcement will repeat for as long as the caller is in queue.

This type of UCD group has the following advantages: a) No external device need be installed to provide an announcement. b) Multiple callers can hear the announcement(s) simultaneously. c) Callers hearing the announcement will be transferred to a free

UCD group member(agent) as soon as the agent becomes available.

Samsung Business Communications

2-170

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

No

0

Option

TYPE (contd)

1 RING MODE

Description d) The callers place in queue is always maintained.

Additional programming for this type of UCD group is in MMC

607. There is a maximum of 20 UCD groups available on a system due to availability of system resources.

3 AA: This is used to group a number of AA ports. An Auto Attendant

(AA) module must be installed in the system to do this.

4 BI-VMS: This is the voice mail group for the Built-In Voice Mail module.

5 MESSAGE: Used to group a number of extensions to serve as a message desk or message group. When one of the stations in this type of group leaves a message to another station the messaged station will return the message to the message group so any member can answer the call. If a station is a member of more than one message group, then any message indications made by that station would be for the first numerical message group they are a member of. It is not recommended to program stations in to multiple station groups.

6 S0 STN GRP: This is used to group a number of S0 stations for a video conference.

7. VMSUCD GRP: This is used to collect UCD queuing prompts from the SVMi-20. The group members will be the VM ports.

Each group can have one of the following ring modes. This will decide how calls are placed to the group.

0 SEQUENTIAL: The stations listed as ‘members’ (see below) will be called on a ‘first available’ basis. Calls will first go to the first member; if the first member is busy, calls will go to the second member; if the second member is busy, calls will go to the third member, and so on. This type of group is useful for placing the bulk of the incoming calls with a selected individual, and other members only getting the calls when that member is busy. The number of members allowed for a sequential group is 48.

1 DISTRIBUTED: The first call will go to the first member, the second call will go to the second member, the third call will go to the third member. This type of group is useful for evenly distributing the call among all group members. The number of members allowed for a distributed group is 48.

2 UNCONDITIONAL: Calls are placed to all group members simultaneously.

This reduces the number of members of the groups to 32. If a group member is busy, they can receive off-hook ring if defined in MMC

300. This ring mode option is not available for UCD or VMAA groups.

The SGR INC BUSY option is not available for unconditional ring mode.

Samsung Business Communications

2-171

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

No Option Description

2

4

5

6

7

9

OVERFLOW

3 GROUP

TRANSFER

NEXT PORT

This is the timer value that will cause unanswered calls to a group to begin also ringing the NEXT PORT (see below) after this timer has elapsed. If set to 000, no overflow will take place.

This is a timer that will determine how long Trunk Line calls transferred to the group will ring at the group before recalling. If set to 000, no recall will take place.

This is the station or group number that callers will also ring at if the OVER-

FLOW feature has been programmed. The OVERFLOW DESTINATION can be defined as:

1 COMMON BELL There is a common bell port on each MIS module.

2 RING OVER PAGE The ROP port can be defined as the NEXT port.

3 STATION OR STATION GROUP. Any station or station group can be defined as the NEXT port.

MEMBER

NEXT HUNT

List all members that are to be in the group. Up to 48 members for the system are allowed in each group, but stations can be assigned to multiple station groups

The length of time a call will ring at a station before it hunts to the next group member.

GROUP BUSY When this option is set to ON, a busy signal will be sent to the caller if all group members are busy. When this option is set to OFF, the ring back tone is sent to the caller even if all group members are busy. UCD is an exception to this rule. This option only works when MMC 210 SGR

INC BUSY is set to OFF. When MMC 210 SGR INC BUSY is set to ON, all station groups will follow this setting.

ANS

AUTO If set ON, stations will Auto Answer calls to the group (when ring type is

DISTRIBUTED or SEQUENTIAL).

ALL OUT NEXT If set ON, will go to the next port without waiting for the overflow timer if all members of the group are logged out.

Calls to a group do not follow the call forwarding instructions of any station in the group.

Samsung Business Communications

2-172

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

CONDITIONS y y

A station can be assigned to all station groups. A station group can normally accommodate up to 99 members, but only up to 32 members if the RING MODE is UN-

CONDITIONAL.

To enable off-hook ring for incoming calls to busy members, set OFFHOOK RING in

MMC 300, CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER STATION, to ON. Even in this case, however, the off-hook ring is enabled only when the RING MODE is UNCONDITIONAL.

DEFAULT DATA

NORMAL GROUP

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 601.

Display shows:

2. Dial group number (e.g., 505)

OR

Press Volume button to select group and

Press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Dial feature option number (0-7, e.g., 0)

OR

Press Volume button to scroll options and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. DIAL group type (e.g., 1)

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Left Soft button to move cursor to TYPE.

5. Dial feature option number (0-6, e.g., 1)

OR

Press Volume button to scroll options and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

6. Dial ring option (0-2, e.g., 0)

OR

Press Volume button to make selection.

Press Left Soft button to move cursor back to RING or press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

[501] STN.GROUP

TYPE:NORMAL GRP

[505] STN.GROUP

TYPE:NORMAL GRP

[505] STN GROUP

TYPE:VMAA GROUP

[505] STN GROUP

TYPE:VMAA GROUP

[505] STN GROUP

RING:DISTRIBUTE

[505] STN GROUP

RING:SEQUENTIAL

Samsung Business Communications

2-173

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming

7. Dial next feature option and continue.

OR

Press Volume button to select option and press Right Soft button.

OR

Press Left Soft button to return to step 2.

8. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 203

MMC 204

ASSIGN UA DEVICE

COMMON BELL CONTROL

OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[505] STN GROUP

RING:SEQUENTIAL

Samsung Business Communications

2-174

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[602] STATION GROUP NAME

Allows the system administrator or technician to enter a name up to 11 characters to identify an individual station group.

ENTERING CHARACTERS

Refer to ENTERING CHARACTERS in MMC 104, STATION NAME.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 602.

Display shows:

2. Dial group number (e.g., 505)

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Left or Right Soft button to move cursor.

[500] SGR NAME

[505] SGR NAME

[505] SGR NAME

TELECOMS

4. Press Left or Right Soft button to return to step 2.

OR

Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 104

MMC 404

MMC 601

STATION NAME

TRUNK NAME

ASSIGN STATION GROUP

Samsung Business Communications

2-175

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[603] ASSIGN TRUNK GROUP

Allows the assignment of trunks to a specific trunk group or to several trunk groups. This is useful in the programming of LCR when more than one trunk is to be in several dialling plans. There are two different modes of operation: (1) sequential and (2) distribute. There are 30 programmable trunk groups with up to 99 members per group.

One trunk can appear in more than one trunk group. If necessary, delete the trunk member from other groups to prevent accidental access.

DEFAULT DATA

ALL LOOP/ISDN TRUNKS: 9

ALL TIE TRUNKS: 801

ALL VOIP NETWORKING TRUNKS: 803

ALL VOIP H.323 TRUNKS: 804

ALL VOIP SIP TRUNKS: 805

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 603.

Display shows:

2. Enter valid trunk group (e.g., 9)

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to advance cursor.

3. Press Right Soft button to change mode.

OR

Press Volume button to change mode to member.

4. Press Right Soft button to move cursor to number of member and enter valid member number

(e.g., 05) via dial keypad.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

[9] TRK GROUP

MODE:SEQUENTIAL

[9] TRK GROUP

MODE:SEQUENTIAL

[9] TRK GROUP

MEMBER 01:NONE

[9] TRK GROUP

MEMBER 05:NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-176

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming

5. Enter valid trunk number (e.g., 729)

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to return to step 2.

6. Repeat steps 1-5 to remove trunk from group 9 if necessary.

7. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

LCR PROGRAMMING

MMC 710

MMC 711

MMC 712

MMC 713

LCR DIGIT TABLE

LCR TIME TABLE

LCR ROUTE TABLE

LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE

VoIP PROGRAMMING

MMC 832

MMC 833

VoIP ACCESS CODE

VoIP IP TABLE

OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[9] TRK GROUP

MEMBER 01:729

Samsung Business Communications

2-177

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[604] ASSIGN STATION TO PAGE ZONE

Allows the technician to assign a phone to any of the five internal paging zones. Each page zone can have up to 99 members. A phone may be assigned to more than one zone. Page zone (*) will page all external page zones as well as all phones that are members of page zone 0.

DEFAULT DATA

NO STATIONS ASSIGNED

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 604.

Display shows:

2. Enter the page zone number (0-4, e.g., 3)

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter index number (e.g., 05) via dial keypad.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. Enter station number (e.g., 205) via dial keypad.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

INT.PAGE ZONE(0)

MEMBER 01:NONE

INT.PAGE ZONE(3)

MEMBER 01:NONE

INT.PAGE ZONE(3)

MEMBER 05:NONE

INT.PAGE ZONE(3)

MEMBER 05:205

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-178

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[605] ASSIGN EXTERNAL PAGE ZONE

Determines which relays will close when one of the four external page zones is accessed.

The OfficeServ 7400 system must be equipped with an MIS module to allow external paging.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 605.

Display shows first page zone:

2. Dial page zone number (e.g., 6)

OR

Use Volume button to select desired page zone numbers and press Right Soft button to move the cursor.

3. Dial member number (e.g., 3)

OR

Use Volume button to select member numbers and press Right Soft button to move the cursor.

OR

Press Left Soft button to return to step 2.

4. Dial relay number via dial keypad (e.g., 3751) and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

OR

Press Left Soft button to return to step 3 above.

5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

EXT. PAGE ZONE(5)

MEMBER 1 :NONE

EXT. PAGE ZONE(6)

MEMBER 1 :NONE

EXT. PAGE ZONE(6)

MEMBER 3 :NONE

EXT. PAGE ZONE(6)

MEMBER 3 :3751

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-179

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[606] ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK

Provides a means of adding or deleting speed dial blocks to the system or an individual phone. With the ability to delete a block or blocks of speed dial, it will not be necessary to waste these on such items as voice mail, DPIMs or stations that do not require the ability to use speed dial. The Free List will show how many bins are left to be assigned.

A library of up to 2500 speed dial numbers may be allocated as needed. The system list can have up to 500 numbers (or 950 numbers if set in MMC 861 SYSTEM OPTIONS) and each station can have up to 50 numbers. Speed dial numbers are assigned in blocks of 10.

Each speed number may contain up to 24 digits.

DEFAULT DATA

SYSTEM: 200 ENTRIES

STATIONS: 1 BLOCK ASSIGNED

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 606.

Display shows:

2. Press Right Soft button to advance to next line.

OR

You can view BUSY LIST using Volume button.

3. Make a selection of SYSTEM or EXT using Volume button and press Right Soft button to advance cursor.

4. Enter desired extension number via dial keypad.

(e.g., 205)

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to advance cursor.

FREE LIST:20

SYSTEM:20

FREE LIST:20

SYSTEM:20

BUSY LIST:180

SYSTEM:20

FREE LIST:20

EXT201:1

FREE LIST:20

EXT205:1

Samsung Business Communications

2-180

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

5. Enter valid number for bins.

(e.g., 0-5 for EXT or 00-50 for SYSTEM)

OR

Press Volume button to make selection.

OR

Press Hold button to delete bin(s).

6. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 105

MMC 106

MMC 705

MMC 706

STATION SPEED DIAL

STATION SPEED DIAL NAME

ASSIGN SYSTEM SPEED DIAL

SYSTEM SPEED DIAL BY NAME

FREE LIST:20

EXT205:5

Samsung Business Communications

2-181

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[607] UCD OPTIONS

Sets up UCD options when an AA module has been installed. MMC 601 must have already been used to define a UCD group with an overflow destination of an AA port or group.

(A group is preferred over a port because a group allows multiple paths into the AA module and therefore has greater traffic handling capabilities.) When the group overflow timer in

MMC 601 expires, the caller will be routed to the AA module. It is here that the caller is played the UCD ‘FIRST MESSAGE’ and ‘SECOND MESSAGE’ while in queue. This will continue until an agent becomes free or the caller is transferred to a final destination.

The following program options apply:

No Option Description

00 FIRST MESSAGE After the caller has overflowed from the UCD group, the first message will immediately play.

This message will only be played once for the caller.

01 SECOND MESSAGE If no agent has become free after the UCD recall time(see UCD

Recall Time), the caller will be played the second message.

This message will be repeated for as long as the caller is in queue, at an interval specified in the UCD Recall timer below.

02 EXIT CODE

03 RETRY COUNT

While the caller is hearing a message (but not during MOH), the caller may dial the DTMF digit specified here and be transferred immediately to the final destination (see Final Destination).

The exit code is optional and does not need to be used. If used, the first and second messages may be modified to provide instructions on its use.

The UCD program is designed to route a caller to a ‘final destination’ after a programmable number of ‘loops’ through the UCD message. The range of this counter is 0 to 99. 00 means that there is no retry counter and the caller will remain in the UCD queue until answered. Any non zero value will route a caller through the UCD loop that many times before going to the final destination. The UCD will route calls to the final destination immediately if all members of the group are either out of group or in

DND.

Example: If this counter is set to 02, callers reaching a busy group will hear the first UCD message, be placed on hold, hear the second UCD message, be placed on hold, and finally hear the second message again before being transferred to the final destination.

Samsung Business Communications

2-182

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

No Option Description

04 FINAL DESTINATION This is the final destination for the caller if not answered by a

UCD agent.

This destination is only reached if (a) the caller dials an exit digit during a message or (b) the retry count has expired. The final destination can be a station number, a group number, a disconnect or another plan. Plans are entered by pressing button ‘A’ plus two digits 01-12. A disconnect is entered as a destination of

NONE (Hold button).

If the final destination is a voice mail port, the port will receive a

FWD from UCD group integration message. The final destination will forward or overflow.

If the forward to destination is a voice mail port the port will receive FWD from UCD group integration message. If the final destination is not forwarded, the call will ring or camp on to the final destination indefinitely.

To ensure that you do not get a situation where all the call buttons are busy on the final destination it is advisable to make the final destination a group (even if the group has only one station in it.)

05 RING NEXT TIME This timer must be shorter than the overflow timer in MMC 601.

If a higher value is entered, the display will show invalid entry. In the case where a UCD group has the ring next timer set at 000, an unanswered call will rotate evenly among all agents until it is answered. The UCD greetings will be heard during this routing process, but can be removed by defining the UCD messages in

MMC 607 as unrecorded message numbers. This will simulate a circular hunt group.

06 UCD RECALL TIME

07 MOH SOURCE

08 WRAP-UP TIME

After a caller has heard a UCD announcement, they will be placed on hold until an agent becomes available or the UCD recall timer expires. When the UCD recall timer expires, the caller will again hear the UCD announcement. The range is

00-99. The default is 10.

This option determines what Music-On-Hold source callers will be connected to between messages.

This option will make a UCD agent unavailable to receive additional UCD calls after hanging up from the last one. This is to allow agents to complete work associated with the previous call before the next call begins ringing. The range is 000-250. The default is 010.

Samsung Business Communications

2-183

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

No Option Description

09 AUTO LOG OUT

10 ALLOUTÆFINAL

This YES/NO option determines if a station will automatically log out of the UCD group when the RING NEXT timer expires.

This setting will be ignored if the RING NEXT timer is set to 000.

This YES/NO option determines if calls forward to the UCD final destination when all stations are logged out of the UCD group.

If no UCD final destination is assigned then the call will disconnect.

11 AGENT PIN NO This YES/NO option determines if an agent is required to enter an Agent ID when logging on to this group. The Agent ID can be entered in MMC 717.

12 GROUP BUSY NEXT This YES/NO option determines if all agents are busy, specifies whether the next port is called immediately during overflow time.

DEFAULT DATA

FIRST MSG: 61

SECOND MSG: 62

EXIT CODE: NONE

RETRY COUNT: 03

FINAL DEST: 500

RING NEXT: 30 SEC

UCD RECALL: 10 SEC

MOH SOURCE: NONE

WRAP-UP: 10 SEC

AUTO LOG OUT: ON

ALL OUT TO FINAL: OFF

AGENT PIN NO: OFF

GROUP BUSY NEXT: OFF

Samsung Business Communications

2-184

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 607.

Display shows:

2. Press Volume button to select UCD group or dial group number.

OR

Press Left Soft button to position cursor under message number and enter new message.

OR

Press Right Soft button and advance to next option using the Volume buttons to select an option.

3. Press Right Soft button and advance to next option.

Use the Volume buttons to make a selection.

OR

Make a selection using the dial keypad.

4. Press Left Soft button to enter the selection and to return to step 1.

OR

Press Right Soft button to return to step 3.

5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

[530] UCD OPTION

FIRST MSG :61

[542] UCD OPTION

FIRST MSG :61

[530] UCD OPTION

FIRST MSG :25

[530] UCD GROUP

UCD RECALL:10 SEC

[530] UCD OPTION

UCD RECALL:10 SEC

[530] UCD OPTION

EXIT CODE :NONE

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 601 ASSIGN STATION GROUP

Samsung Business Communications

2-185

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[608] ASSIGN REVIEW BLOCK

Provides a means of adding or deleting CID review blocks to an individual phone. With the ability to delete a block or blocks of CID review, it will not be necessary to waste these on items such as voice mail and DPIMs or phones that do not have displays. The free list will show how many bins are left to be assigned. The system has 2500 total bins. Each phone may be assigned a maximum of 50 bins.

DEFAULT DATA

PHONES: 10 BINS

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 608.

Display shows first station:

2. Enter desired EXT number (e.g., 205)

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance cursor.

3. Enter valid number for bins (e.g., 50)

OR

Press Volume button to make selection.

OR

Press Hold button to delete bin(s).

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

[201] REVIEW BLK

10:0060 FREE

[205] REVW BLOCK

10:0060 FREE

[205] REVW BLOCK

50:0010 FREE

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 119

MMC 312

MMC 725

CALLER ID DISPLAY

ALLOW CALLER ID

SMDR OPTIONS

Samsung Business Communications

2-186

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[609] CALL LOG BLOCK

Provides a means of adding or deleting Call Log blocks for an individual phone. With the ability to delete blocks it will not be necessary to waste these on items such as voice mail and DPIMs or phones that do not have displays. The free list will show how many bins are left to be assigned. The system has 2500 total bins. Each phone may be assigned a maximum of 50 bins.

DEFAULT DATA

PHONES: 10 BINS

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 609.

Display shows first station:

2. Enter desired EXT number (e.g., 205)

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance cursor.

3. Enter valid number for bins (e.g., 50)

OR

Press Volume button to make selection.

OR

Press Hold button to delete bin(s).

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

[201] LOG BLOCK

10:0070 FREE

[205] LOG BLOCK

10:0070 FREE

[205] LOG BLOCK

50:0030 FREE

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-187

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[611] ALLOW TEXT MESSAGING

This program allows stations to send text messages to other stations if they are busy or during an OHVA. Up to 100 stations can be allowed text messaging.

DEFAULT DATA y NOT USED (no text messaging allowed) y Large LCD keysets are automatically set to USED (text messaging allowed)

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 611.

Display shows:

2. Enter the number of a station.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance cursor.

[201] TMSG STN

NOT USED:100 FREE

[202] TMSG STN

NOT USED:100 FREE

3. Specify whether text messaging will be used or not.

[202] TMSG STN

USED

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 117 EDIT TEXT MESSAGE

Samsung Business Communications

2-188

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[612] ALLOW GROUP CONFERENCE

This program allows a station to use the Group Conference call feature. Up to 100 stations can be allowed this feature. Each allowed station can have up to five pre-programmed conference groups.

CONDITIONS

This feature is only for Large LCD phones and WIP-5000M mobile phone.

DEFAULT DATA

Large LCD phones are automatically set to allow this feature (USED).

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 612.

Display shows:

2. Enter the number of a station.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance cursor.

3. Specify whether Group Conference feature can be used or not.

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

[201] CONF STN

NOT USED:100 FREE

[202] CONF STN

NOT USED :100 FREE

[205] CONF STN

USED

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 118 CONFERENCE GROUP

Samsung Business Communications

2-189

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[614] STATION/TRUNK USE GROUP

This program allows you to assign stations to station use groups and trunks to trunk use groups. This is useful if you want to restrict calling between stations, outgoing calls through a trunk lines, or call answering.

CONDITIONS

Station use groups are numbered from 001 to 300, and trunk use groups from 301 to 500.

DEFAULT DATA

ALL STATIONS: 001

ALL TRUNKS: 301

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 614.

Display shows first station:

2. Enter 0 if you want to set a station group.

Enter 1 if user want to set a trunk group.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to advance cursor.

3. Enter number of station/trunk.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance cursor.

4. Enter the number of the use group

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance cursor.

5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

STATION GROUP

201 :001

TRUNK GROUP

701 :301

TRUNK GROUP

702 :301

TRUNK GROUP

702 :302

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 304

MMC 317

MMC 428

ASSIGN EXTENSION/TRUNK USE

ASSIGN STATION/STATION USE

ASSIGN TRUNK/TRUNK USE

Samsung Business Communications

2-190

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[615] MGI GROUP

This program assigns designated MGI ports to specific services. This allows ‘grading’ of

MGI modules for traffic conditions. The MGI ports can be segregated into groups. Any entries made here may be ineffective if conflicting entries exist in MMC 616.

No Type Description

0 LOCAL ITP

1 PUB IP ITP

2 VOIP NTWK

3 PUB IP NTWK

4 VOIP TRUNK

5 PUB IP TRK

6 ITP PAGED

This determines what MGI ports can be used with ITP phones across a private IP network

This determines what MGI ports can be used with ITP phones on a public IP network.

This determines what MGI ports can be used for enhanced proprietary

Samsung VoIP networking between OfficeServ 7400 systems across a private IP network.

This determines what MGI ports can be used for enhanced proprietary

Samsung VoIP networking between OfficeServ 7400 systems on a public IP network

This determines what MGI ports can be used as industry-standard

H.323 or SIP VoIP trunks for communications across a private network

This determines what MGI ports can be used as industry-standard

H.323 or SIP VoIP trunks for communications on a public network

This determines what MGI ports can be used with station page to ITP phones across a private IP network

The MGI ports have two selection modes: Sequential or Distributed. The members for each selection are the actual ports on the MGI module.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 615.

Display shows the first available option:

2. Press Volume button to select an user type.

Press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Press Volume button to select an option and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. Press Volume button to select and press Right

Soft button to store data and return to step 1.

USER: LOCAL ITP

MODE:SEQUENTIAL

USER: LOCAL ITP

MODE:SEQUENTIAL

USER: LOCAL ITP

MODE:SEQUENTIAL

USER: LOCAL ITP

MODE:SEQUENTIAL

Samsung Business Communications

2-191

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming

5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications

2-192

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[616] MGI USER

This program selects which specific MGI ports will be dedicated on a per-port basis for IP station/trunk devices. If this MMC is not used, allocation of MGI ports will be controlled by MMC 615. By defining dedicated MGI port usage, the IP station/trunk selected will always use the port programmed. MGI ports can be assigned for digital stations

(2XX~2XXX), private and public ITP stations (32XX), VoIP Networking trunks (83XX),

H.323 trunks (84XX), SIP trunks (85XX) and MGI facsimile. Only one assignment per

MGI port is permitted. Any entries made here will override entries made in MMC 615.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 616.

Display shows the first available option:

2. Enter MGI dial number.

OR

Press Volume button to select an MGI port and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter MGI user dial number.

OR

Press Volume button to select an MGI user and press Right Soft button to store and move cursor.

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

[3801] MGI USER

NONE

[3801] MGI USER

NONE

[3801] MGI USER

NONE

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-193

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[700] COPY COS CONTENTS

This MMC allows the technician to duplicate classes of service.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

PROGRAM BUTTONS

‘F’ KEY Used to advance to MMC 701

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 700.

Display shows:

2. Dial selected COS to copy (e.g., 05)

OR

Press Volume button to select COS and press.

Right Soft button to move cursor and advance to next step.

3. Dial target COS (e.g., 06)

OR

Press Volume button to select COS and press

Right Soft button to move cursor back to step 2.

4. Press F key to advance MMC 701 and press

Right Soft to advance cursor.

5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

COPY COS ITEMS

COS01

ÆCOS01

COPY COS ITEMS

COS05

ÆCOS01

COPY COS ITEMS

COS05

ÆCOS06

COS CONTENTS(06)

TOLL LEVEL:A

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS

Samsung Business Communications

2-194

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[701] ASSIGN COS CONTENTS

Similar to MMC 700 but does not allow a copy command. This MMC is primarily used for creating a new class of service (COS). A maximum of 30 classes of service are allowed.

NOTE: If the ‘unsupervised conference’ feature is enabled, a programmed CONF key must be available on phones to allow re-entry into a conference call.

This MMC is divided into five categories.

No Category Description

TOLL

6

7

4

5

2

3

0

1

E

F

G

H

A

B

C

D

COS

00 AA CALER

LEVEL

Follow toll class A (Unrestricted)

Follow toll class B in MMC 702, 703

Follow toll class C in MMC 702, 703

Follow toll class D in MMC 702, 703

Follow toll class E in MMC 702, 703

Follow toll class F in MMC 702, 703

Follow toll class G in MMC 702, 703

Follow toll class H (All restricted)

Default

YES

Description

Auto answer control by caller

01 ABSENCE YES Absence

02 ALM CLR YES Alarm Clear

03 AUTO RDL YES Retry on busy

04 CALLBACK YES Callback

05 CLIP ABN

06 CLIP INQ

07 CLIP INV

YES

YES

YES

Caller ID Abandon

Caller ID Inquire

Caller ID Investigate

08 CONFER. YES Conference

09 DALM CLR YES DISA alarm ring clear

10 DIRECT.

11 DISA

12 DND

13 DND FWRD

YES

YES

YES

Allow DISA use

Do Not Disturb

Forward Do Not Disturb

14 DND OVRD

15 DOOR

16 DSS

17 DTS

NO

YES

YES

YES

Do Not Disturb Override

Door ring answer

Direct station select

Direct trunk select

19 ICM EXT FWD YES

(SVM-800)

External call forward

Samsung Business Communications

2-195

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming

No Category

OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

Description

COS Default

20 FEATURE YES

21 FLASH YES

22 FOLLOW-ME YES

23 FORWARD YES

24 FWDTOVMS YES

25 GRP I/O YES

26 HOLD YES

27 HOTLINE YES

Call forward to SVM-800

Group in/out

Hold

Hot line and Off-hook selection

Description

Call forward-follow me

28 INTERCOM YES

30 MESSAGE YES

31 MM PAGE YES

32 NEW CALL YES

33 OHVAED YES

34 OHVAING YES

Message

Meet me page

New call

Receive Off-hook voice announcement

Make Off-hook voice announcement

35 ONEA2 YES

36 OPERATOR YES Call to Operator

38 OVERRIDE NO

39 PAGE 0 YES

40 PAGE 1

41 PAGE 2

YES

YES

42 PAGE 3

43 PAGE 4

YES

YES

44 PAGE 5

45 PAGE 6

46 PAGE 7

47 PAGE 8

48 PAGE 9

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

49 PAGE * YES

51 PICKUP YES

52 PRB YES

Barge-In

Page zone 0 Paging

Page zone 1 Paging

Page zone 2 Paging

Page zone 3 Paging

Page zone 4 Paging

Page zone 5 Paging

Page zone 6 Paging

Page zone 7 Paging

Page zone 8 Paging

Page zone 9 Paging

Page zone * Paging

Privacy Release and Bridge

Samsung Business Communications

2-196

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

No Category

53

54

55 SECURE YES

56 SET RLOC NO

57 SSPD TOL YES

58 STN LOCK YES

59 SYS SPD YES

60 TRK AREC NO

61

COS

REM. HOLD YES

RNG PLAN

TRK EHLD

Description

Default

YES

YES

Description

Remote Hold

Ring Mode Change

Set Relocation

System Speed dial toll check

Station Lock

System Speed dial

Trunk call automatic record

(SVM-800)

Trunk call exclusive hold

63 VM AREC

64 VM AME

NO

NO

65 VM REC NO

66 VMS PSWD NO

67 VMS REC NO

STN GROUP 01-80 YES

GROUP

TRK GROUP 01-30 YES

GROUP

BIVMS STN (SVMi).

DEFAULT DATA

SEE DESCRIPTION

BIVMS STN 01-16 YES

Auto Record (SVMi)

Answer Machine Emulation

(SVMi)

Call Record (SVMi)

VMS password (SVM-800)

VMS Call Record (SVM-800)

Station group 01~80 calling

Trunk group 01~30 calling

SVMi port 01~16 calling

Samsung Business Communications

2-197

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 701.

Display shows:

2. Dial COS (e.g., 06)

OR

Press Volume button to select COS number and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Dial COS contents categories.

(e.g., 1 for Usable Features)

OR

Press Volume button to select COS categories and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. Dial COS usable feature option (e.g., 12)

OR

Press Volume button to select option and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

5. Dial 0 for NO or 1 for YES.

OR

Press Volume button to select option and press Right Soft button to return to step 4.

6. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

COS CONTENTS(01)

TOLL LEVEL:A

COS CONTENTS(06)

TOLL LEVEL:A

COS CONTENTS(06)

00:AA CALER :YES

COS CONTENTS(06)

12:DND :YES

COS CONTENTS(06)

12:DND :NO

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 700 COPY COS CONTENTS

Samsung Business Communications

2-198

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[702] TOLL DENY TABLE

Provides a way to make toll restriction (call barring) very easy and flexible. There are 500 entries allowed in the deny table and each entry index can be assigned to a class of service.

Each index can have up to 12 digits. With the use of wild cards (MMC 704, Assign Wild

Character), more flexibility can be built into toll restriction. Wild cards can be used repeatedly in the dial string, limited only to what is allowed or denied in MMC 704.

Six toll levels, B to G, are programmable. Toll level A is set as ‘unrestricted’ by default and toll level H is set as ‘in-house only’ by default.

DEFAULT DATA

ALL ENTRIES ARE SET TO 0

PROGRAM BUTTONS

A

B

C

Used to enter wild card X

Used to enter wild card Y

Used to enter wild card Z

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 702.

Display shows:

2. Dial index number (e.g., 005)

OR

Press Volume button to select index and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter toll pattern via dial keypad (e.g., 212)

OR

Enter wild card (e.g., 21X) and press Right Soft button to move cursor to COS options.

4. Press Volume button to move cursor along line until under toll class mark.(e.g., E).

Enter a 1 for “Yes” or 0 for “No”.

Press Right Soft button to store and return to step 1

OR

Press Left Soft button to return to step 2.

DENY(001):BCDEFG

:000000

DENY(005):BCDEFG

:000000

DENY(005):BCDEFG

212 :000000

DENY(005):BCDEFG

21X :000000

DENY(001):BCDEFG

212 :000100

Samsung Business Communications

2-199

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming

5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 703

MMC 704

TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE

ASSIGN WILD CHARACTER

OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications

2-200

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[703] TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE

Provides a way to make toll restriction very easy and flexible. There are 500 allowable entries in the allow table and each entry index can be assigned to a class of service. Each index can have up to 12 digits. With the use of wild cards (MMC 704, Assign Wild Character), more flexibility can be built into toll restriction. Six toll levels, B to G, are programmable. Toll level A is set as ‘unrestricted’ by default, and toll level H is set as ‘in-house only’ by default.

DEFAULT DATA

ALL ENTRIES ARE SET TO 0

PROGRAM BUTTONS

A

B

C

Used to enter wild card X

Used to enter wild card Y

Used to enter wild card Z

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 702.

Display shows:

2. Dial index number (e.g., 005)

OR

Press Volume button to select index and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter toll pattern via dial pad.(e.g., 202)

OR

Enter wild card (e.g., 20X) and press Right Soft button to move cursor to COS options.

4. Press Volume button to move cursor along line until under toll class mark.(e.g., E).

Enter a 1 for “Yes” or 0 for “No”.

Press Right Soft button to store and return to step 1.

OR

Press Left Soft button to return to step 2.

5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

ALOW(001):BCDEFG

:000000

ALOW(005):BCDEFG

:000000

ALOW(005):BCDEFG

202 :000000

ALOW(005):BCDEFG

20X :000000

ALOW(001):BCDEFG

202 :000100

Samsung Business Communications

2-201

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 702

MMC 704

TOLL DENY TABLE

ASSIGN WILD CHARACTER

OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications

2-202

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[704] ASSIGN WILD CHARACTER

Provides flexibility to toll restriction (call barring) when a specific numbering plan is desired. There are only three entry tables but more than one digit can be assigned per table if needed.

DEFAULT DATA

X ENTRIES SET TO 1

Y AND Z ENTRIES SET TO 0

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 704.

Display shows:

2. Press Volume button to select X, Y, or Z (e.g., Z) and press Right Soft button to advance cursor to

:0123456789* #

X:111111111111

:0123456789* #

Z:000000000000

3. Press Volume button to move cursor to option digit desired (e.g., 5) and enter 1 (put under other

digits as required)

Press Left Soft button to return to step 2.

OR

Press Right Soft button to return to step 1.

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

:0123456789* #

Z:000001000000

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 702

MMC 703

TOLL DENY TABLE

TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE

Samsung Business Communications

2-203

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[705] ASSIGN SYSTEM SPEED DIAL

Enables the assignment of system speed dialling numbers. There are up to 500 entries available for programming (or 950 entries if set in MMC 861 SYSTEM OPTIONS). Each speed dial number consists of a trunk or trunk group access code followed by a separator and up to 24 digits to be dialled. These dialled digits may consist of 0-9, and #. If the system recognizes a valid trunk or trunk group access number, it will automatically insert the separator.

NOTE: If 500 entries are allowed, the bin numbers are 500-999; if 950 entries are allowed, the bin numbers are 050-999.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

PROGRAM BUTTONS

B

C

D

E

F

ANS/RLS

Used to insert a flash code ‘F’

Used to insert a pause code ‘P’

Used to insert a pulse/tone conversion code ‘C’

Used to mask/unmask following digits-shows as ‘[’ or ‘]’

Used to enter name for speed dial bin (see MMC 706)

Used to save the speed dial number and name to the CID translation table (MMC 728).

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 705.

Display shows:

2. Dial speed index desired (e.g., 505)

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter access code (e.g., 9) plus the phone number up to 24 digits (digits will scroll under)

and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

4. Press F key to toggle to MMC 706 step 3 to enter name.

SYS SPEED DIAL

500:

SYS SPEED DIAL

505:

SYS SPEED DIAL

505:9–121223456789

SYS SPEED NAME

505:

Samsung Business Communications

2-204

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

5. If you want to save the speed dial number and name to the CID translation table (MMC 728),

press the ANS/RLS button and dial 1 for YES.

(The speed dial name must exist)

6. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 606

MMC 706

ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK

SYSTEM SPEED DIAL BY NAME

SYS SPEED DIAL

ADD CLI XLT ?NO

Samsung Business Communications

2-205

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[706] SYSTEM SPEED DIAL BY NAME

Allows a name up to 11 characters to be entered for each system speed dial location.

This name enables the speed dial number to be located when using the directory dial feature.

ENTERING CHARACTERS

Refer to ENTERING CHARACTERS in MMC 104, STATION NAME.

DEFAULT DATA

NO NAMES

PROGRAM BUTTONS

ANS/RLS Used to save the speed dial number and name to the CID translation table (MMC 728).

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 706.

Display shows:

2. Dial system speed entry number (e.g., 505)

OR

Press Volume button to select entry number and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter name using dial keypad and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

OR

Press the F key to return to MMC 705, step 3.

4. If you want to save the speed dial number and name data to the CLI translation table (MMC 728),

press ANS/RLS button and dial 1 for YES.

(The speed dial number must exist)

SYS SPEED NAME

500:

SYS SPEED NAME

505:

SYS SPEED NAME

505:TELECOMS

SYS SPEED DIAL

505:

SYS SPEED NAME

ADD CLI XLT ?NO

Samsung Business Communications

2-206

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

5. Press Right Soft button to return to step 2 above.

OR

Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 606

MMC 705

ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK

ASSIGN SYSTEM SPEED DIAL

Samsung Business Communications

2-207

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[707] AUTHORIZATION CODE

Enables the authorization feature on a per-class of service selection. There are 500 available entries. Authorization codes must be 4-10 digits long.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 707.

Display shows:

2. Dial code index number.(e.g., 005)

OR

Press Volume button to selected index number and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter authorization code (minimum of four digits and a maximum of 10 digits) via dial keypad

(e.g., 1234567890) and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. Enter class of service number 01-30 (e.g., 05)

OR

Press Volume button to select COS and press Right

Soft button to select and return to step 2.

5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

AUTHOR.CODE(001)

C:01

AUTHOR.CODE(005)

C:01

AUTHOR.CODE(005)

1234567890 C:01

AUTHOR.CODE(005)

1234567890 C:05

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 305

MMC 701

ASSIGN FORCED CODE

ASSIGN COS CONTENTS

Samsung Business Communications

2-208

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[708] ACCOUNT CODE

Enables the account code entry feature. There are 999 available entries.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 708.

Display shows:

2. Dial code index number (e.g., 005)

OR

Press Volume button to selected index number and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter account code (maximum 12 digits) via dial keypad (e.g., 1234) and press Right Soft button

to move cursor back to step 2.

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

ACCOUNT CODE

001:

ACCOUNT CODE

005:

ACCOUNT CODE

005:1234

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 305 ASSIGN FORCED CODE

Samsung Business Communications

2-209

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[709] TOLL PASS CODE/SPECIAL CODE TABLE

This MMC provides a means to program trunk code tables.

No Special Code Description

0

1

PBX CODE

SPECIAL CODE

This table contains up to five entries and is used to identify the trunk access codes needed for toll restriction when the system is used with either a PBX or a CENTREX-supplied dial tone. Toll restriction will only be applied on trunks flagged as PBX in MMC

401 if a trunk access code entered in this table is dialled. Toll restriction will be applied to the digits following the trunk access code.

This table identifies the special feature codes used to activate central office custom-calling features such as CID Block and

Call Waiting Disable. The special feature codes can be used on a per-call basis without affecting LCR or toll restriction programming. There is a maximum of 10 entries available, each of which may be up to four digits long.

2 TOLL OVERRIDE This table of eight entries is used to identify the numbers that will bypass all dialling restrictions. This bypass includes toll restriction, trunk access and forced authorization or account codes. Each entry in the table can be up to 14 digits long.

3 OVRD USE TRK GRP This entry designates the trunk group that toll override calls will access.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 709.

Display shows:

2. Select PBX, SPECIAL CODE, TOLL OVERRIDE or OVRD USE TRK GRP.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter index number (e.g., 3)

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

PBX ACCESS CODE

1:

TOLL OVERRIDE

1:

TOLL OVERRIDE

3:_

Samsung Business Communications

2-210

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

4. Enter via dial keypad the desired access / feature code (e.g., 911)

Press Right Soft button to enter and return to step 3 and enter more entries.

5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

TOLL OVERRIDE

3:911

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 401

MMC 702

MMC 703

MMC 305

TRUNK LINE/PBX LINE

TOLL DENY TABLE

TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE

ASSIGN FORCED CODE

TOLL RESTRICTION

MMC 702

MMC 703

MMC 704

TOLL DENY TABLE

TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE

ASSIGN WILD CHARACTER

Samsung Business Communications

2-211

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[710] LCR DIGIT TABLE

The LCR DIGIT TABLE contains all numerical digits for the completion of outgoing call placement. This table works in conjunction with LCR ROUTE TABLE, LCR TIME TA-

BLE and LCR MODIFY DIGITS TABLE. There is a maximum 2000 entries with a digit string length of 10 numerical digits. This system automatically maintains entered digit strings in numerical order. The characters * and # are also accepted for use with feature codes.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 710.

Display shows:

2. Dial LCR entry (e.g., 0005)

OR

Press Volume button to select entry and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter LCR digit string via the dial keypad and press Right Soft button.

OR

Press Left Soft button to return to step 1.

4. Enter digit length (max. 31)

Cursor will move to RT (route selection)

5. Enter RT (01-32)

Valid entry will return you to step 1.

6. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 712 LCR ROUTE TABLE

LCR DIGIT (0001)

DIGIT:

LCR DIGIT (0005)

DIGIT:_

LCR DIGIT (0005)

DIGIT:305426

LCR DIGIT (0005)

LENGTH:10 RT:01

LCR DIGIT (0005)

LENGTH:10 RT:01

Samsung Business Communications

2-212

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[711] LCR TIME TABLE

This table, through the LCR ROUTES, allows calls placed at any given time of day to use the least cost trunk route that is available. When LCR ROUTE ADVANCE is allowed, it is possible for calls to be placed on more expensive trunks on any given time of day. There are four possible time entries per day; the start time of the next time period is the end time of the previous time period.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 711.

Display shows:

2. Dial day of week (SUN-SAT, e.g., WED)

OR

Press Volume button to make day selection and press Right Soft button.

3. Dial time band (A-D, e.g., B)

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button.

4. Dial time via keypad (24-hour format, e.g., 0800)

Cursor moves to LCRT (see MMC 712)

5. Dial time table number (1-4)

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button.

6. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

LCR TIME (SUN:A)

HHMM: LCRT:-

LCR TIME (WED:A)

HHMM: LCRT:-

LCR TIME (WED:B)

HHMM: LCRT:-

LCR TIME (WED:B)

HHMM:0800 LCRT:-

LCR TIME (WED:B)

HHMM:0800 LCRT:1

MMC 710

MMC 712

MMC 713

LCR DIGIT TABLE

LCR ROUTE TABLE

LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE

Samsung Business Communications

2-213

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[712] LCR ROUTE TABLE

The LCR ROUTE TABLE is responsible for selecting a specific trunk group in the completion of an outward bound call. This table works in conjunction with LCR DIGIT TABLE,

LCR TIME TABLE, LCR COS TABLE and LCR MODIFIED DIGITS TABLE. After you dial a valid digit string, the system uses the LCR ROUTE TABLE to select a specific predetermined trunk group. There is a maximum of 32 routes available.

If more than one trunk group is available for call completion, the system uses the first designated trunk group and then the succeeding trunk groups. If all trunk groups are busy in a selected route, call queue becomes active and allocates trunks as they become available.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 712.

Display shows:

2. Dial LCR ROUTE table number (e.g., 05)

OR

Press Volume button to selected table and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Dial TIME BAND index number 1-4 (e.g., 2)

OR

Press Volume button to selected index and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. Dial LCR COS number 1-8 (e.g., 4)

OR

Press Volume button to selected COS and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

5. Dial TRUNK GROUP access code (e.g., 801)

OR

Press Volume button to selected access code and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

LCR ROUTE (01:1)

C:1 G:NONE M:---

LCR ROUTE (05:1)

C:1 G:NONE M:---

LCR ROUTE (05:2)

C:1 G:NONE M:---

LCR ROUTE (05:2)

C:4 G:NONE M:---

LCR ROUTE (05:2)

C:4 G:801 M:---

Samsung Business Communications

2-214

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

6. Dial MODIFY DIGITS index number (e.g., 050)

OR

Press Volume button to selected index number and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

OR

Press Right Soft button to skip step and move

cursor to step 2.

7. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 310

MMC 710

MMC 711

MMC 713

LCR CLASS OF SERVICE

LCR DIGIT TABLE

LCR TIME TABLE

LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE

LCR ROUTE (05:2)

C:4 G:801 M:050

LCR ROUTE (05:2)

C:4 G:801 M:---

Samsung Business Communications

2-215

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[713] LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE

This program is sometimes referred to as Outgoing Dial Rules. It enables the system to add or delete a digit string or singular digit if needed to complete a call. With these digits inserted, a long distance call will be placed over a local line using the common carrier network. The characters * and # can also be entered. There are 200 modify digit entries available.

Option Description

NOF DEL DGT

I

A

Number of digits to delete

Insert (before dialling string)

Append (after dialling string)

DIGIT STRING KEY

Insert String + Digit String(delete) + Append String

Max. No. of Digit Entries

15

14

14

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 713.

Display shows:

2. Enter index number (e.g., 005)

OR

Press Volume buttons to make selection and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter number of digits to delete.

OR

Press Right Soft button to skip step and move cursor to next step.

4. Enter digits to be inserted (e.g., 10288)

OR

Press Right Soft button to skip step or to store information and advance to next step.

LCR MODIFY (001)

NOF DEL DGT:00

LCR MODIFY (005)

NOF DEL DGT:00

LCR MODIFY (005)

NOF DEL DGT:01

LCR MODIFY (005)

I:10288_

Samsung Business Communications

2-216

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

5. Enter digits to be appended (e.g., 45678)

OR

Press Right Soft button to skip step or to store information and return to step 2.

6. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 310

MMC 710

MMC 711

MMC 712

LCR CLASS OF SERVICE

LCR DIGIT TABLE

LCR TIME TABLE

LCR ROUTE TABLE

LCR MODIFY (005)

A:_

Samsung Business Communications

2-217

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[714] DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION

Assigns an incoming DID call to a specific ring plan destination. It also provides a call waiting option, if needed, so that a second incoming DID call can be received. The table is also used to define which MOH source a caller to that DID number will hear when placed on hold. A name up to 11 characters can be added to the number. There is a maximum of

999 entries. If there is no matching number on DID service, the call is routed to the operator group.

Option

DGT

MOH SOURCE

PRI

RING PLAN

1: XXX, 2: XXX,

3: XXX, 4: XXX,

5: XXX, 6: XXX

CW

MC

DC

NAME

TONE

CADENCE

Description

Digits to be received from Trunk line (up to 16 digits may be entered).

Allows the technician to select what the calling party will hear if the call is placed on hold. There are four possible music selections.

DID priority option. There are nine priority levels: priority 1 is the highest and priority 9 is the lowest. When calls come into a station group and all group members are busy, the system will assign a priority to the DDI numbers so that calls from a high-priority DDI number will be placed at the front of the group queue. If this option is set to NO, the call held longest in the group queue has the highest priority.

Ring plan and destination during each ring plan. The destination can be a station, station group, trunk or trunk group. If a trunk or trunk group is selected the trunks must be programmed as E & M trunks to allow the received digits to be re-sent. This is referred to as DID Repeat digits over tie line. Entering the character ‘B’ means to repeat the received digits.

Call Waiting Yes/No. (Allows a second DID call to be received.)

The maximum call count. When this is set to 99, the feature will not work. When set to 0, if a call comes in that matches DID digits and DGT field then the system will reject the call. When set between 1 and 98, if a call comes in that matches DID digits and DGT field then the system counts the same DID digits, and if the count is the same or higher than this value, the system sends busy signal to caller.

The number of digits to delete. This is useful with Tandem switching, mixed numbering plans and DID Repeat digits over tie line. Maximum number of digits that can be deleted is 16.

Enter up to 11 characters to identify call. Refer to MMC 104, STATION

NAME, for how to enter the name.

Assigns ring tone to DLI port

Assigns ring cadence to SLT port

Samsung Business Communications

2-218

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

CONDITIONS

If an E&M line is designated as FOLLOW DID TRANS in MMC 416 (ASSIGN E&M /

DID RINGDOWN), calls are terminated according to the station direct dial translation table in MMC 714, DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION.

DEFAULT DATA

INDEX DIGIT MOH PRI 1-6 CW MC DC NAME

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 714.

Display shows:

2. Enter valid index number (e.g., 005) via dial keypad.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter digits to be translated (e.g., 5065) via dial keypad and press Right Soft button to move

cursor.

4. Enter the MOH source for this entry.

OR

Press Volume button to select option and press

Right Soft button to return to step 3 above.

5. Enter priority level via dial keypad.

(1-9 or NO)

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft buttons to advance to next step.

6. Enter station or group number for each Ring Plan destination via dial keypad (e.g., 530)

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to advance to next step.

DID DIGIT (001)

DGT:

DID DIGIT (005)

DGT:

DID DIGIT (005)

DGT:5065

DID DIGIT (005)

MOH:NONE PRI:NO

DID DIGIT (005)

MOH:NONE PRI:NO

DID DIGIT (005)

1:530 2:

Samsung Business Communications

2-219

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

7. Enter call wait option via dial keypad.

(1 for YES, 0 for NO)

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to advance to next step.

8. Enter maximum call count via dial keypad (00-99)

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to advance to next step.

9. Enter number or delete digit via dial keypad (0-16)

O R

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance to next step.

10. Enter the name via dial keypad and press Right

Soft button to return to Step 1.

11. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

DID DIGIT (005)

CW:N MC:99 DC:0

DID DIGIT (005)

CW:N MC:99 DC:0

DID DIGIT (005)

CW:N MC:99 DC:0

DID DIGIT (005)

NAME:

TRUNK PROGRAMMING

Refer to RELATED ITEMS in MMC 411, ASSIGN E1 SIGNAL TYPE.

Samsung Business Communications

2-220

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[715] PROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE

Allows custom messages to be programmed or default messages to be changed.

ENTERING CHARACTERS

Refer to ENTERING CHARACTERS in MMC 104, STATION NAME.

There are 15 messages in the system:

MESSAGES 01-10 are 16-character pre-programmed default messages. Any of them can be changed. MESSAGES 11-15 are 16-character blank messages that can be created.

DEFAULT DATA

TEN PROGRAMMED MESSAGES:

01. IN A MEETING

02. OUT ON A CALL

03. OUT TO LUNCH

04. LEAVE A MESSAGE

05. PAGE ME

06. OUT OF TOWN

07. IN TOMORROW

08. RETURN AFTERNOON

09. ON VACATION

10. GONE HOME

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 715.

Display shows:

2. Enter message number (e.g., 11)

OR

Press Volume button arrow to make selection.

Press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter message via dial keypad (maximum 16 characters)

Use ‘A’ button to toggle upper case/lower case.

Press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 115 SET PROGRAMMED MESSAGE

PGM.MESSAGE (01)

IN A MEETING

PGM.MESSAGE (11)

Blank Message

PGM.MESSAGE (11)

IN MEETING ROOM

Samsung Business Communications

2-221

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[716] UK LCR OPTION

This MMC provides UK LCR options.

No Option Description

0 NETWORK CODE This table provides the network access code when the call is routed to the secondary network. It contains up to 16 entries. Each code has max. 4 digits and the following “use” options (by default, all codes are empty and all “use” options are NONE):

0 NONE No code.

1 CCC The code used with Call Cost Code (CCC).

2 PIN The code used with PIN Code.

3 BOTH The code used with PIN Code and Call Cost

Code.

1

2

PIN CODE

CCC OPTION

This table provides the PIN code when the call is routed to the secondary network. It contains up to four entries and each code has max. 10 digits. (By default, all tables are empty.)

Selects which number is used for Call Cost Code. (Default:

Station Number).

0 STATION NUMBER Station number used for Call

Cost Code.

1 NONE No Call Cost Code.

3 STATION PIN NO. This is assigned to PIN code table number for each station number. (Default: all stations are 1)

DEFAULT DATA

SEE DESCRIPTION

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 716.

Display shows:

2. Enter option number 0-3

OR

Press Volume buttons to select number and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter number 0-16

OR

Press Volume buttons to select number and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

NETWORK CODE

01: USE:NONE

NETWORK CODE

01: USE:NONE

NETWORK CODE

02:_ USE:NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-222

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

4. Enter network access code via dial keypad

5. Enter use option number (0-3)

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to save and return to step 3.

6. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 400

MMC 310

MMC 710

MMC 711

MMC 712

MMC 713

CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TRUNK

LCR CLASS OF SERVICE

LCR DIGIT TABLE

LCR TIME TABLE

LCR ROUTE TABLE

LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE

NETWORK CODE

02:1234 USE:NONE

NETWORK CODE

02:1234 USE:CCC

Samsung Business Communications

2-223

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[717] UCD AGENT ID

This MMC defines UCD agent ID numbers or PIN numbers. These numbers are used to log

UCD agents into the UCD groups. There are 300 available entries and each entry is tied to a specific UCD group. Agent ID codes can be up to four digits long.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 717.

Display shows:

2. Dial code entry number (e.g., 005)

OR

Press Volume buttons to select number and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter ID code via dial keypad (e.g., 1234) and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. Enter group number (e.g., 505)

OR

Press Volume button to select group and press Right Soft button to select and return to step 2.

OR

Select all groups

5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 607 UCD OPTIONS

AGENT PIN (001)

ID: GRP:NONE

AGENT PIN (005)

ID:_ GRP:NONE

AGENT PIN (005)

ID:1234 GRP:NONE

AGENT PIN (005)

ID:1234 GRP:505

Samsung Business Communications

2-224

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[718] MY AREA CODE

This MMC defines the home area code and country code. This information is used for caller ID and ISDN calls in defining the area code on incoming calls. This MMC removes the local area code to allow callback without digit modifications in LCR.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 718.

Display shows:

2. Enter 0 for COUNTRY or 1 for AREA.

OR

Press Volume buttons to make selection and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter area code (maximum 4 digits) via dial keypad

(e.g., 2) and press Right Soft button to move

cursor back to step 2.

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

MY AREA CODE

AREA :

MY AREA CODE

AREA :

MY AREA CODE

AREA :2

RELATED ITEMS

TRUNK PROGRAMMING

Refer to RELATED ITEMS in MMC 411, ASSIGN E1 SIGNAL TYPE

Samsung Business Communications

2-225

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[719] IDLE DISPLAY

This program allows you to enter guidance data to be displayed on large LCD phones.

ENTERING CHARACTERS

Refer to ENTERING CHARACTERS in MMC 104, STATION NAME.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 719.

Display shows:

2. Enter the number of the line on a large LCD phone

(01~12) on which guidance data is to be

displayed.

OR

IDLE DISPLAY (01)

IDLE DISPLAY (02)

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter guidance data via dial keypad and press

IDLE DISPLAY (02)

Right Soft button to save and move to step 2.

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

WELCOME TO ABC

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 120 LARGE LCD OPTIONS

Samsung Business Communications

2-226

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[720] COPY KEY PROGRAMMING

Provides a tool for duplicating key assignments from one phone to another. This can be done on a per-station basis or on all stations, but not on a group of stations. A limitation is that the original and target phones must be of the same type (the same number of buttons).

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 720.

Display shows:

2. Enter the station number to copy to (e.g., 205)

OR

Press Volume buttons to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

OR

Select all stations.

3. Enter station number to copy from (e.g., 203) and cursor returns to step 2.

OR

Press Volume buttons to make selection and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 107

MMC 721

MMC 722

MMC 723

[201] COPY KEY

FROM:NONE

KEY EXTENDER

SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING

STATION KEY PROGRAMMING

SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING

[205] COPY KEY

FROM:NONE

[205] COPY KEY

FROM:203

Samsung Business Communications

2-227

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[721] SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING

Provides a service tool which minimizes the accidental loss of programmable buttons on phones. First the data is saved and then the station can be replaced with another station type or the keys can be reprogrammed to other features. Once testing or replacement is completed, the data can be restored to the individual station, providing the same type is in place.

CONDITIONS

This program must be used carefully because key programming data is saved to a common programming database. When a new phone is connected, the system copies data from this database to the new phone.

DEFAULT DATA

RESTORE

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 721.

Display shows:

2. Enter desired station number (e.g., 205)

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button.

3. Press Volume button to make function selection and press Right Soft button to enter and return to

[201] SAVE KEY

RESTORE

[205] SAVE KEY

RESTORE

[205] SAVE KEY

SAVE

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 107

MMC 722

MMC 723

KEY EXTENDER

STATION KEY PROGRAMMING

SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING

Samsung Business Communications

2-228

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[722] STATION KEY PROGRAMMING

Allows the customizing of programmable buttons on specific phones and add-on modules

(AOMs). For phones, buttons 1 and 2 are set as CALL buttons by default. For AOMs, all buttons are set as DS keys by default. Features are selected by pressing the dial keypad buttons the required number of times. For example, for OHVA, the number 6 is pressed three times. If the BOSS key is required, 2 is pressed for the first letter B and then the Volume button used to change the selection from BARGE to BOSS.

DIAL KEYPAD

COUNT

DIAL 2

DIAL 3

DIAL 4

DIAL 5

DIAL 6

DIAL 7

1

AB

DGPALM

GPIK

LANREQ

MMPA

PAGE

2

BARGE

EP

HDSET

LANREQ

NEW

PAGE

3

CAD

FAUTO

ICONF

LANREQ

OHVA

RB

4

SETDND

WAKEUP DIAL 9

Feature

AB

ABAND

ABW

ACC

ALARM

AN/RLS

BARGE

BILL

BLOCK

BOOTH

BOSS

WAKEUP XCHIN WAKEUP

Programmable Button Assignments

Description

ABSENCE

ABANDONED CALL

AGENT BUSY/WRAP UP

ACCOUNT

ALARM

ANSWER/RELEASE

BARGE-IN

BILL (Hotel Feature)

OHVA BLOCK

BOOTH (Hotel Feature)

BOSS/SECRETARY

Feature

MMPG

MS

MSG

MUTE

MW

NEW

NND

NOCLIP

NPG

NS

NXT

Description

MEET ME PAGE

MANUAL

SIGNALLING

MESSAGE

MUTE

MESSAGE WAIT

NEW CALL

NAME NUMBER

DATE

NO CID SEND

NETWORK

PAGE

NETWORK

STATION

CID NEXT

Samsung Business Communications

2-229

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

Feature Description Feature Description

CAD

CALL

CAMP

CANMG

CBK

CC

CHIN

CHOUT

CHOICE

CLIP

CONF

CALL ACTIVITY DISPLAY

CALL BUTTON

STATION CAMP-ON

OHVA

OPER

PAGE

PROG

OFF-HOOK VOICE ANNOUNCE

OPERATOR

PAGE

MESSAGE CANCEL

CALLBACK

CALL COVERAGE

CHECK IN (Hotel Feature)

PAGPK

PARK

PAUSE

PMSG

CHECK OUT (Hotel Feature) PRB

PICKUP PAGE HOLD

CALL PARK ORBIT

PAUSE

PROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE

PRIVACY RELEASE AND BRIDGE

SET PROGRAM CHOICE

(Related to News Server)

CALLER ID

CONFERENCE

PTHR

RB

REJECT

PATH REPLACEMENT

ROOM BILL

(Hotel Feature)

OHVA REJECT CONP

CR

CONNECTED NAME

DISPLAY

CALL RECORD

(Requires SVMi module)

CREDIT CREDIT(Hotel Feature)

CS

CALL STATUS

CSNR

CALLER ID SAVE NUMBER

REDIAL

DGPALM

EASY ALARM SET TO

REMOTE STATION

DICT

DIR

DICTATION

DIRECTORY

DIVERT

DLOCK

EXECUTIVE CALL DIVERT

TO SECRETARY

DOOR LOCK

DND

DNDO

DP

DROP

DS

DO NOT DISTURB

DO NOT DISTURB

OVERRIDE

DIRECT PICKUP

CALL DROP

DSS KEY

RETRY

REVW

RP

RSV

RTO

SETDND

SET DO NOT DISTURB

SETMG

SET MESSAGE W/O RING

SG

SLOCAT

STAFF LOCATOR

(Hotel Feature)

SNR

SP

SAVED NUMBER REDIAL

UCD SUPERVISOR

SPD

SPKR

SSET

AUTO REDIAL ON BUSY

REVIEW

RING PLAN

ROOM STATUS VIEW

(Hotel Feature)

RING PLAN TIME OVERRIDE

STATION GROUP

SPEED DIAL

SPEAKER

ISDN SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE

SET

Samsung Business Communications

2-230

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

Feature Description Feature Description

DT

EP

EXTMIC

FAUTO

FLASH

FWRD

GPIK

HDSET

HLDPK

HOLD

HOTEL

ICONF

IDISC

IG

IHOLD

INFDSP

INQIRE

DTS KEY

ESTABLISHED CALL

PICKUP

EXTERNAL MIC

FORCED AUTO ANSWER

FLASH

CALL FORWARD

STATE

STORE

SYSALM

TG

TIMER

TP

TRARPT

SET EXECUTIVE STATE

STORE DISPLAYED NUMBER

SYSTEM ALARMS

TRUNK GROUP

TIMER

TERMINAL PORTABILITY

TRAFFIC REPORT

GROUP PICKUP

HEADSET MODE

HOLD PICKUP

HOLD

TRSF

UA

VG

VM

TRANSFER

UNIVERSAL ANSWER

VMS GROUP MESSAGE

(Requires SVM-800)

VOICE MAIL MEMO

(Requires SVMi module)

HOTEL (Hotel Feature)

VMADM

VOICE MAIL ADMINISTRATION

(Requires SVMi module)

ISDN 3 PTY CONFERENCE VMAME ANSWER MACHINE EMULATION

(Requires SVMi module)

ISDN 3 PTY

DISCONNECTION

VMMSG

IN/OUT GROUP

ISDN 3-PARTY HOLD

VMSCMT

VMSMSG

VOICE MAIL MESSAGE KEY

(Requires SVMi module)

VMS COMMENT (Requires SVM)

VMS MESSAGE (Requires SVM)

INFORMATION DISPLAY

(Requires News/Call Plus)

INQUIRE

VMSOUT

VMS OUT CALL (Requires SVM)

VMSREC

VMS RECORD (Requires SVM)

IRET

ISPY

LANREQ

LCR

LISTN

LNR

LOG

MMPA

ISDN 3 PTY RETRIEVE

CID SPY

LAN REQUEST

LEAST COST ROUTING

GROUP LISTENING

LAST NUMBER REDIAL

CALL LOGGING

MEET ME PAGE ANSWER

VMSVAC VMS VACANT (Requires SVM)

VT

VOICEMAIL TRANSFER

WAKEUP

WAKE UP (Hotel Feature)

XCHIN

EXPRESS CHECK IN

(Hotel Feature)

Samsung Business Communications

2-231

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

DEFAULT DATA

For phones, buttons 1 and 2 are set as CALL buttons by default. (Other settings depend on the keyset type.) For AOMs, all buttons are set as DSS buttons by default.

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 722.

Display shows:

2. Enter selected station number (e.g., 205)

OR

Press Volume button to select station and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter selected key number (e.g., 18)

OR

Press Volume button to select key number and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. Using table above, press dial keypad to select number.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to advance cursor to step 5 to enter extender, if required, or to return to step 2.

5. Enter extender if required (e.g., 03)

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to return to step 2.

6. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

[201] KEY (MAST)

01:CALL1

Æ

[205] KEY (MAST)

01:CALL1

Æ

[201] KEY (MAST)

18:NONE

Æ_

[201] KEY PROG.

18:NONE

ÆGPIK_

[201] KEY PROG.

18:NONE

ÆGPIK03

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 107

MMC 720

MMC 721

KEY EXTENDER

COPY KEY PROGRAMMING

SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING

Samsung Business Communications

2-232

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[723] SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING

This MMC is similar to MMC 722, Station Key Programming, except that changes are made system-wide rather than on a per-station basis. Features are entered via the dial keypad by pressing numbers as shown in the table.

TYPE OF PHONE

No Type of Phone

00 24 BTN SETS

01 12 BTN SETS

03 EU 6B SETS

05 48/64 BTN AOMS

06 20 BTN SETS

07 28 BTN SETS

08 18 BTN SETS

09 8 BTN SETS

10 99 BTN SETS

11 38 BTN SETS

12 21 BTN SETS

13 14 BTN SETS

14 DS-07S SETS

DIAL KEYPAD

Description

Phone with 24 program buttons

Phone with 12 program buttons

EU phone with 6 program buttons

AOM with 48/64 program buttons

Phone with 20 program buttons

Phone with 28 program buttons

Phone with 18 program buttons

Phone with 8 program buttons

Phone with 99 program buttons

Phone with 38 program buttons

Phone with 21 program buttons

Phone with 14 program buttons

7000 Range phone

COUNT

DIAL 2

DIAL 3

DIAL 4

1

AB

DGPALM

GPIK

BARGE

EP

HDSET

2

CAD

FAUTO

ICONF

3 4

DIAL 6

DIAL 7

MMPA

PAGE

NEW

PAGE

OHVA

RB SETDND

DIAL WAKEUP XCHIN WAKEUP WAKEUP

See Programmable Button Assignments in MMC 722.

Samsung Business Communications

2-233

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

DEFAULT DATA

SEE DEFAULT DATA IN MMC 722

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 723.

Display shows:

2. Enter type of set via dial keypad (e.g.,1)

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button.

3. Enter key number (e.g., 03)

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button.

4. Using table above, press dial keypad to select number

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance cursor to step

5 to enter extender, if required.

OR

Press Left Soft button to return to step 3.

5. Enter extender if required (e.g., 03)

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

6. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

TYPE:24 BTN SETS

01:CALL1

Æ

TYPE:12 BTN SETS

01:CALL1

Æ

TYPE:12 BTN SETS

03:NONE

Æ

TYPE:12 BTN SETS

03:NONE

ÆGPIK

TYPE:12 BTN SETS

03:GPIK

ÆGPIK03

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 107

MMC 720

MMC 721

KEY EXTENDER

COPY KEY PROGRAMMING

SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING

Samsung Business Communications

2-234

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[724] DIAL NUMBERING PLAN

This MMC allows the technician to change directory numbers for stations, trunks, station groups, trunk groups and feature access codes. The system can be pre-programmed with default 3- or 4-digit numbering for stations, station groups and trunk numbers depending on the position of the DIP switches on the MP40 card. There is an error message provided to prevent the accidental duplication of a directory number or feature access code.

No Type of Dial No Description

00 STN DIAL NO.

01 TRK DIAL NO.

02 AA/VD DIAL NO

03 MISC DIAL NO.

This is where station directory numbers are changed or assigned.

Default: 201-2xx, 3xx (last 319) or 2001-2xxx

This is where trunk directory numbers are changed or assigned.

Default: 701-7xx or 7001-7xxx

Not used

This is where directory numbers for relays, MOH ports and the alarm sensor are changed or assigned.

Default: Internal MOH: 371

External MOH: 372-377

External PAGE: 3752-3753

Common Bell: 3991 ¤

Loud Bell: 3995

04 STNG DIAL

NUMBER

05 TRKG DIAL

NUMBER

This is where station group numbers are changed or assigned.

Default: 500-5xx or 5001-5xxx

This is where trunk group numbers are changed or assigned.

Default: The first is 9 or 0, 800-828

06 FEAT DIAL NUMBER This is where feature access codes are changed or assigned. Dialling codes are entered via the dial keypad by pressing a number the required number of times to select the feature. For example, for

OHVA, the number 6 would be pressed three times.

NOTE: Remember that this program applies system-wide.

07 S0 STN DIAL NO. This is where directory numbers for BRI station ports are changed or assigned.

Default: 8701-8764

09 NTWK LCR DIAL NO This is where additional LCR access codes are entered if two or more OfficeServ 7400 systems are networked together.

Default: NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-235

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

No Type of Dial No Description

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

VIRT EXT DIAL NO

MGI DIAL NO.

IP STN DIAL NO.

WLAN DIAL NO,

VOIP NET DIAL NO

H323 TRK DIAL NO

SIP TRK DIAL NO

UMS DIAL NUMBER

SIP STN DIAL NUMBER

This is where virtual station directory numbers are changed or assigned.

Default: SLT: 3501-3596, DGP: 3401-3496

This is where MGI port directory numbers are changed or assigned.

Default: 3801-38xx

This is where IP-based station directory numbers are changed or assigned.

Default: 3201-3296

This is where IP-based station directory numbers are changed or assigned.

Default: 3301-3396

This is where Samsung proprietary switch-to-switch VoIP networking trunk signalling port directory numbers are changed or assigned.

Default: 8301-8364

This is where VoIP H.323 trunk signalling port directory numbers are changed or assigned.

Default: 8401-8464

This is where VoIP SIP trunk signalling port directory numbers are changed or assigned.

Default: 8501-8564

This is where IP UMS port directory numbers are changed or assigned

Default: 8665-8696

This is where VOIP SIP station port directory numbers are changed or assigned

Default: 8601-8664.

FEATURE NUMBERING DIAL KEYPAD

COUNT

DIAL 2

DIAL 3

DIAL 4

DIAL 5

DIAL 6

DIAL 7

1

AB

DGPALM

GPIK

LANREQ

MMPA

PAGE

2

BARGE

EP

HDSET

LANREQ

NEW

PAGE

3

CAD

FAUTO

ICONF

LANREQ

OHVA

RB

4

SETDND

DIAL 9 WAKEUP XCHIN WAKEUP WAKEUP

2-236

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

Feature Code Assignments and Default

Feature Default

ABAND 64

Description

ABW NONE AGENT BUSY/WRAP UP

ACCT 47 ACCOUNT

ALMCLR 57 ALARM

BARGE NONE BARGE-IN

BILL NONE BILL (Hotel Feature)

BOSS NONE BOSS/SECRETARY

CAMP 45 STATION

CANMG 42

CBK 44 CALLBACK

CHIN

CHOUT

CHOICE

NONE

NONE

NONE

CHECK IN (Hotel Feature)

CHECK OUT (Hotel Feature)

CHOICE (Related to News Server)

CONF 46 CONFERENCE

CONP NONE CONNECTED NAME DISPLAY

CR NONE CALL RECORD (Requires SVMi module)

DGPALM NONE EASY ALARM SET TO REMOTE STATION

DICT NONE DICTATION

DIRPK 65

DISALM 58

DIVERT NONE

DLOCK 13

DND 40

EXECUTIVE CALL DIVERT TO SECRETARY

DO NOT DISTURB

FAUTO 14

FLASH 49

FORCED AUTO ANSWER

FLASH

GRPK 66 GROUP PICKUP

HLDPK 12 HOLD PICKUP

Samsung Business Communications

2-237

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

RB

REJECT

RSV

RTO

SELFID

SETMG

SLOCAT

SLTALM

SLTMMC

Feature Default Description

HOLD 11 HOLD

HOTEL NONE HOTEL (Hotel Feature)

ICONF NONE ISDN 3-PARTY CONFERENCE

IDISC

IG

IHOLD

INFDSP

IRET

NONE

53

NONE

NONE

NONE

ISDN 3-PARTY DISCONNECTION

IN/OUT GROUP

ISDN 3-PARTY HOLD

INFORMATION DISPLAY (Requires News/Call Plus)

ISDN 3-PARTY RETRIEVE

LCR

LISTN

LNR

#

NONE

19

LEAST COST ROUTING

GROUP LISTENING

LAST NUMBER REDIAL

MMPA

MMPG

MSG

MYGRPK

NEW

NOCLIP

56

54

43

28

NONE

NONE

MEET ME PAGE ANSWER

MEET ME PAGE

MESSAGE

MY PICKUP GROUP CALL PICKUP

NEW CALL

NO CID SEND

OHVA NONE

OPER

PAGE

PAGPK

PARK

0

55

10

NONE

PMSG 48

OFF-HOOK VOICE ANNOUNCE

OPERATOR

PAGE

PICKUP PAGE HOLD

CALL PARK ORBIT

NONE

NONE

NONE

NONE

NONE

41

NONE

NONE

15

ROOM BILL (Hotel Feature)

OHVA REJECT

ROOM STATUS VIEW (Hotel Feature)

RING PLAN TIME OVERRIDE

SELF SYSTEM ID

SET MESSAGE W/O RING

STAFF LOCATOR (Hotel Feature)

EASY ALARM SET TO SELF STATION

NORMAL PHONE PROGRAMMING

Samsung Business Communications

2-238

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

Feature Default

SNR 17

SPEED 16

Description

SAVED NUMBER REDIAL

SSET

STATE

NONE

NONE

ISDN SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE SET

SET EXECUTIVE STATE

UA

VMADM

VMAME

VMMEMO

VMMSG

VMSCMT

VMSMSG

VMSOUT

VMSREC

VMSVAC

WAKEUP

WCOS

67

NONE

NONE

NONE

NONE

NONE

NONE

NONE

NONE

NONE

18

59

UNIVERSAL ANSWER

VOICE MAIL ADMINISTRATION (Requires SVMi module)

ANSWER MACHINE EMULATION (Requires SVMi module)

VOICE MAIL MEMO (Requires SVMi module)

VOICE MAIL MESSAGE KEY (Requires SVMi module)

VMS COMMENT (Requires SVM -800)

VMS MESSAGE (Requires SVM -800)

VMS OUT CALL (Requires SVM -800)

VMS RECORD (Requires SVM -800)

VMS VACANT (Requires SVM -800)

WAKE UP (Hotel Feature)

WORKING CLASS OF SERVICE

DEFAULT DATA

SEE DESCRIPTION

FEATURE CODES DEPEND ON COUNTRY

Samsung Business Communications

2-239

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 724.

Display shows:

2. Dial option number to make selection (e.g., 06)

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to advance cursor.

3. Dial first letter of feature name (e.g., 7)

OR

Press Volume button to make selection then press

Right Soft button to advance cursor.

4. Enter digits (e.g., 63) via the dial keypad.

5. Press Right Soft button to enter change and continue to make changes.

If an error message appears indicating duplication of access code, enter 1 for YES for change or

enter 0 for NO for no change.

6. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

STN DIAL NUM:C1

S2-P01:201

Æ

FEAT DIAL NUMBER

ABAND :64

Æ_

FEAT NUMBER PLAN

PAGE :55

Æ

FEAT NUMBER PLAN

PARK :NONE

Æ_

FEAT NUMBER PLAN

PARK :NONE

Æ63

FEAT NUMBER PLAN

PARK :NONE

Æ63

SAME DIAL EXIST

CHANGE? Y:1,N:0

RELATED ITEMS

ALL MMCs

Samsung Business Communications

2-240

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[725] SMDR OPTIONS

Allows the system administrator to select the information printed on the SMDR report. The following options may be selected:

No Option

00 PAGE HEADER

01 LINE PER PAGE

04 AUTHORIZE

CODE

TIME

06 IN/OUT GROUP

07 DND CALL

08 WAKE-UP CALL

09 DIRECTORY

NAME

13 NO. OF DIAL

MASK

Default

YES

66

02 INCOMING CALL YES

03 OUTGOING CALL YES

NO

YES

NO

NO

YES

NONE

10 CALLER ID DATA NO

11 ABANDON CALL NO

0

Description

This option determines whether a page header will print at the top of each page. This would normally be turned off if SMDR is being sent to a Call Accounting machine.

This option selects the length of each page to determine when to print the SMDR header. The number of lines is in the range 01-99.

This option determines whether incoming calls will print on SMDR.

This option determines whether outgoing calls will print on SMDR.

This option determines whether authorization codes will print on SMDR. If this option is set to NO, ‘****’ is printed on SMDR.

This option determines whether valid calls will include the minimum call time in total call duration.

This option allows a message, IN GROUP or OUT

GROUP, to be printed in the ‘digits dialled’ column each time a station enters or leaves a group.

This option allows a message, IN DND or OUT DND, to be printed in the ‘digits dialled’ column each time a station enters or leaves DND.

This option determines whether stations receiving an alarm reminder call will print on SMDR.

This option allows the system administrator to enter a name up to 16 characters which will appear on the

SMDR header.

This option can be selected to print Caller ID data received from the Central Office on incoming calls.

This option requires the use of a 132-column wide carriage printer or an 80-column printer set for condensed print.

If this option is set to YES, unanswered calls for which

CID information was received will print on SMDR.

If this option is set to a numeric value, the selected last digits of the number dialled field will be masked as asterisks(*) on the SMDR print out. Maximum masked digits is 18. First 4 digits will not mask.

Samsung Business Communications

2-241

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

No Option Default

15 INCOMING

ANSWER

NO

16 INTERCOM CALL NO

17 KEY MMC IN/OUT NO

FEED

LINE

23 DID NUM/NAME

24 ITP

REGISTRATION

25 SET

RELOCATION

END

0

YES

NO

NO

Description

If this option is set to YES, the duration of calls ringing before being answered will print on SMDR.

This option determines whether intercom calls will print on SMDR.

If set to YES the SMDR record will show programming being opened and closed in MMC 200 and MMC 800.

This option determines where the page feed is inserted on HM REPT (Hotel Application Only)

This option determines that the number of empty lines per each page on HM REPT (Hotel Application Only)

If this option is set to YES, received DID information will print on SMDR.

If set to YES the SMDR record will show registration of

ITP phones.

If set to YES the SMDR record will show Set Relocations.

ENTERING CHARACTERS

Refer to ENTERING CHARACTERS in MMC 104, STATION NAME.

DEFAULT DATA

SEE DESCRIPTION

SOME OPTIONS DEPEND ON COUNTRY

Samsung Business Communications

2-242

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 725.

Display shows:

2. Dial the option number (e.g., 01)

OR

Use the Volume buttons to scroll through the options and press Right Soft button to select an option.

3. Enter the option data.

OR

Use the Volume buttons to press Right

Soft button to save the data and return to step 2.

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 300 CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER STATION

PAGE HEADER

PRINT: YES

LINE PER PAGE

60 LINE/PAGE

LINE PER PAGE

50 LINE/PAGE

Samsung Business Communications

2-243

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[726] VM/AA OPTIONS

This MMC is used to define all the in-band DTMF codes sent to voice mail ports. These inband codes can be 0-9, A, B or C.

CALL AND TYPE INFORMATION

This is a DTMF signalling string sent to a voice mail port when the voice mail port answers a call. This DTMF information tells the voice mail port what type of call it is receiving and where the call is coming from (e.g., call forwarded from extension 225).

CALL PROGRESS TONES

These are sent to the voice mail system to provide information about the progress of the call (e.g., ring back, busy or disconnect). Most voice mail systems can use DTMF in-band signalling for more efficient call processing. This MMC has many parameters that can be programmed according to the type of automated attendant and/or voice mail system connected.

CALL and TYPE INFORMATION

The format of the DTMF data sent to a VM/AA port is as follows:

[CALL TYPE] + [DN1] + [SEPARATOR] + [DN2] an example of this would be:

[FORWARD ALL] from [225] on trunk [703]

Each field can be programmed individually as follows:

Option Description

EXTENSION

FOR DN1

If set to yes, when the voice mail auto attendant system answers a call the system will send data in the DN1 field indicating that a station is ringing the VMAA port.

If set to no, when the voice mail auto attendant system answers a call the system will not send station data in the DN1 field.

TRUNK FOR DN1 If set to yes, when the voice mail auto attendant system answers a call the system will send data in the DN1 field indicating that a trunk is ringing the VMAA port.

If set to no, when the voice mail auto attendant system answers a call the system will not send trunk data in the DN1 field.

EXTENSION

FOR DN2

If set to yes, when the voice mail auto attendant system answers a call the system will send data in the DN2 field indicating the originating station of the call ringing the VMAA port.

If set to no, when the voice mail auto attendant system answers a call the system will not send station data in the DN2 field.

Default

No

No

No

Samsung Business Communications

2-244

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

Option Description Default

TRUNK FOR DN2 If set to yes, when the voice mail auto attendant system answers a call the system will send data in the DN2 field indicating the originating trunk of the call ringing the VMAA port.

If set to no, when the voice mail auto attendant system answers a call the system will not send trunk data in the DN2 field

SEPARATOR When both DN1 and DN2 are used, a digit defined here is sent between DN1 and DN2 so the VMAA system can determine where DN 1 stops and where DN 2 starts. The separator can be

DTMF 0 through 9, *, #, A, B or C.

DISCONNECT

SIGNAL

CALL TYPE ID

This is the call progress digit sent to the VMAA port in place of a disconnect open. The digit defined here is sent three times.

This is the DTMF digit that is sent first in the in band digit string and can identify any of the following call types

No Call Type Description

0 DIRECT

CALL

CALL

A call originating directly from another station in the system.

This indicates that a call was forwarded to the VM/AA port from a station with CALL

FORWARD ALL set.

4

CALL

CALL

RECALL

This indicates that a call was forwarded to the VM/AA port from a station with CALL

FORWARD BUSY set.

This indicates that a call was forwarded to the VM/AA port from a station with CALL

FORWARD NO ANSWER set.

A call is recalling the VM/AA port after being transferred and not answered.

CALL

A Trunk Line call has gone directly to

VM/AA

(e.g., trunk 717 DIL to VM/AA).

6 OVERFLOW A call has OVERFLOWED to the VM/AA port from a station group.

7 DID CALL A DID call has called the VM/AA port.

8 MESSAGE

CALL

A message button or message reply feature code has been used to call the

VM/AA port.

No

No

C

Default

1

2

3

4

4

6

4

8

9

Samsung Business Communications

2-245

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

Option Description Default

PROGRESS

TONE ID

CALLER ID

NUMBER

GENERAL RULES

These are the DTMF codes that is sent to the VMAA port in place of regular progress tones. For example, when a VMAA port goes off hook to originate or transfer a call, instead of hearing normal dial tone, it will hear DTMF ‘BA’. Progress tones can greatly increase the efficiency of a VMAA system because it is easier and quicker to detect DTMF than a busy, ring back or DND tone.

Progress tones can identify any of the following.

No Call Type

0 DIAL TONE Dial Tone

Description

1 BUSY TONE Busy Tone

2 RINGBAK

TONE

Ringback Tone

DND or No More Call Button Error

MORE

4 HDSET

ANSWER

5 SPKER

ANSWER

Off Hook Answer

On Hook Answer

If set to YES, when the voice mail auto attendant system answers a call the system will send Caller ID data as DTMF tones to the VMAA port.

Default

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

1. If a station is talking to a trunk and the user presses TRANSFER plus the station number, but the station is forwarded to VM/AA and VM/AA answers presses, pressing

TRANSFER again to return to the trunk disconnects the VM/AA port.

2. If a VM/AA port leaves a message indication for a station and the station replies, any available port in the VM/AA group should ring, not only the one that left the message.

3. If a VM/AA port leaves a message for a station and the station replies, the MESSAGE

LED is not automatically turned off. If a VM/AA system turns on the MESSAGE

LED, the VM/AA system must turn it off.

4. If DTMF call progress tones are not enabled, the system sends regular call progress tones.

5. When a VM/AA port calls a station that is in the AUTO ANSWER or VOICE AN-

NOUNCE mode, the phone will be forced to ring.

6. All calls to a VM/AA port or group ring with Trunk line ringing cadence, not intercom ring cadence.

Samsung Business Communications

2-246

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

EXAMPLES OF VM/AA OPERATION (IN-BAND DTMF DIGIT STRING)

In the following example, all call and type data is turned on unless otherwise stated. X is the separator digit, all-default values are used in these examples and [ ] is not used.

A DIL 701 calls a VM/AA port or group:

[1] + [701] + [ ] + [ ]

In the above example, if Trunk Line information is not used:

[ ] + [ ] + [ ] + [ ](Nothing is used)

DIL 701 calls a call-forwarded station(205):

[2] + [205] + [X] + [701]

In the above example, if forward information is not used:

[ ] + [205] + [X] + [701]

In the above example, if forward and DN2/Trunk Line information is not used:

[ ] + [205] + [ ] + [ ]

DIL 701 calls group 501 that overflows to VM/AA:

[4] + [501] + [x] + [701]

In the above example, if overflow information is turned off:

[ ] + [ ] + [ ] + [ ](Nothing is sent)

A DID call rings the VM/AA directly:

[B] + [9999] + [ ] + [ ]

9999 are the DID digits from Trunk Line

In the above example, if did information is turned off:

[ ] + [9999] + [ ] + [ ]

A station transfers(blind or screened) a call(Trunk Line, DID or intercom) to VM/AA group or port. When the transferring station hangs up(blind transfer):

[ ]+[ ]+[ ]+[ ](Nothing is sent)

A station(202) transfers a Trunk Line call(702) to a station(225) that is Call Forward All to a VM/AA group or port. When the transferring station hangs up(blind transfer) and the

VM/AA group or port answers:

[2] + [225] + [x] + [702]

A station(202) transfers a Trunk Line call(702) to a group(501) that overflows to a VM/AA group or port:

[4] + [501] + [X] + [702]

Samsung Business Communications

2-247

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

In the above example, if overflow information is turned off:

[ ] + [ ] + [ ] + [ ](Nothing is sent)

A station(205) calls a VM/AA port or group:

[1] + [205] + [ ] + [ ]

In the above example, if direct information is turned off:

[ ] + [ ] + [ ] + [ ](Nothing is sent)

A station(205) calls using MESSAGE key:

[9] + [205] + [ ] + [ ]

In the above example, if message information is turned off:

[ ] + [ ] + [ ] + [ ](Nothing is sent)

A call(702) recalls back from station 225 to the VM/AA group:

[4] + [225] + [x] + [702]

In the above example, if recall and DN2/CO information are turned off:

[ ] + [ ] + [ ] + [ ](Nothing is sent)

DEFAULT DATA

SEE DESCRIPTION

SOME OPTIONS DEPEND ON COUNTRY

PROGRAM BUTTONS

A

B

C

Used to insert alpha character ‘A’

Used to insert alpha character ‘B’

Used to insert alpha character ‘C’

Samsung Business Communications

2-248

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 726.

Display shows:

2. Enter the OPTION number from the above list

(e.g., 3)

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter 1 for YES or 0 for NO.

OR

Press Volume button for selection and press Right

Soft button to return to step 2.

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

EXT FOR DN1

YES

TRK FOR DN2

NO

TRK FOR DN2

YES

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 207 ASSIGN VM/AA PORT

Samsung Business Communications

2-249

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[727] SYSTEM VERSION DISPLAY

This MMC is used for system version display only (READ ONLY). The displays depend on which modules are installed in the system

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 727.

Display shows:

2. Press Volume button to show other modules, e.g.:

LP40

GWIM

GSIM

8COMBO

GPLIM

TEPRI/EP

SVMi-20E

MGI64

DLI

SLI

MP40 VERSION

‘05.03.16 V2.44

C1-LP VERSION

‘05.01.20 V2.43

C1-S01

05.12.17 V1.12

C1-S02

05.12.17 V1.12

C1-S04

NO VERSION DATA

C1-S05

NO VERSION DATA

C1-S06

02.08.20 V1.05

C1-S07

05.08.03 V5.00

C1-S09

05.12.28 V1.09

C2-S2:16DLI

NO VERSION DATA

C2-S3:16SLI

NO VERSION DATA

Samsung Business Communications

2-250

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming

3. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications

2-251

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[728] CID TRANSLATION TABLE

Allows the system administrator or technician to associate a CID number received from the central office with a name programmed in this translation table. If there is no match between a received number and a name in this table, ‘no CID name’ will be displayed.

The translation table consists of 2000 entries. Each entry comprises a telephone number up to 14 digits and a name up to 16 digits.

ENTERING CHARACTERS

Refer to ENTERING CHARACTERS in MMC 104, STATION NAME.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 728.

Display shows first entry

2. Dial entry number (e.g., 0005)

OR

Use Volume button to scroll through entries and press Right Soft button to select entry.

3. Enter telephone number and press Right Soft button to advance to name entry.

OR

Enter telephone number and press Left Soft button to return to step 2.

4. Enter associated name and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

CLIP XLAT(0001)

DGT:

CLIP XLAT (0005)

DGT:_

CLIP XLAT (0005)

DGT:3054264100

CLIP XLAT (0005)

SAMSUNG

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 312

MMC 608

ALLOW CALLER ID

ASSIGN REVIEW BLOCK

Samsung Business Communications

2-252

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[740] STATION PAIR

Assigns a secondary station to a phone. This secondary station can be a keyset or single line phone. The secondary station assumes the Call Forwarding, Class of Service, LCR

Class, and DND attributes of the primary station. The secondary station will ring when the primary station rings, and vice versa. Features can be set or cancelled at either station.

NOTE: If the COS is changed for either station in MMC 301, the change affects both stations. Messages from the secondary extension will display the secondary extension number.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 740.

Display shows

2.

Enter the primary station number via dial keypad (e.g., 201).

OR

Use Volume button to select and press Right Soft button.

3. Enter the secondary station number via dial keypad (e.g., 205)

OR

Use Volume button to select and press Right Soft button.

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

[201] PRIMARY

SECONDARY:NONE

[201] PRIMARY

SECONDARY:NONE

[201] PRIMARY

SECONDARY:205

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 102

MMC 301

MMC 310

CALL FORWARD

ASSIGN STATION COS

LCR CLASS OF SERVICE

Samsung Business Communications

2-253

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[746] COSTING DIAL PLAN

The COSTING DIAL PLAN is used to analyze the leading dialled digits of a dialled number and determine what DIAL PLAN it is to follow. Data entry for this program is in three fields: ENTRY, DIGITS and COST RATE table reference.

DIGITS

Up to 500 entries may be made. Each entry can be up to 10 digits. These are the entries that will be searched to find a match with the digits dialled by the station making the call. This is a leading digits table and the system will look for the exact leading digits in the table that match the number dialled. For example, if a user dials 1305 and the COSTING DIAL

PLAN contains 1, 1308 and 1312, the dialled digits will be matched to 1 because 1308 and

1312 do not form a complete match. When this table is created by the technician or when any new entries are added, the system automatically places all entries in numerical order.

Wild cards(

∗) can be used to represent any digit. The Toll Restriction Wild Card Character assignment (MMC 704) is common with Call Costing and Toll Restriction. When all entries are used, [LAST ENTRY] is displayed.

DIAL PLAN

This shows in the programming display as DP and represents a pattern (1-7, 8). This pattern is used by MMC 433, TRUNK COST RATE, to determine the correct billing according to

MMC 749, RATE CALCULATION TABLE

When the system finds a DIAL PLAN match for the digits dialled, the system checks

MMC 749 to see what RATE CALCULATION to use for costing the call.

EXAMPLES

When a station user dials a number, the system will search the COSTING DIAL PLAN to find a match. If 13056 is dialled and this MMC contains entries 1, 13, 1305 and 1401, the closest match is 1305 and this will be selected. If 1305 is dialled and this MMC contains entries 1, 13, 13056 and 1401, no action will be taken until the station user dials another digit. If the next digit is 6, the 13056 entry is the closest match and this entry will be selected, but if the next digit is anything other than 6, the 13 entry is the closest match.

Whenever a new entry is added, the system will sort all entries in numerical order because this is the logical order in which the system analyzes digits. Wild cards are checked after exact digits. If 1813 and 18

∗∗ are entered, the system will check 1813 first. If no match is found, it will check 18

∗∗.

Samsung Business Communications

2-254

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 746.

Display shows:

2. Dial CALL COST entry (e.g., 005)

OR

Press Volume button to select entry and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter digit string via the dial keypad and press Right Soft button.

4. Enter DIAL PLAN 1-8 (e.g. 8)

OR

Press Volume button to select dial plan and press Right Soft button to save and return to step 2.

5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

COST DP (001)

DIGIT:

COST DP (005)

DIGIT:_

COST DP (005)

DIGIT:1305

COST DP (005)

CALL RATE: 8

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 433

MMC 747

COST RATE

RATE CALCULATION TABLE

Samsung Business Communications

2-255

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[747] RATE CALCULATION TABLE

The RATE CALCULATION TABLE is used to define the billing charges for each COST

RATE. These rate tables correlate with the Trunk Cost Rate and the Costing Dial Plan.

There are eight call costing rates. Each rate has the following data fields.

No Type Description

(FIRST INTERVAL

DURATION)

This is the amount of time at the beginning of each call to which a fixed cost is applied. The range is 0-999 seconds; e.g. 80 seconds

(three minutes).

This is the cost for the first interval duration in £s sterling or Euros.

The range is 0 to 999; e.g. 345 (£3.45 or €3.45). (FIRST INTERVAL

COST)

(SECOND INTER-

VAL DURATION)

(SECOND INTER-

VAL COST )

4 SURCHARGE

This is the duration of each billing increment after the first interval has expired. The range is 0-999 seconds; e.g. 006 seconds (six seconds).

This is the cost for each billing increment, in £s sterling or Euros, after the first interval has expired. The range is 0-999; e.g. 100

(£1.00 or €1.00).

This is a one-time charge, in £s sterling or Euros, that is applied to the call over and above the time charges. The range is 0-999; e.g.

150 (£1.50 or €1.50).

Note: Currency values (£ or €) depend on the setting for the USE EURO option in MMC 210.

DEFAULT DATA

ALL COST RATES: NO DATA

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 747.

Display shows:.

2. Dial COST RATE number 1-8 (e.g., 3)

OR

Press Volume button to select COST RATE and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Dial option number 0-4 (e.g., 1)

OR

Press Volume button to select option and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

COST RATE (1)

1ST DUR :000 SEC

COST RATE (3)

1ST DUR :000 SEC

COST RATE (3)

1ST COST:000

Samsung Business Communications

2-256

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming

4. Enter data via dial keypad.(e.g., 125=1.25)

OR

Press Volume button to select data and press

Right Soft button to save and return to step 3.

5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 433

MMC 746

COST RATE

COSTING DIAL PLAN

OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

COST RATE (3)

1ST COST:125

Samsung Business Communications

2-257

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[750] VM CARD RESTART

This MMC is used for the Samsung Built-In Voice Mail module.

There are four options available in this MMC:

No Option Description

0

1

MBX DOWNLOAD

VM RESTART

When the Built-In Voice Mail module starts, part of the power-up procedure will download data from the system to determine time, date, what mailboxes to create, and system numbering plan. This must be done at least once, but once done this download feature can be turned off (NO) to save booting time.

If this option is set to YES the Built-In Voice Mail module will immediately restart according to the DOWNLOAD option specified above.

2 VIRTUAL This option determines which type of virtual port to include during

DOWNLOAD the mailbox and system numbering plan downloading procedure.

The virtual port type are as follows:

No Type

0 VIRTUAL EXT

1 DESKTOP ITP

3 MOBILE ITP

Virtual extension number

DESKTOP IP-based phone number

Wireless IP-based mobile phone number

Description

4 BRI STATION

5 VOIP NET TRK

6 VOIP 323 TRK

7 VOIP SIP TRK

ISDN terminal number

VoIP networking trunk number

VoIP H.323 trunk number

VoIP SIP trunk number

8 REMOTE STN Remote station number via networking

There are three methods for connecting voice mail to OS7400:

No Type Description

0 IP-UMS SERVER Connect via separate, unified messaging server

1 SVMi CARD

2 DLI CONNECT

Connect via SVMi-20E module

Connect via SVM-400

Removing Built-In Voice Mail Module

If during any test procedures you need to run the system with a default database and power up with options set to YES, the Built-In Voice Mail database will be overwritten according to the data in MMC 751 and the default numbering plan. If you plan this type of test, remove the Built-In Voice Mail module until the procedure is finished and the customer database is reloaded.

Samsung Business Communications

2-258

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

DEFAULT DATA

ALL OPTIONS ARE NO

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 750.

Display shows:

2. Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button.

3. Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button.

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

MBX DOWNLOAD

NO

VM RESTART

RESET NOW ? NO

VM RESTART

RESET NOW ? YES

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-259

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[751] ASSIGN MAILBOX

This MMC is only used for the Samsung Built-In Voice Mail module. It assigns mailboxes to each station or group as required. During Voice Mail module power up, mailboxes will be created for each directory number with a ‘YES’ entry. Once the Voice Mail database has been created, new mailboxes can be added: y through Voice Mail administration, or y by adding a new mailbox in this MMC.

If a mailbox is to be removed, this must be done through Voice Mail administration.

If a station that does not have an associated mailbox calls the Voice Mail system, it will be answered by the Voice Mail system main greeting.

CONDITIONS

Mailboxes that are needed for users who do not have an extension must be added through

Voice Mail programming.

DEFAULT DATA

ALL STATIONS: YES

ALL GROUPS: NO

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 751.

Display shows:.

2. Dial station number.

OR

Press Volume button to scroll the number and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Dial 0 for NO or 1 for YES.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to save and return to step 2.

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

ASSIGN MAIL BOX

[201] YES

ASSIGN MAIL BOX

[202] YES

ASSIGN MAIL BOX

[202] NO

Samsung Business Communications

2-260

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications

2-261

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[752] AUTO RECORD

y y y y

This MMC is only used for the Samsung Built-In Voice Mail module. Specific stations in the phone system can be assigned to automatically record conversations. When this option is set, all incoming, all outgoing, or all calls (incoming and outgoing) can be recorded.

In this MMC you can assign:

Station number: Which station can use this feature.

Mailbox number: What mailbox the conversations are recorded in.

I, O or B: What type of calls are recorded (in, out or both).

Voice mail port number: What port is dedicated to the station.

Before using the Auto Record feature, make sure that you are not violating any laws. Samsung is not responsible for any illegal use of this feature.

CONDITIONS

A maximum of eight stations can use this feature at one time. The same port cannot be assigned to more than one station. Attempts to do this will result in an error message. When a

Voice Mail port is assigned here, it is automatically removed from the Voice Mail group defined in MMC 601.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 752.

Display shows:.

2. Dial station number via dial keypad.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Dial mailbox number via dial keypad.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

AUTO RECORD

STN:201 MB:NONE

AUTO RECORD

STN:201 MB:NONE

AUTO RECORD

STN:201 MB:201

Samsung Business Communications

2-262

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming

4. Dial VM number via dial keypad.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

5. Dial call type via dial keypad (0: I, 1: O or 2: B)

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

6. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

AUTO RECORD

PORT:209 CALL:I

AUTO RECORD

PORT:209 CALL:B

Samsung Business Communications

2-263

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[753] WARNING DESTINATION

This MMC is only used for the Samsung Built-In Voice Mail module. It provides an emergency destination for calls destined for the module if the module is removed or is offline.

In addition, any calls that are forwarded to the module will not forward; they will remain ringing at the ‘fwd from’ station until answered. This destination can be a station number or a group number.

DEFAULT DATA

5000

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 753.

Display shows:

2. Dial station number or group number.

OR

Press Volume button to scroll through numbers and select.

3. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

WARNING DEST.

DEST:500

WARNING DEST.

DEST:501

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-264

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[754] VM HALT

This MMC is only used for the Samsung Built-In Voice Mail module. It is used to halt the module (take it offline). It ensures that there is no traffic on the module when it is removed from the system.

DEFAULT DATA

PROC (process)

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 754.

Display shows:

2. Enter 1 to HALT or 0 to PROC

OR

Press Volume button to select.

3.

If you select 1 to halt, display shows:

Press 1 to confirm.

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

VM HALT

STATUS:PROC

VM HALT

STATUS:PROC

VM HALT

ARE YOU SURE? YES

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-265

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[755] VM ALARM

This MMC is only used for the Samsung Built-In Voice Mail module. It will generate an alarm message in the mailbox defined in MMC 751 whenever the Voice Mail disk drive reaches a threshold.

The threshold is measured as a percentage of capacity. This means that if the MMC is set for 80, the alarm will be generated when the disk exceeds 80 % of the available drive space.

DEFAULT DATA

THRESHOLD: 80%

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 755.

Display shows:

2. Enter new threshold level (e.g. 70)

VM ALARM

THRESHOLD:80

VM ALARM

THRESHOLD:70

3. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-266

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[756] ASSIGN VMMOH

This MMC is only used for the Samsung Built-In Voice Mail module. It is used to assign each port a Music-On-Hold source for the system from a sound file located on the Voice

Mail module hard disk drive. The 100 available sound files are defined as numbers 5000 to

5099. To use the default music, select the number; otherwise, make sure you record the sound file first. Then, assign the sound file to a Voice Mail port.

For example, if you record sound file 5025 you would associate 25 with a specific Voice

Mail port, e.g., 225. This will dedicate the port for use only as MOH and remove it from group 529 or 549. Now 225 will show up as a valid music source in MMCs 308, 309 and

408.

Each Music-On-Hold source assigned here requires one Voice Mail port.

NOTE: If the first Voice Mail port is used for VMMOH, it must be disabled before boot-up since the

Voice Mail module and the system use port 1 during boot-up to exchange critical information. For this reason, it is suggested you use the last port for VMMOH.

DEFAULT DATA

NOT USED

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 756.

Display shows:

2.

Dial VM number (e.g. 215)

OR

3.

Press Volume button to make a selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

Enter VM message number (e.g. 25)

OR

Press Volume button to make a selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

SET VMMOH

209 : NOT USED

SET VMMOH

215 : NOT USED

SET VMMOH

215 : 25

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-267

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[757] VM IN/OUT

This MMC is only used for the Samsung Built-In Voice Mail module. It is used to assign each Voice Mail port as used for incoming, outgoing or both-way calls. This MMC must support outgoing calls if off-premises notification (beeper, outbound follow me or outbound notification) is used.

DEFAULT DATA

IN/OUT

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 757.

Display shows:

2. Dial VM number (e.g. 215)

OR

Press Volume button to make a selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter option via dial keypad (e.g. IN)

OR

Press Volume button to make a selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

VM IN/OUT

209 : IN/OUT

VM IN/OUT

215 : IN/OUT

VM IN/OUT

215 : IN

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-268

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[758] VM DAY/NIGHT

This MMC is only used for the Samsung Built-In Voice Mail module. The module can operate in either a DAY or NIGHT operating mode. The mode determines what main menu greetings and options are played to callers and can change automatically (if enabled in the module) according to the settings in this MMC.

This MMC contains either a DAY or NIGHT instruction for each Ring Plan.

DEFAULT DATA

ALL RING PLANS: DAY

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 758.

Display shows:

2. Enter ring plan number.

OR

Press Volume button to make a selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3.

Dial 0 for day or 1 for night.

OR

Press Volume button to make a selection and press Right Soft button to save and move cursor.

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

VM DAY/NIGHT

RING 1 : DAY

VM DAY/NIGHT

RING 3 : DAY

VM DAY/NIGHT

RING 3 : DAY

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 507 ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME

Samsung Business Communications

2-269

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[759] CLI RINGING

This MMC assigns a specific CID number received from the central office to a specific ring plan destination. Also allows you to reject a specific CID number and assign priorities.

There are 9 priority levels: priority 1 is the highest and priority 9 is the lowest.

It also allows you to select the ring tone heard at a phone when called by a specific CID number. There is also a cadence control option to perform a similar function for SLTs.

There are eight ring tones available along with a Follow Station (NO) option. There are five cadences and a Follow Station option (NO) for SLTs. The CID Ringing table consists of 100 entries.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

Option

CLI

REJ

PRI

R1: XXX, R2: XXX,

R3: XXX, R4: XXX,

R5: XXX, R6: XXX

TONE

Description

CID number to be received from the central office. Up to 16 digits may be entered.

CID call reject option. When set to YES, if an incoming call matches the CID number and CLI field then the system will reject the call.

CID priority option. There are 9 priority levels: priority 1 is the highest and priority 9 is the lowest. When calls come in to a station group and all group members are busy, the system will assign a priority to the CID numbers so that calls from a high priority CID number will be placed at the front of the group queue. If this option is set to NO, the call placed longest in the group queue has the highest priority.

Ring plan and destination during each ring plan. The destination can be a station or station group.

CAD

Ring Tone options for a specific CID Number (No, 1~8)

No

1-8

Calls will ring with the phone user’s choice of ring frequency.

Calls from the programmed CID number will ring phones with this ring frequency.

Ring Cadence options for a specific CID Number at SLTs (No,

1~5)

No

1

Calls will ring with the normal SLT ring cadences.

Calls from the programmed CID number will ring

SLTs with the intercom ring cadence.

2

3

4

5

Calls from the programmed CID number will ring

SLTs with the CO ring cadence.

Calls from the programmed CID number will ring

SLTs with the DOOR ring cadence.

Calls from the programmed CID number will ring

SLTs with the ALARM ring cadence.

Calls from the programmed CID number will ring

SLTs with the CALLBACK ring cadence.

Samsung Business Communications

2-270

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 759.

Display shows:

2. Dial entry number (e.g. 005)

OR

Press Volume button to make a selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3.

Enter CID number and press Right Soft button to advance to next entry.

4.

OR

Enter CID number and press Left Soft button to return to step 2.

Enter reject option via dial keypad.

(1 for YES, 0 for NO)

5.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to move cursor

Enter priority level via dial keypad (1-9 or NO)

OR

6.

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to move cursor

Enter station or group number for each Ring

Plan destination via dial keypad (e.g. 501).

7.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to move cursor

Dial 1-8 (or NO) to select ring tone (e.g. 2).

OR

8.

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to move cursor

Dial 1-5 (or NO) to select ring cadence.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to move cursor

9. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

CLI RINGING(001)

CLI:

CLI RINGING(005)

CLI:_

CLI RINGING(005)

CLI:1234567

CLI RINGING(005)

REJ:NO PRI:NO

CLI RINGING(005)

REJ:NO PRI:NO

CLI RINGING(005)

R1:501 R2:NONE

CLI RINGING(005)

TONE:2 CAD:NO

CLI RINGING(005)

TONE:2 CAD:NO

2-271

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 312 ALLOW CALLER ID

OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications

2-272

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[760] ITEM COST TABLE

This MMC provides a means to assign a code to a billable item along with a 10-character name for the item. There are a maximum of 100 entries (00 to 99) in the table with item 00 reserved as the code for room deposits, 01 reserved as the code for phone deposits and items 89 to 99 reserved for other PMS stream items.

These item codes, with the exception of codes 93 to 99, will appear on the guests’ bills at checkout and will serve to identify what each charge on the bill is for. The room bill, when printed, will also show telephone calls with an item designation of TEL and the name field will show the number dialled. In addition to the name, up to eight of the tax codes or rates defined in MMC 761 can be applied to each item.

PRE DEFINED CODES

Description

This is the code used for pre-pay room deposits.

This is the code used for pre-pay phone deposits

No Code

90

91

92

93

94

95

96

97

98

99

01

Room Deposit

Phone Deposit

02-88 -

89 W/UP SET

W/UP ANS

W/UP N/ANS

W/UP CANCL

Check In

Check out

Available

Occupied

Clean Room

Fix Room

Hold

A wake up call was set

A wake up call was answered

A wake up call was not answered

A wake up call was cancelled

A guest has checked into a room

A guest has checked out of a room

A room has been flagged as AVAILABLE

A room has been flagged as OCCUPIED

A room has been flagged as NEEDS CLEANING

A room has been flagged as NEED MAINTENANCE

A room has been flagged as HOLD

CONDITIONS

This function can be used only when the Hotel function is enabled in MMC 813, HOTEL

OPERATION.

ENTERING CHARACTERS

Refer to ENTERING CHARACTERS in MMC 104, STATION NAME.

Samsung Business Communications

2-273

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

DEFAULT DATA

NO ENTRIES

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 760.

Display shows:

2. Enter valid code number (e.g., 02) via dial keypad.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter item name (e.g., ROOM COST) via keypad

4. Press Right Soft button to move cursor to tax entries.

5. Enter the tax rates that apply to this item (‘1’ selects each rate) and press Right Soft button to return to

ITEM CODE (00)

NAME:RM Deposit

ITEM CODE (02)

NAME:

ITEM CODE (02)

NAME: ROOM COST

ITEM CODE (02)

TAXES:00000000

ITEM CODE (02)

TAXES:11000000

6. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 761 TAX RATE SETUP

Samsung Business Communications

2-274

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[761] TAX RATE SETUP

This MMC allows the technician to set up the eight tax rates used in MMC 760. Each tax rate may be defined as a fixed value or as a percentage of the item cost. In addition, a 10- character name may be used to define the reason for the tax. The options are detailed below.

Option

TAX RATE

TYPE

VALUE

NAME

Description

The number assigned to this tax rate. Tax rates are numbered 1 to 8 to match the rate field in MMC 760, counting from left to right.

The type of tax. Defines if the VALUE is applied as a percentage (%) of the cost of an item (e.g. service charge) or is added as a fixed currency value (C) to an item or is applied as a Inclusive VAT percentage (I) of the cost of an item.

The actual tax rate that will be applied to the item cost.

A 10-character name that will be displayed on the room bill alongside the tax.

CONDITIONS

This function can be used only when the Hotel function is enabled in MMC 813, HOTEL

OPERATION.

ENTERING CHARACTERS

Refer to ENTERING CHARACTERS in MMC 104, STATION NAME.

DEFAULT DATA

ALL RATES ARE %

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 761.

Display shows:

2. Enter valid tax number, e.g., 2, via dial keypad.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Dial 0 for ‘%’, 1 for ‘C’ or 2 for ‘I’.

(Refer to table above)

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

TAX RATE (1)

TYPE:% VAL:00.00

TAX RATE (2)

TYPE:% VAL:00.00

TAX RATE (2)

TYPE:C VAL:00.00

Samsung Business Communications

2-275

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

4. Enter the tax rate or value via dial keypad.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection.

If valid entry, system advances cursor.

5. Enter name and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

6. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 760 ITEM COST TABLE

TAX RATE (2)

TYPE:C VAL:01.25

TAX RATE (2)

NAME:MIA BED

Samsung Business Communications

2-276

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[762] ROOM COST RATE

This MMC allows the technician to set up the cost rates for the week. Each room cost rate can be assigned with a percentage of the actual room cost from Sunday to Saturday.

EXAMPLE: If you set SUN: 150 %, 1. MON: 100 %, 2.TUE: 090 % ...

Then, if you set £100 as the room cost when checking in a guest, the real room cost will be

£150 on Sunday, £100 on Monday and £90 on Tuesday.

CONDITIONS

This function can be used only when the Hotel function is enabled in MMC 813, HOTEL

OPERATION.

DEFAULT DATA

ALL RATES ARE 100 %

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 762.

Display shows:

2. Dial day number 0-6 (e.g., 2)

OR

Press Volume button to select day and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter room cost rate (001-999, e.g., 090)

RM COST RAT(SUN)

100% :

RM COST RAT(TUE)

100% :

RM COST RAT(TUE)

100% :090

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 760 ITEM COST TABLE

Samsung Business Communications

2-277

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[763] SECOND LCR

This option allows a user to get dial tone returned after the LCR code is dialled, and allows multiple LCR codes to be used. The procedure is as follows:

The user dials E-LCR code £ system returns dial tone £ user dials required number £ system checks number £ if the number matches, the call is routed to the required destination; if the number does not match, the call is routed according to MMC710 for normal

LCR manipulation and routing.

Option Description Range

IN DIGIT

OUT DIGIT

USE LCR NUM

NEXT ROUTE

Digits dialled after the E-LCR CODE.

Translation of IN DIGIT entry.

Used to specify which E-LCR code the IN DIGIT number matches. If ALL is selected the IN DIGIT number is valid for all

E-LCR codes.

Input the trunk group to send the call to. If LCR is selected the modified number is sent to MMC710.

Max 16 digits

Max 16 digits

ALL,

E-LCR1, E-LCR2,

E-LCR3, E-LCR4

LCR, Trunk Group

Number

CONDITIONS

MMC 724 FEATURE CODE : E-LCR1, E-LCR2, E-LCR3, E-LCR4

.

DEFAULT DATA

USE LCR NUM : ALL

NEXT ROUTE : LCR

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 763.

Display shows:

2. Dial Table number 001-200

OR

Press Volume button to select Table number and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter IN DIGIT value (maximum 16 digits) and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. Enter OUT DIGIT option number (1)

OR

Press Volume button to select OUT DIGIT and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

(001)IN DIGIT

(001)IN DIGIT

(001)IN DIGIT

1234

(001)OUT DIGIT

Samsung Business Communications

2-278

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

5. Enter OUT DIGIT value (maximum 16 digits) and press Right Soft button to move cursor

6. Enter USE LCR NUM option number (2)

OR

Press Volume button to select USE LCR NUM and press Right Soft button to move cursor

7. Enter USE LCR NUM value (maximum 16 digits) and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

8. Enter NEXT ROUTE option number (3)

OR

Press Volume button to select NEXT ROUTE and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

9. Enter NEXT ROUTE and press Right Soft button to move cursor

10. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 310 LCR CLASS

MMC 711 LCR TIME

MMC 712 LCR ROUTE

MMC 713 LCR MODF. DGT

MMC 724 NUMBER PLAN

(001)OUT DIGIT

7500

(001)USE LCR NUM

(001)USE LCR NUM

9

(001)NEXT ROUTE

(001)NEXT ROUTE

LCR

Samsung Business Communications

2-279

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[800] ENABLE TECHNICIAN PROGRAM

Used to open and close technician-level programming. If programming is not opened and an attempt is made to access a system MMC, an error message will be displayed.

CONDITIONS

A 4-digit passcode is required to access this MMC. Each character can be digits 0-9. When opened, this MMC enables access to all MMCs.

DEFAULT DATA

DISABLE

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 800.

Display shows:

ENABLE TECH.PROG

PASSCODE:

ENABLE TECH.PROG

PASSCODE:

∗∗∗∗

ENABLE TECH.PROG

DISABLE TENANT:1

Incorrect code shows:

3. Enter 1 to enable or 0 to disable.

OR

Press Volume button to select and press

Right Soft button to move tenant number and

ENABLE TECH. PROG

PASSCODE ERROR

ENABLE TECH.PROG

ENABLE TENANT:1 enter tenant number (1-2).

4. Press Speaker button to advance to MMC entry level. 801:TEC.PASSCODE

SELECT PROG.ID

5. Enter the MMC required to begin programming

6. To log out and return to MMC 800, press Volume button to select DISABLE.

OR

Press Speaker button then Transfer button to return to normal display. Programming option will time out.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 801 CHANGE TECHNICIAN PASSCODE

Samsung Business Communications

2-280

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[801] CHANGE TECHNICIAN PASSCODE

Used to change the passcode which allows access to MMC 800, Enable Technician Program, from its current value.

CONDITIONS

The passcode is four characters long. Each character can be digits 0-9. The current or old passcode is required for this MMC.

DEFAULT DATA

DEFAULT PASSCODE: 4321

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 801.

2. Enter new passcode.

3. Enter new passcode again.

4. If passcode is correct, press Right Soft key to continue and enter desired MMC.

If passcode is incorrect.

System returns to step 2.

TECH. PASSCODE

NEW CODE:_

TECH. PASSCODE

NEW CODE:

∗∗∗∗

TECH. PASSCODE

VERIFY :

∗∗∗∗

TECH. PASSCODE

VERIFY :SUCCESS

TECH. PASSCODE

VERIFY :FAILURE

TECH. PASSCODE

NEW CODE:

∗∗∗∗

5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 800 ENABLE TECHNICIAN PROGRAM

Samsung Business Communications

2-281

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[802] CUSTOMER ACCESS MMC NUMBER

Allows the System Administrator (customer) to have access to certain MMCs. For example, it is required that the customer has access to MMC 102, Call Forward, for call forwarding but it is not required that the customer has access to MMC 710, LCR Digit Table, for LCR dial plans.

This MMC is for both tenants.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 802.

Display shows:

2. Enter desired tenant number (1-2) via dial keypad.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter desired MMC number via dial keypad.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. Enter 1 for YES or 0 for NO via dial keypad.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Left Soft button to return to step 3 to make additional entries.

5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

CUST.USE MMC :1

100:STN LOCK:YES

CUST.USE MMC :1

100:STN LOCK:YES

CUST.USE MMC :1

102:CALL FWD:YES

CUST.USE MMC :1

102:CALL FWD:NO

Samsung Business Communications

2-282

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[803] ASSIGN TENANT GROUP

Allows the assignment of tenant groups on a per-chassis, slot and port basis. The simple rule is Chassis-Slot-Port = Tenant. The simplicity of this program allows for flexible assignments. The only information needed is the correct correlation of entries.

DEFAULT DATA

ALL ASSIGNMENTS: TENANT 1

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 803.

Display shows:

2. Enter chassis number (if no change, press

Right Soft button to move cursor).

3. Enter slot number (if no change press Right

Soft button to move cursor).

4. Enter port number (if no change press

Right Soft button to move cursor).

5. Enter tenant number (if no change press

Right Soft button to return to step 2).

6. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

TENANT GROUP

C:1 S:1 -01 T:1

TENANT GROUP

C:1 S:1 –01 T:1

TENANT GROUP

C:1 S:2 -01 T:1

TENANT GROUP

C:1 S:2 -03 T:1

TENANT GROUP

C:1 S:2 -03 T:2

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-283

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[805] TX LEVEL AND GAIN

Allows the system administrator to set the base level of TX volume on phones. There are eight levels that can be controlled by the Volume buttons on phones, and 10 controllable levels in the system. This MMC allows the system administrator to classify any desired eight levels within 11.

No

0

1

Option

TX LEVEL CONTROL

MISC TSW GAIN

2 TSW GAIN

CONTROL

Description

Adjusts the transmitting sensitivity (max.: 9) Default values are:

INDEX: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

LEVEL: 0 1 2 4 3 5 6 7

Adjusts the level of the internal music source of the MP40 card or the external music source of the MIS module (0~7, higher numbers mean lower levels). Default value is 0.

Adjusts the tone sensitivity. There are eight types of matrix connections of the T-Switch that adjust the tone sensitivity (0-7, below).

Connection between Trunk lines are only applicable when set as 0 in MMC 421.

0 DGP DLI phone

1 SLT SLI phone

2 ATRK Analogue trunk

3 DTRK Digital trunk

4 DECT DECT terminal

5 VOIP MGI port or IP-based phone

6 SVMi SVMi port

7 WLAN WIP port

DEFAULT DATA

RX

Do not change the default levels in this MMC without the assistance of

Technical Support.

DGP SLT ATRK DTRK DECT VOIP SVMi WLAN

TX

DGPÆ 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 -6.0 0.0 -6.0 +1.9

DECTÆ

VOIPÆ

SVMiÆ

WLANÆ

Samsung Business Communications

0.0

0.0

0.0

-6.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

-2.5

0.0

0.0

0.0

-6.0

+1.9 -6.0 0.0 -6.0 0.0

0.0 -6.0 0.0 -6.0 0.0

0.0 -6.0 0.0 -6.0 0.0

0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 +1.9

2-284

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 805.

Display shows:

2. Press Volume button to make selection (0-3) and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. (When the TX LEVEL CONTROL is selected)

(a). Select the desired volume level via dial keypad.

OR

Press Volume button to go to the next volume level and press Right Soft button.

(b). Enter desired volume data via dial keypad.

OR

4. (When the MISC TSW GAIN is selected)

Enter desired MISC/BGM TSW gain via dial keypad.

OR

Press Volume button to select desired MISC/BGM

TSW gain and press Right Soft button.

5. (When the TSW GAIN CONTROL is selected)

(a). Select the TX TWS connect type via dial keypad.

OR

Press Volume button to go to the next TX TSW

(b). connect type and press Right Soft button.

Select the RX TSW connect type via dial keypad.

OR

Press Volume button to go to the next RX TSW connect type and press Right Soft button.

(c). Enter desired TSW gain control data via dial keypad.

OR

Press Volume button to scroll data and press

Right Soft button.

6. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

TX LEVEL CONTROL

LEVEL 0

Æ0

TX LEVEL CONTROL

LEVEL 1

Æ1

TX LEVEL CONTROL

LEVEL 1

Æ1

TX LEVEL CONTROL

LEVEL 1

Æ3

MISC TSW GAIN

BGM/MOH :0

TSW GAIN CONTROL

SLT

ÆDGP :+0.0

TSW GAIN CONTROL

SLT

ÆATRK:+0.0

TSW GAIN CONTROL

SLT

ÆATRK:+1.9

Samsung Business Communications

2-285

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications

2-286

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[806] CARD PRE-INSTALL

Allows the pre-programming of a module slot for a specific module type. A module inserted into a system will not be recognized by the system until it is enabled using this

MMC. Modules installed using this MMC will not be assigned in the system numbering plan—you should use MMC 724 to assign the desired directory numbers to extensions, trunks, ports or miscellaneous functions.

If a module is removed and a different one inserted, and this MMC is performed, the memory associated with the previous module (e.g., key programming) will be erased.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 806.

Display shows:

2. Enter chassis number via dial keypad (e.g., 1)

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button.

3. Enter slot number via dial keypad (e.g., 6)

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button.

4. Dial 1 for YES to reset module or dial 0 for NO.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button.

5. Dial 1 for YES to reset module or dial 0 for NO.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button.

C:1–S:1

8 DLI

Æ8 DLI

C:1–S:1

8 DLI

Æ8 DLI

C:1–S:6

16 DLI

Æ16 DLI

C:1–S:6

RESET CARD ? NO

C:1–S:6

ARE YOU SURE?NO

Samsung Business Communications

2-287

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming

6. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 724 DIAL NUMBERING PLAN

OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications

2-288

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[807] PHONE VOLUME CONTROL

Allows the system administrator to set phone volume levels.

Phone Volume Level

No

0

1

KEY TONE VOL

SIDETONE VOL

Type No

0

1

FX

Type

LINE VOLUME

SPEAKER VOLUME

3

4

MIC TX LEVEL

NOISE GUARD

3

4

MIC LP ATTEN

ACOU DECOUPL

9 MIN RX VOL (28D, 12L, 21D, ITP)

Do not change the default levels in this MMC without the assistance of

Technical Support.

DEFAULT DATA

DEPENDS ON PHONE TYPE (SHOWN FOR 21D)

21D

Type

KEY TONE VOL

SIDETONE VOL

HANDSET TX

MIC TX LEVEL

NOISE GUARD

NOISE THRES

ALC THRES

TX/RX THRES.

TX/RX COMP

MIN RX VOL

1

7

3

8

3

5

6

1

1

4

Default Type

LINE VOLUME

SPEAKER VOLUME

NOR.LP ATTEN

MIC LP ATTEN

ACOU DECOUPL

ELEC DECOUPL

T/R RATIO

R/T RATIO

FX

8

2

5

8

2

3

14

4

Default

Samsung Business Communications

2-289

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 807.

Display shows:

2. Enter phone type via dial keypad.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter volume item via dial keypad.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. Enter volume data via dial keypad.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to save and return to step 3.

5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

VOL.CONTROL:US24

KEY TONE VOL:1

VOL.CONTROL:EU24

KEY TONE VOL:1

VOL.CONTROL:EU24

SIDETONE VOL:1

VOL.CONTROL:EU24

HANDSET TX :6

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-290

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[810] HALT PROCESSING

Used only in the event that all data processing needs to be stopped either in a single chassis slot or in the entire system.

DEFAULT DATA

PROC

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 810.

Display shows:

2. Enter chassis selection via dial keypad.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance cursor.

OR

Select all chassis and slots (and go to step 4).

HALT/PROCESSING

C:ALL S:ALL

ÆPROC

HALT/PROCESSING

C:1 S:ALL

ÆPROC

HALT/PROCESSING

C:ALL S:ALL

ÆPROC

HALT/PROCESSING

C:1 S:2

ÆPROC

3. Enter slot number via dial keypad.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance cursor.

4. Enter 1 for HALT or 0 for PROC.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to enter and return to step 2.

5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-291

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[811] RESET SYSTEM

Provides a means of restarting the system. The system can simply be reset or it can be reset and all memory cleared to default values.

Extreme care should be taken when using this MMC. If the system is restarted, all voice/data connections are dropped. If memory is cleared, all customer data is deleted and the system returns to default status.

No

0

1

2

Type Description

RESET SYSTEM System reset only with Smart Media read.

CLEAR MEMORY System reset and make default system with Smart Media read.

FAST RESTART System reset only without Smart Media read.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 811.

Display shows:

2. Enter reset type (0-2) via dial keypad.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button.

4. Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button.

If memory is cleared, system will return with default time and date and default extension numbers.

If system is reset only, it will return to normal programmed status.

SYSTEM RESTART

RESET SYSTEM?NO

SYSTEM RESTART

CLEAR MEMORY?NO

SYSTEM RESTART

CLEAR MEMORY?YES

SYSTEM RESTART

ARE YOU SURE?YES

Samsung Business Communications

2-292

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications

2-293

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[812] SET COUNTRY CODE

Selects the country for correct system programming and operation.

This MMC must be run by the installing technician before any other programming is done.

Do not change the default values in this MMC without the assistance of

Technical Support.

If you change the country selection, the system will restart and all customer data returns to the default status of the selected country.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 812.

Display shows:

2. Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button.

3. Press Volume button to select YES or NO and press Right Soft button.

SELECT COUNTRY

Undefined

SELECT COUNTRY

U.K.

DEFAULTING SYSTM

ARE YOU SURE?NO

if you select ‘YES’, this will restart the system and all data will be reset to default values.

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 811 RESET SYSTEM

Samsung Business Communications

2-294

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[813] HOTEL OPERATION

Allows the installing technician to enable the HOTEL feature.

DEFAULT DATA

DISABLE

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 813.

Display shows:

2. Dial 1 for ENABLE or 0 for DISABLE.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button.

3. Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button.

4. Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button.

5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

HOTEL OPERATION

DISABLE

HOTEL OPERATION

ENABLE

HOTEL OPERATION

CHANGE NOW ? NO

HOTEL OPERATION

ARE YOU SURE?YES

RELATED ITEMS

Hotel Related MMCs

MMC 221

MMC 222

MMC 513

MMC 760

MMC 761

MMC 762

EXTENSION TYPE

FAX PAIR

HOTEL TIMER

ITEM COST TABLE

TAX RATE SETUP

ROOM COST RATE

Samsung Business Communications

2-295

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[815] CUSTOMER DATABASE COPY

This enables the on-board customer database (SRAM) to be copied to the Smart Media card database (SMDB) and also allows the SMDB to be copied to the SRAM. A daily save can be programmed to automatically save the SRAM to the SMDB. This ensures that an up-to-date database is always available in case of a catastrophic failure. A daily save time of 00:00 means that no daily save is performed.

It is recommended that the SMDB is cleared before the SRAM is copied to it. When the

SRAM is copied to the SMDB there is no interruption in service. If the SMDB is copied to the SRAM, the system will be reset to accept the new data.

SMDB (Smart Media card database)

Option Description

S:mm/dd/yy hh:mm

CLEAR SMDB

COPY TO SRAM

Indicates the time the database was saved to the SMDB

Clear SMDB

Copy SMDB to SRAM

SRAM (MP on-board database)

Option Description

S:mm/dd/yy hh:mm Indicates the time the SRAM was last saved

COPY TO SMDB Copy SRAM to SMDB

DAILY SAVE hh:mm The time the SRAM will be saved to the SMDB

A 16 or 32 MB Smart Media card must be installed in order to copy the SRAM to the SMDB.

DEFAULT DATA

DAILY SAVE 00:00 (no daily save)

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 815.

Display shows:

CUST DBASE:SMDB

S:12/01/01 00:00

If the Smart Media card is in use, the display shows:

CUST DBASE:SMDB

SMART IS BUSY

2. Press Right Soft button to move cursor. CUST DBASE:SMDB

S:12/01/01 00:00

Samsung Business Communications

2-296

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming

3. Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. Press Volume button to select YES or NO and press Right Soft button.

5. Press Volume button to select YES or NO and press Right Soft button.

If you select YES, the display shows.

6. Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

7. Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

8. Input save time.

OR

Press Right Soft button to move cursor.

9. Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

10. Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to make changes and return to

11. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

CUST DBASE:SMDB

CLEAR SMDB :NO

CUST DBASE:SMDB

CLEAR SMDB :YES

CUST DBASE:SMDB

ARE YOU SURE?NO

CUST DBASE:SMDB

Cleared....

CUST DBASE:SRAM

DAILY SAVE:00:00

CUST DBASE:SRAM

DAILY SAVE:00:00

CUST DBASE:SRAM

DAILY SAVE:23:30

CUST DBASE:SRAM

COPY TO SMDB:NO

CUST DBASE:SRAM

ARE YOU SURE?:YES

Samsung Business Communications

2-297

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[816] CONFERENCE GAIN

Adjusts the gain level for conference calls.

Do not change the default levels in this MMC without the assistance of

Technical Support.

DEFAULT DATA

YES

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 816.

Display shows:

2. Press Volume button to select YES or NO and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

CONFERENCE GAIN

USE DEFAULT : YES

CONFERENCE GAIN

USE DEFAULT : YES

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-298

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[818] PROGRAM DOWNLOAD

Change the system version by downloading the new version stored on the Smart Media card to the MP40 and TEPRI modules.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 818.

Display shows:

2. Press Volume button to select program type and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Press chassis number (1~3) to download program

4. Press Volume button to select YES and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

PGM DOWNLOAD

MCP:MPE08301.PGM

PGM DOWNLOAD

LP4:LP450824.PGM

LP40 PGM:C1

DOWNLOAD NOW?NO

LP40 PGM:C1

DOWNLOAD NOW?YES

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-299

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[819] SMART MEDIA FILE CONTROL

Displays the size (in bytes) of various system program files on the Smart Media card. Also allows deletion of a file by selecting the file and pressing the Hold button on the phone.

Files included in Smart Media are described below:

File Name Description

STARTUP.INI

MPExxxxx.PGM Program for MP40 module. Since the MP40 program is not installed on the

MP40 module itself, at least one MP40 program must be included in Smart

Media to start the system

LP4xxxxx.PGM

If you designate an MP40 program in MMC 818, related data are saved in this file.

This file is initially not included but is created when the above programs are selected at MMC 818.

PR2xxxxx.PGM

LP40 program. The LP40 program is installed on the module itself. The one included in Smart Media is used for software version upgrade.

TEPRI2 program. The TEPRI2 program is installed on the module itself. The one included in Smart Media is used for software version upgrade

PRIxxxxx.PGM TEPRI program. The TEPRI program is installed on the module itself. The one included in Smart Media is used for software version upgrade.

DATABASE.ENT This file is created in Smart Media when DB is saved to SMDB by MMC 815.

Initially not included, this file is created only when SMDB is created by MMC

815.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 819.

Display shows:

2. Press Volume button to select program type and press Hold button to move cursor to delete option

3. Dial 1 for YES (delete) or 0 for NO.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button (cursor returns to step 2).

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

STARTUP.INI sz:512 bytes

MPE08301.PGM sz:14418432 bytes

MPE08301.PGM

DELETE FILE? NO

Samsung Business Communications

2-300

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications

2-301

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[820] ASSIGN SYSTEM LINK ID

This MMC is used to assign the system link ID for PRI and VoIP networking. Up to 100 link IDs can be entered including SELF ID. In addition, each Link ID is associated with the

IP address and IP address type of the MP40 module for that system.

Option

LINK ID

SIGNAL G/W

IP TYPE

Description

System ID for networking feature.

System IP address for VoIP networking

System IP address type for VoIP networking. SELF system IP address type determines ‘SYSTEM IP TYPE’ in MMC 830.

CONDITIONS

‘SELF’ represents self-node, and must be set to use the networking function. Items other than ‘SELF’ are used for station numbers and can be omitted.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 820.

Display shows:

2. Enter SELF link ID via dial keypad and press Right Soft button.

3. Press Volume button to select other link ID and press Right Soft button to mover cursor.

4. Enter other link ID via dial keypad and press Right Soft button.

5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 821

MMC 823

MMC 824

MMC 830

ASSIGN NETWORK TRUNK

ASSIGN NETWORK COS

NETWORK DIAL TRANSLATION

ETHERNET PARAMETERS

SELF :LINK ID

SELF :LINK ID

11

SYS01:LINK ID

SYS01:LINK ID

22

Samsung Business Communications

2-302

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[821] ASSIGN NETWORK TRUNK

Assigns the Q-signalling PRI trunk for networking. It is assigned data on a per-TEPRI module basis.

DEFAULT DATA

NORMAL

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 821.

Display shows:

2. Enter first trunk number of PRI module.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter 0 for NORMAL, or 1 for Q-SIGNALLING.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to save and move cursor.

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

[701] Q-SIG TRK

NORMAL

[701] Q-SIG TRK

NORMAL

[701] Q-SIG TRK

Q-SIGNALLING

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-303

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[822] VIRTUAL EXTENSION TYPE

Assigns the virtual extension port type.

No. Port Type

00 SLT

Description

Emulates SLI port

01

02

24 BTN SET

12 BTN SET

24 button phone

12 button phone

03

04

05

06

07

08

7 BTN SET

6 BTN SET

28 BTN SET

18 BTN SET

8 BTN SET

38 BTN SET

7 button phone

6 button phone

28 button phone

18 button phone

8 button phone

38 button phone

09

10

21 BTN SET

14 BTN SET

21 button phone

14 button phone

12

13

14

7 BTN LCD

0 BTN LCD

DEFAULT DATA

3501-3522 : SLT

3401-3440: 21 BTN SET

7 button LCD phone

0 button LCD phone

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 822.

Display shows:

2.

Enter virtual extension number.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

OR

3.

Select all ports

Enter virtual extension type

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to save and move cursor.

[3501]PORT TYPE

SLT

[3501] PORT TYPE

SLT

[ALL] PORT TYPE

SLT

[3501] PORT TYPE

SLT

Samsung Business Communications

2-304

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-305

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[823] ASSIGN NETWORK COS

Assigns the class of service for networking.

No Option

01 CALL OFFER

04 CC SIG CONN

05 CC SVC RETN

06 CCBS

07 CCNR

08 CFB

09 CFNR

10 CFU

11 CI

12 CI CAPABIL

14 CI PROTECT

23 CONP LEVEL

26 CT RE-ROUTE

Description

Call Offer

CC Retention of Signal Connection

CC Service Retention

Call Completion to Busy Subscriber

Call Completion on No Reply

Call Forward Busy

Call Forward No Reply

Call Forward Unconditional

Intrusion Capability Level (1~3)

Intrusion Protection Level (0~3)

CONP Level (0: none, 1: Alert, 2: Busy, 3: Both)

Transfer By Rerouting

28 DNDO

29 DNDO CAPABL

30 DNDO PROTEC

31 PAGE

32 PATH REPL.

33 PATH RETEN

CONDITIONS

NONE

DEFAULT DATA

SEE DESCRIPTION

Do Not Disturb Override

DNDO Capability Level (0~3)

DNDO Protection Level (1~3)

PAGE

Path Replacement

Path Retention

Default

2

2

3

N

N

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

N

N

Y

Y

Y

N

2

2

Samsung Business Communications

2-306

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 823.

Display shows:

2. Dial the class of service number(01-30).

OR

Press Volume button to select and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Dial the feature number.

OR

Press Volume button to select and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. Enter 0 for NO, or 1 for YES.

OR

Press Volume button to select YES or NO and

Press Right Soft button to store data.

5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

NETWORK COS (01)

01:CALL OFFER :Y

NETWORK COS (02)

01:CALL OFFER :Y

NETWORK COS (02)

03:CC PATH RSV:Y

NETWORK COS (01)

03:CC PATH RSV:N

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 301 ASSIGN STATION COS

Samsung Business Communications

2-307

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[824] NETWORK DIAL TRANSLATION

Assigns the digit translation table used for networking. Generally, under networking conditions, you must dial the node ID and extension number to call the another node extension.

In this MMC, the system provides a simple digit translation so that the user need only dial the extension number to call the station on the other node. The access digit needs to be programmed in MMC 724 (‘NTWK LCR DIAL NO.’ option) first. The system allows 96 entries for network dial translation.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 824.

Display shows:

2. Dial the entry number.

OR

Press Volume button to select and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter digit string for access to node (max. 8 digits) and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. Enter number of digits user will dial (e.g. 3 for 3digit extension).

OR

Press Volume button to select and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

5. Enter max. number of digits system will dial

OR

Press Volume button to select and press

6.

Right Soft button to move cursor.

Enter YES/NO to display other node extension in internal extension number format.

OR

Press Volume button to select and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

01:601

Æ

SIZE:0 MAX:00

01:601

Æ_

SIZE:0 MAX:00

01:601

Æ60201

SIZE:0 MAX:00

01:601

Æ60201

SIZE:3 MAX:00

01:601

Æ60201

SIZE:3 MAX:08

01:601

Æ60201

DISP:N MBX:N

Samsung Business Communications

2-308

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

7. Enter YES/NO to assign Mailbox to remote extension automatically.

OR

Press Volume button to select and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

8. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

01:601

Æ60201

DISP:Y MBX:N

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 710

MMC 724

MMC 820

LCR DIGIT TABLE

DIAL NUMBERING PLAN

ASSIGN SYSTEM LINK ID

Samsung Business Communications

2-309

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[825] ASSIGN NETWORKING OPTIONS

Assigns the options used for networking.

No Option Description

0 ADD NUMBER TO NAME Assign to includes the extension number in the name field of

Q-SIG standard message.

1 USE REMOTE VM

2 REMOTE VM NUMBER

Assign to use SVMi on remote system.

Assign to access number of remote SVMi when the Remote

VM is used.

3 REMOTE CID NUMB

4 USE REMOTE ATTN

5 REMOTE ATTN NUMB

Assign to use delete node number when CID number send to

SVMi.

Use Attendant on remote system (RING 1-6, Y/N)

6 SPNET DIGIT SEND

Access number of remote Attendant when the remote Attendant is used (RING 1-6)

Specify by which method dialled digits are sent across the network.

DEFAULT DATA

ADD NUMB TO NAME: YES

USE REMOTE VM: NO

REMOTE VM NUMBER: NONE

REMOTE CID NUMB: YES

USE REMOTE ATTN: NO

REMOTE ATTN NUMB: NONE

SPNET DIGIT SEND: MGI SIGNALLING

Samsung Business Communications

2-310

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 825.

Display shows:

2. Dial the option number.

OR

Press Volume button to select and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO.

OR

Press Volume button to select YES/NO and press Right Soft button to mover cursor.

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

ADD NUMB TO NAME

YES

USE REMOTE VM

NO

USE REMOTE VM

YES

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-311

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[826] ASSIGN SYSTEM REFERENCE CLOCK

The system clock may be synchronized with an external clock source from the TEPRI or

BRI module, or it can use the internal clock source.

This MMC can assign the system clock source priority when the external clock source is used.

DEFAULT DATA

PRIORITY 1: C1-S0

PRIORITY 2: C1-S1

PRIORITY 3: C1-S3

PRIORITY 4: C1-S4

PRIORITY 5: C1-S5

PRIORITY 6: C1-S6

PRIORITY 7: C1-S7

PRIORITY 8: C1-S8

PRIORITY 9: C1-S9

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 826.

Display shows:

2. Dial the priority number (1-6).

OR

Press Volume button to select and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

REFERENCE CLOCK

PRIORITY 1:C1-S3

REFERENCE CLOCK

PRIORITY 1:C1-S3

3. Dial the priority data.

OR

Press Volume button to select and Press

REFERENCE CLOCK

PRIORITY 1:C1-S3

Right Soft button to store.

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-312

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[827] CRM DSP MODE SELECT

The CRM module has two DSPs and each DSP is operated in one of the modes DTMFR,

R2MFC, or CID. This MMC assigns the DSP mode.

CONDITION

A CRM module must be mounted on the LP40 module. If there is no CRM module, ‘NO

CRM’ is displayed.

DEFAULT DATA

DSP1: DTMFR, DSP2:DTMFR

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 827.

Display shows:

2. Dial the chassis number (1-3).

OR

Press Volume button to select and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Dial the LOC number (1-2).

OR

Press Volume button to select and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. Dial the DSP number (1-2).

OR

C:1-LOC:1-DSP:1

DTMFR

ÆDTMFR

C:1-LOC:1-DSP:1

DTMFR

ÆDTMFR

C:1-LOC:1-DSP:1

DTMFR

ÆDTMFR

C:1-LOC:1-DSP:1

DTMFR

ÆDTMFR

Press Volume button to select and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

5. Dial digit to select DSP mode (0-2).

OR

Press Volume button to select and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

6. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

C:1-LOC:1-DSP:1

DTMFR

ÆDTMFR

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-313

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[829] LAN PRINTER PARAMETERS

This program sets the various parameters required for printing to a LAN-connected device.

The data listed below can be printed.

01. SMDR

02. UCD REPORT

03. TRAFFIC REPORT

04. ALARM REPORT

05. UCD VIEW

06. PERIODIC UCD

07. HOTEL REPORT

08. PMS

The items that are set in this program are:

Description No Option Default

00 DATA

01 CURR STATUS OFF

02 EMPTY BUFF NO

03 UPDATE LAN

04 DESTINATION

05 PRINTER IP

NO

OFF

200.1.1.1

06 PRINTER TCP

07 LAN TCP

10010

10020

08 RETRY COUNT 03

09 RETRY WAIT 010 sec

10 PJL ENABLE FALSE

11 LANGUAGE

12 PAPER SIZE

RAW

A4

13 FONT TYPE COURIER

14 DUPLEX ENAB FALSE

Current status of the LAN printer

Prints all data left in the buffer

Applies modified values set in this MMC

Data transmit destination (Off, Printer, PC, Both)

The IP address of the LAN printer

The TCP port of the printer

LAN TCP port

Re-transmit attempt count (00~10)

Wait time for re-transmit (005~250 sec)

Sets PJL (0. FALSE, 1. TRUE)

Printer language (0. RAW, 1. PCL, 2. PS)

Paper size (0. A4, 1. LETTER)

Font type (0.COURIER, 1.TIMES NEW ROMAN)

Sets duplex (0. FALSE, 1. TRUE)

16 PRINT TRAY DEFAULT

17 RESOLUTION 300

18 LINE/PAGE 60

Printer tray (0.Default, 1.Tray1, 2.Tray2, 3.Manual)

Resolution (0.300, 1.600)

Samsung Business Communications

2-314

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

DEFAULT DATA

SEE DESCRIPTION

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 829.

Display shows:

2. Enter type of data to be printed.

OR

Press Volume button to select the type and press the Right Soft button to move the cursor.

3. Enter the item number

OR

Press Volume button to select the item and press the Right Soft button to move the cursor.

4. Select the data.

OR

Press Volume to select the data and press

Right Soft button to move the cursor.

5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

[01] DATA TYPE

SMDR

[02] DATA TYPE

UCD REPORT

[02] PRINTER IP

200. 1. 1. 1

[02] PRINTER IP

168.219. 83.101

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-315

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[830] ETHERNET PARAMETERS

This MMC provides a means to configure the Internet Protocol (IP) addressing of the

MP40 module.

No Parameter Description

00 SYSTEM IP ADDR Specifies the IP address for the MP40 module.

01 SYSTEM GATEWAY Specifies the designated gateway IP address used for contacting

IP devices beyond the local network subnet.

02 SYSTEM NET MASK Specifies the IP subnet mask.

This parameter is used by the system to calculate the range of IP devices (subnet) that are within ‘direct reach’ of the MP40 (without having to go through the designated network IP gateway).

03 SYSTEM RESET

04 SYSTEM IP TYPE

Prompt to reset system MP40 when system IP address is changed. This reset is same as FAST RESTART in MMC 811.

Specifies if the system will be routing data over a public or private network.

05 SYSTEM PUBLIC IP The MP40 will originate communications to IP phones and VoIP connections outside the local network using this IP address. Communications to/from this IP will require involvement of the MGI module. The system identifies communications to/from this address as ‘public’. This allows devices, on remote networks/subnets, to establish communications with the system, without exposing the

LAN. See ‘SYSTEM IP TYPE’.

MODE

Specifies if the MP40 module is automatically assigned an IP address from the Data Server.

08 SYSTEM MAC ADDR For reference, and cannot be changed. The unique hardware

(MAC) address of the MP40 module.

09 SYSTEM IP VERS

10 DATA SERVER IP

11 FEATURE SVR IP

12 PCMMC ADDRESS

13 SM MANAGER IP

Specify the system IP address is IPv4/IPv6

IP address of Data Server

IP address of separate Feature Server

When the system wants to connect to PC programming, it will be sent to this IP address for a connection message. (Reserved for future use.)

Not used.

14 CTI SERVER ADDR IP address of CTI Server

17 NEWS ADDRESS IP address of News Server

Samsung Business Communications

2-316

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

ETHERNET

- The first three parameters: SYSTEM IP ADDR, SYSTEM GATEWAY, and SYS-

TEM NET MASK are stored separately from the main system database and thus will not be defaulted when MMC811 ‘CLEAR MEMORY’ is performed. Furthermore, any changes to these parameters will not be applied until the MP40 is reset.

- When changing any IP address/value, three digits must be entered for each (octet) field. For example 192.168.1.10 should be entered as: 192 168 001 010.

CONDITIONS y y

This MMC must be used if there are ITP phones and/or MGI modules on the system.

After changing Ethernet parameters, restart the system to apply the new settings.

DEFAULT DATA

SYSTEM IP ADDR: 165.213.97.185

SYSTEM GATEWAY: 165.213.97.1

SYSTEM NET MASK: 255.255.255.0

SYSTEM RESET: NO

SYSTEM IP TYPE: PRIVATE IP ONLY

SYSTEM PUBLIC IP: 1.1.1.1

SYSTEM DHCP MODE: STATIC

SYSTEM MAC ADDR: CARD DEPENDENT

DATA SERVER IP: 0.0.0.0

FEATURE SVR IP: 0.0.0.0

PCMMC ADDRESS: 168.219.1.101

SM MANAGER IP: 0.0.0.0

CTI SERVER ADDR: 0.0.0.0

NEWS ADDR: 0.0.0.0

Samsung Business Communications

2-317

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 830.

Display shows the system IP address.

2. Press Volume button to make selection and

Press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Using the keypad, enter 3-digit IP numbers

(e.g. 192 168 001 010 for 192.168.1.10).

Cursor will return to step 1 upon completion of IP address entry.

4. Press Volume button to make selection and

Press Right Soft button to move cursor.

5. Using the keypad, enter 3-digit IP numbers

(e.g. 192 168 001 001 for 192.168.1.1)

Cursor will return to this step on completion of system gateway entry.

6. Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

7. Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to store and move cursor.

8. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

SYSTEM IP ADDR

165.213. 97.185

SYSTEM IP ADDR

165.213. 97.185

SYSTEM IP ADDR

192.168.001.010

SYSTEM GATEWAY

165.213. 97. 1

SYSTEM GATEWAY

192.168.001.001

SYSTEM RESTART

ARE YOU SURE? NO

SYSTEM RESTART

ARE YOU SURE? NO

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-318

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[831] MGI PARAMETERS

This MMC provides a means to configure the Internet Protocol (IP) addressing of the MGI module(s) in the system.

No Parameter

0 IP ADDRESS

1 GATEWAY

2 SUB MASK

3 IP TYPE

4 PUBLIC IP

5 PUB PORT

6 VERSION

8 CARD RESET

9 IP VERSION

Description

Specifies the IP address for the MGI module.

Specifies the designated IP gateway address used for contacting

IP devices beyond the local subnet.

Specifies the IP subnet mask. This parameter is used by the system to calculate the range of IP devices (subnet) that are within ‘direct reach’ of the MGI (without having to go through the designated network IP gateway).

Specifies if the system will be routing data over a public or private network.

The MGI will originate communications to IP phones and VoIP connections outside the local network using this IP address. If this

IP address is set to 0.0.0.0, 255.255.255.255 or the default value, the MGI module uses private IP only. See System IP Type in MMC

830.

Public Port

No entry required. Used to indicate revision of MGI software.

Reboots MGI module.

Specifies MGI IP version is IPv4 / IPv6.

- IP ADDRESS, GATEWAY, and SUB MASK—any changes to these parameters will not be applied until the MGI module is reset.

- When changing any IP address/value, three digits must be entered for each (octet) field. For example, 192.168.1.10 should be entered as 192 168 001 010.

Samsung Business Communications

2-319

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

CONDITIONS

This MMC cannot be accessed unless there is an MGI module installed in the system.

DEFAULT DATA

IP ADDRESS: 1.1.1.1

GATEWAY: 1.1.1.1

SUB MASK: 255.255.255.0

IP TYPE: PRIVATE IP ONLY

PUBLIC IP: 1.1.1.1

PUB PORT: 00000

VERSION: V4

CARD RESET: NO

IP VERSION: IPv4

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 831.

Display shows the first MGI module.

2. Enter MGI number.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter MGI parameter number.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. Enter MGI parameter.

OR

Press Right Soft button to move cursor.

5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

[3801] IP ADDRESS

168.219. 76.101

[3801] IP ADDRESS

168.219. 76.101

[3801] IP ADDRESS

168.219. 76.101

[3801] IP ADDRESS

165. 10. 1.100

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-320

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[832] VoIP ACCESS CODE

Provides a means to apply the Internet Protocol (IP) address to the VoIP gateway. This

MMC also assigns the number of channels that can be used for IP faxes.

TABLE (00~62): Outbound or Inbound table used for specific access codes. Usually when the MP40 module is used as a VoIP gateway, the Outbound table is used. The Inbound table is used to determine the number of digits to receive before processing the call. Each table has 63 entries (00~62).

No Option Description

0 ACCESS DGT This is the access code that is used once the VoIP gateway is accessed; this directs a call based on the routing tables used. An access code table then references an access code and correlates an IP address to the access code for routing. A maximum of eight digits are available.

1 DGT LENGTH This field requests the number of digits that are expected to be received to make up the whole access code.

2 DEL.LENGTH

3 INSERT DGT

This is the number of digits to delete after receiving the access code.

If no digits are deleted the access code will be sent as part of the call to the destination to continue routing.

Digit(s) to insert for routing at the destination. This can be used when different numbering plans exist or if a dial 9 access is to be inserted in the dialled digits.

4 IP TABLE 1

6

7

IP START

GK USE

This is the first table referenced for routing the access code to an IP address. The system has 64 IP tables (00~63) with 16 entries (00~15) in each table. See MMC 833.

This entry indicates where in a table to start looking for an IP code to associate with the access code. This can be used to manage where to start looking for an IP address in high traffic VoIP gateway applications.

For example: If IP address routing to the desired destination is known to be in the last seven entries of a table, the IP START location would be 8.

IP address searching would start at entry 8.

This parameter determines whether a H.323 Gatekeeper will be utilized to establish this connection.

Samsung Business Communications

2-321

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

DEFAULT DATA

ACCESS DGT: 00~09 (digits 0~9), 10~62 NONE

DGT LENGTH: 1

DEL.LENGTH: 1

INSERT DGT: NONE

IP TABLE 1: 00

IP START: NONE

GK USE: NO

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 832.

Display shows the outbound and first access

code.

2. Enter 0 for O (outbound) or 1 for I (inbound) code table.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter access code table number (00-62) via dial keypad.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. Enter access code item (0-6) via dial keypad.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

5. Enter access code data via dial keypad.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to save and move cursor.

6. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 833

MMC 834

MMC 836

MMC 837

VOIP IP TABLE

H.323 OPTIONS

H.323 GATEKEEPER OPTIONS

SIP OPTIONS

(O:00)ACCESS DGT

0

(O:00)ACCESS DGT

0

(O:01)ACCESS DGT

1

(O:01)ACCESS DGT

1

(O:01)ACCESS DGT

840

Samsung Business Communications

2-322

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[833] VoIP IP TABLE

This MMC provides the IP addresses in tables pointed to by the VoIP code entry (MMC

832). There are 63 tables with up to 16 entries each. The destination IP address is required to route dialled digits based on the access code and digits dialled. The IP entry field is divided into 4 sections allowing modification of separate IP address fields.

When changing any IP address/value, three digits must be entered for each

(octet) field. For example, 192.168.1.10 should be entered as 192 168 001 010

DEFAULT DATA

TB(00) ENTRY(00): MMC 830 SYSTEM IP ADDR

ALL OTHERS: EMPTY

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 833.

Display shows the first table number.

2. Enter table number (00-62) via dial keypad.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter entry number (00-15) via dial keypad.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. Enter IP address via dial keypad.

Cursor will be return step 3.

5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

TB(00) ENTRY (00)

0. 0. 0. 0

TB(00) ENTRY (00)

0. 0. 0. 0

TB(00) ENTRY (00)

0. 0. 0. 0

TB(00) ENTRY (00)

165.213. 87.110

Samsung Business Communications

2-323

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 830

MMC 832

MMC 834

MMC 837

MMC 838

ETHERNET PARAMETERS

VOIP ACCESS CODE

H.323 OPTIONS

SIP OPTIONS

PRIVATE IP ADDRESSES

OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications

2-324

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[834] H.323 OPTIONS

This MMC provides various VoIP support options. The options set in this MMC apply system wide.

No Parameter Description

00 GATEWAY CALL ID Numeric identifier for system (up to 12 digits).

01 H.323 FAST SETUP Enables or disables the H.323 Fast Start call setup method.

02 CALLER ID TYPE This option controls the calling party identification type. There are 3 possible selections :

0 GWID: shows the gateway call ID.

1 ANI: shows the calling station number

2 IP: shows the calling H.323 gateway IP address.

06 TUNNELING

07 DEFAULT DIL NO

Enables or disables the need for additional channels using H.245 signalling. Tunnelling allows use of the H.245 signal channel with the Q.931 channel.

This allows programming of the default direct-in- line number when digits are missing or incorrect on an inbound call.

11 CODEC AUTO NEGO Enables or disables Auto CODEC Negotiation when the MGI is used as an H.323 gateway.

14 SIGNAL PORT Indicate the port number for H.323 signalling and sets a range of numbers allowed by firewall equipment. The common and default IP path or port used is 10000.

17 SEND CLIP TABLE Refers to SEND CLI NUMBER (MMC 323), which provides calling party identification when using the

MGI as a H.323 gateway. This provides station ID of the calling station. A single-digit value corresponding with the desired table in MMC 323 should be entered here. This is only used when

MMC 405 value is null.

Default

1234

ENABLE

ANI

ENABLE

500

ON

10000

1

FOLLOW

DID TRANS when the MGI is used as a H.323 gateway.

0 FOLLOW TRUNK RING: Follows MMC 406

1 FOLLOW DID TRANS: Follows MMC 714

2 FOLLOW INCOM DGT: Follows MMC 724

19 ALLOW GW CHECK When using a gatekeeper, this permits the H.323 gateway to check for gatekeeper presence.

20 CLIR WITH NUMBER When this option is enabled, the CLIP number is sent to the network even if the CLIP restriction flag is set.

21 USE OVERLAP DIAL Enables use of overlap dialling

DISABLE

DISABLE

ENBLOC

Samsung Business Communications

2-325

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

DEFAULT DATA

SEE DESCRIPTION

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 834.

Display shows the first option.

2. Enter H.323 option number (00-20) via dial keypad.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter H.323 option data via dial keypad.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

GATEWAY CALL ID

1234

H.323 FAST SETUP

DISABLE

H.323 FAST SETUP

ENABLE

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-326

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[835] MGI DSP OPTIONS

This MMC provides various MGI DSP options for both MGI and MGI64 modules.

No Parameter Description Default

00 CODEC-FRAME Selects which audio CODEC compression will be used and the transmission interval time of VoIP packets generated by the MGI module. MGI module supports

G.729A(8 K), G.729(8 K), G.711(64 K), and

G.723.1(5.3~6.4K).

01 ECHO CANCEL Enables or disables echo cancellation. This function removes the echo that is generated by voice reflection and packet delay.

02 SILENCE SUP

03 IN FILTER

This parameter determines whether silence suppression is used. This prevents transmission during the silence period of a call, and conserves bandwidth when enabled.

This option selects input filtering of the DSP. This should always be set to ENABLE.

04 OUT FILTER

05 INPUT GAIN

06 VOICE VOL

08 JITTER OPT

This option selects output filtering of the DSP. This should always be set to ENABLE.

PCM input gain value of DSP. The range is-

31 dB~32 dB(0~63).

This sets the quality of PCM voice from the VoIP DSP to the site. Default is 32(0 dB).

This value selects the voice volume. The range is

-31 dB~31 dB (0~63).

This is a scale value that introduces an intentional buffer

(delay) for the transmission of VoIP packets generated by the MGI module. This value determines whether the focus is on packet loss or packet delay.

The range is 00~12.

G.729A –

40 Ms

ENABLE

DISABLE

ENABLE

ENABLE

32

32 (0 dB).

4

Samsung Business Communications

2-327

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

No Parameter

09 MIN JITTER

10 MAX JITTER

11 FAX ECM

12 MAX FAX CNT

13 DTMF TYPE

14 TOS FIELD

15 FAX RETRY

16 RTP CHK TM

17 USE T38 711

DEFAULT DATA

SEE DESCRIPTION

Description Default

Decides the minimum time to consider delay for jitter adjustment.

The range is 010~300 ms

Decides the maximum time to consider delay for jitter adjustment.

The range is 010-300 ms.

This option selects retry of Fax-over-IP if errors are detected.

This is the maximum number of channels that can be simultaneously used for Fax-over-IP. The range is

00~16.

There are two types of DTMF transmission: INBAND, which is industry standard (H.245) type DTMF transport, and OUTBAND which is a Samsung proprietary method.

30 ms

150 ms

ENABLE

2

OUTBAND

An 8-bit binary value that will be used by external routers, switches, etc, (that optionally support TOS-bit prioritization) to identify the transport-priority value of data packets generated by the MGI module. This value can be left at the default value (00000) if your network infrastructure does not support this method of bandwidth management.

This option selects retry count of Fax-over-IP if errors are detected. The range is 0~4 (0 means no retry).

All bits 0

3

This options selects the interval time for sending RTCP. 5 SEC

If use T38 FAX, specifies 711 Codec use Enable

Samsung Business Communications

2-328

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 835.

Display shows the first option.

2. Press Volume button to select MGI and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter MGI DSP parameter via dial keypad.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. Enter MGI DSP parameter.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to save and return to step 3.

5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

MGI:CODEC-FRAME

G.729A –40 MS

MGI:CODEC-FRAME

G.729A –40 MS

MGI:CODEC-FRAME

G.729A –40 MS

MGI:CODEC-FRAME

G.729A –20 MS

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 831 MGI PARAMETERS

Samsung Business Communications

2-329

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[836] H.323 GK OPTIONS

Provides a means to set the H.323 gatekeeper parameters for an optional, external industrystandard H.323 network gatekeeper, using Registration, Admissions and Status signalling

(RAS). The settings apply system wide.

When changing any IP address/value, three digits must be entered for each

(octet) field. For example, 192.168.1.10 should be entered as 192 168 001 010

No Parameter Description Default

00 GK CONNECTION This enables the H.323 call to connect to a gatekeeper.

01 GK ROUTING This enables routing of calls through a gatekeeper.

02 GK IP ADDRESS This is the gatekeeper’s IP address.

03 GK NAME

04 ALTER GK IP

ADDR

This is the alphanumeric identifier of the gatekeeper.

(Up to 16 characters.)

This provides an alternate gatekeeper address.

ID

NO

07 GK KEEP ALIVE

This is the H.323 identifier used by the MGI when registering with the gatekeeper. (Up to 32 characters.)

This is the E.164 identifier used by the H.323 trunk when registering with the gatekeeper. (Up to 16 digits long.)

This is the timer that the MGI uses to acknowledge the presence of the gatekeeper. The range is

000~999 seconds.

08 GK DOWN ROUTE This provides an alternate route if the primary gatekeeper is down. Selections are PSTN or ALTER GK.

09 GK RAS TYPE

MODE

12 RRQ FAIL TIME

Select if AUTO or MANUAL, depending on your gatekeeper’s capabilities.

Select ON or OFF for use of Un-register Request

RAS (URQ) messages.

Programs the time frame to re-send Registration

Request RAS (RRQ) messages to a gatekeeper.

The range is 1~99.

13 GRQ SEND Select ON or OFF for use of Gatekeeper RAS Request (GRQ) messages.

14 USE MULTI E.164 When this option is set to ENABLE, the E.164 identifier can be assigned.

DISABLE

DISABLE

0.0.0.0

‘Gatekeeper’

0.0.0.0

‘OfficeServ’

1234

0 SEC

PSTN

AUTO

ON

30 seconds

OFF

DISABLE

Samsung Business Communications

2-330

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

No Parameter Description

15 E.164 LISTS This is the E.164 identifier used by the H.323 trunk when registering with the gatekeeper. There is a maximum 32 E.164 identifier lists with a digit string length of 16 digits.

16 GK REGISTERED Display the status of registration to the Gatekeeper.

DEFAULT DATA

SEE DESCRIPTION

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 836.

Display shows the first available option.

2. Enter H.323 GK option via dial keypad.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter H.323 GK option data.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to save and return step 3.

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

GK CONNECTION

DISABLE

GK ROUTING

DISABLE

GK ROUTING

ENABLE

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 834 H.323 OPTIONS

Default

NONE

NO

Samsung Business Communications

2-331

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[837] SIP OPTIONS

This MMC permits the adjustments of optional Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) trunk parameters. The MP40 supports SIP and H.323 on a per-call-per-port basis. The settings are system wide.

When changing any IP address/value, three digits must be entered for each

(octet) field. For example, 192.168.1.10 should be entered as 192 168 001 010.

No Parameter

00 GATEWAY

CALL ID

Description

Numeric system identifier (up to 12 digits).

Default

‘1234’

TYPE

NO

This option controls the calling party identification type.

There are 3 possible selections:

0 GWID: shows the gateway call ID.

1 ANI: shows the calling station number (default)

2 IP: shows the calling H.323 gateway IP address.

This allows programming of the default direct-in-line number when digits are missing or incorrect on an inbound call.

Sets the UDP port used on a SIP trunk call.

ANI

5000

5060

TRUNK

Sets the UDP port used on a SIP phone call. 5070

PHONE

09 RE-TRANS.

T1 TIME

10 RE-TRANS.

T2 TIME

11 RE-TRANS.

T4 TIME

12 GENERAL

RING TM

TM

The initial re-transmission time if there is no answer, based on the RFC2543 specification. The range is

0~9900 ms.

The maximum re-transmission time if there is no answer, based on the RFC2543 specification. The range is

0~9900 ms.

The time the User Agent Server waits after receiving the

ACK message. Based on the RFC2543 specification. The range is 0~9900 ms.

The server retransmits the response for this length of time until the requested retransmission is received. For example, the wait time after sending 200 OK for INFO.

The range is 0~99900 ms.

After the client sends ACK for the INVITE Final Response, the client cannot confirm if the server received the ACK message.

The client waits for this length of time after sending ACK for the Final Response. The range is 0~99900 ms.

500 ms

4000 ms

5000 ms

5000 ms

5000 ms

Samsung Business Communications

2-332

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

No Parameter Description Default

14 PROVISIONAL After receiving the Provision Response, the User Agent

TIME waits for this length of time until Timeout ends. The range is 0~999900 ms.

TIME

Before sending Cancel for the Invite Request, the User

Agent waits for this length of time. The range is

0~99900 ms.

16 GEN.NO

RESP TIME

17 REQ.RETRY

TIME

ENABLE

Before sending Cancel for General Request, the User

Agent waits for this length of time. The range is

0~99900 ms.

After sending General Request, the User Agent waits for the Final Response for this length of time. The range is

0~99900 ms.

Sets ENABLE or DISABLE to use an optional, external industry-standard SIP Server.

Sets SIP server IP address.

IP

Sets the port to use on the SIP Server.

PORT

29 SIGNAL PORT Indicates the port number for SIP signalling and sets a range of numbers allowed by firewall equipment. The common and default IP path or port used is 10000.

TABLE

33 INCOMING

MODE

Refers to SEND CLI NUMBER (MMC 323), which provides calling party identification when using the MGI as a

SIP gateway.

This provides station ID of the calling station. A singledigit value corresponding to the desired table in MMC

323 should be entered here. This is only used when

MMC 405 value is null.

This option selects how incoming calls are routed when the MGI is used as a SIP gateway.

0 FOLLOW TRUNK RING: Follows MMC 406

1 FOLLOW DID TRANS: Follows MMC 714 (default)

2 FOLLOW INCOM DGT: Follows MMC 724

180000 m

5000 ms

5000 ms

5000 ms

DISABLE

0.0.0.0.

5060

10000

1

FOLLOW DID

TRANS

CHECK

When using a gatekeeper, this permits the SIP gateway to check for gatekeeper presence.

DISABLE

T-GW System number when registering as a trunking gateway. 4100

NUM

4200

NUM

S-GW System number when registering as a gateway for stations.

NUMBER

When this option is enabled, the CLIP number is sent to the network even if the CLIP restriction flag is set.

38 SIP

REGISTERED

Display the status of registration to the SIP Server.

DISABLE

NO

Samsung Business Communications

2-333

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

39 GW SERVICE When using SIP Server, if this option is ENABLE, then register by user and if DISABLE then register by system number

Domain name for authorization when using SIP Server

NAME

41 GW USER ID User ID for authorization when using SIP Server

DISABLE

DEFAULT DATA

SEE DESCRIPTION

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 834.

Display shows the first option.

2. Enter SIP option number 00-38 (e.g. 01) via dial keypad.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter SIP option data via dial keypad.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

GATEWAY CALL ID

1234

CALLER ID TYPE

ANI

CALLER ID TYPE

IP

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 323

MMC 405

MMC 306

MMC 714

MMC 724

MMC 832

MMC 834

CALLING PARTY NUMBER

TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER

TRUNK RING ASSIGNMENT

DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION

DIAL NUMBERING PLAN

VOIP ACCESS CODE

H.323 OPTIONS

Samsung Business Communications

2-334

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[838] PRIVATE IP ADDRESSES

This MMC is used to select which SYSTEM IP Address (PRIVATE or PUBLIC) is used to connect other devices via an H.323 or SIP trunk. The device which use the PRIVATE IP

Address assigned in this MMC, the PRIVATE SYSTEM IP Address will be used to connect the device.

When changing any IP address/value, three digits must be entered for each

(octet) field. For example, 192.168.1.10 should be entered as 192 168 001 010.

DEFAULT DATA

TABLE (80): 165.213.255.255

ALL OTHERS: 0.0.0.0

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 838.

Display shows the first table number.

2. Enter table number (01-80) via dial keypad.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter IP address via dial keypad.

Cursor will return to step 3.

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

PRIVATE IP (01)

0. 0. 0. 0

PRIVATE IP (01)

0. 0. 0. 0

PRIVATE IP (01)

165.213. 87.110

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 830

MMC 832

MMC 834

MMC 837

ETHERNET PARAMETERS

VOIP ACCESS CODE

H.323 OPTIONS

SIP OPTIONS

Samsung Business Communications

2-335

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[840] IP PHONE INFORMATION

This MMC provides a means to register IP phones with the OfficeServ 7400 system. During registration, the IP and MAC addresses are also registered. The User ID and Password must match the table entry in this MMC for the IP phone to be registered. The system default phone numbers are 3201~3299 and default User IDs match the default station numbers. The system default password is 1234. IP phones must be individually programmed with a User ID and Password in order to register with the system.

No Option

00 USER ID

Description

This is the ID the IP phone must match to register with the OfficeServ 7400 system (alphanumeric).

Default

First 99 IP phones are 3201~3299, others are EMPTY

1234 01 USER PSWD This is the password the IP phone must have to register with the OfficeServ 7400 system (alphanumeric).

02 IP ADDR

03 MAC ADDR

This is the IP address of the IP phone when registered with the system. (Read only.)

This is MAC address of the IP phone when registered with the system. (Read only.)

04 SIG PORT This is the IP UDP port of the IP phone when registered with the system. (Read only.) This information will be needed when traversing NAT routers, firewalls, etc.

05 VOICE PORT This is the IP RTP port of the IP phone when registered with the system. (Read only.) This information will be needed when traversing NAT routers, firewalls, etc.

06 IP TYPE This is the type of IP network used: PRIVATE or

PUBLIC.

07 DSP TYPE This selects which CODEC this phone’s DSP will use.

G.729A (low bandwidth) or G.711(high bandwidth).

This data uses IP phone to IP phone connection only; others follow MGI CODEC type.

08 PHONE TYPE This the type of IP phone used, SAMSUNG or SIP

(future). Use SAMSUNG.

09 REGIST CLR This is used to clear the registration of a particular

IP phone. This is similar to unplugging and plugging in the phone and is useful for maintenance.

0.0.0.0.

FFFFFFFFFFFF

6000

9000

PRIVATE

G.729A

SAMSUNG

NO

Samsung Business Communications

2-336

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

No Option Description

10 FRAME

COUNT

11 JITTER BUF

12 TOS FIELD

This value determines the transmission interval time of

VoIP packets generated by the IP phone. This data uses MMC 841 ITP DSP PARA DOWN = PHONE DATA only. The range is 10~40 ms.

Decides the minimum time to consider delay for jitter adjustment. This data uses MMC 841 ITP DSP PARA

DOWN = PHONE DATA only. The range is 10~90 ms.

An 8-bit binary value that will be used by external routers, switches, etc, (that optionally support TOS-bit prioritization) to identify the transport-priority value of data packets generated by the IP phone. This value can be left at the default value (00000) if your network infrastructure does not support this method of bandwidth management. This data uses MMC 841 ITP DSP PARA

DOWN = PHONE DATA only.

13 S/W VERSION Display IP phone software version. (Read only.)

14 S/W UPGRADE This is used as IP phone software upgrade request command. When YES is selected and Right Soft button is pressed, the system requests IP phone software upgrade with TFTP IP address.

15 TIME ZONE

PUBLIC

17 SIG TYPE

Allows remote IP phones to display own time zone.

When this option is set to USE MGI, the MGI can be allocated between remote IPs in the same private zone.

This option can change UDP/TCP signal type for IPs.

(ITP V3.xx only supports the TCP signal type. If TCP is set and ITP V2.xx attempts to connect, the TCP signal type will change from TCP to UDP automatically.)

18 PRIVATE IP Displays private IP address of remote IP phone allocated by phone’s router.

Default

20 ms

20 m

All bits 0

-

-

00.00

NOT USE MGI

UDP

-

DEFAULT DATA

SEE DESCRIPTION

Samsung Business Communications

2-337

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 840.

Display shows:

2. Enter IP phone number via dial keypad.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter IP phone option number via dial keypad.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. Enter option data via dial keypad.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to save and return to step 3.

5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

[3201]USER ID

3201

[3210]USER ID

3210

[3210]DSP TYPE

G.729A

[3210]DSP TYPE

G.711

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 615

MMC 616

MMC 830

MMC 831

MMC 835

MMC 841

MGI GROUP

MGI USER

ETHERNET PARAMETERS

MGI PARAMETERS

MGI DSP OPTIONS

SYSTEM IP OPTIONS

Samsung Business Communications

2-338

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[841] SYSTEM IP OPTIONS

This MMC provides various proprietary Samsung VoIP and IP integration options. The options set in this MMC apply system wide.

No Option

00 PHONE VERSION

01 PHONE TFTP IP

Description Default

Sets running IP-based phone and new phone software version with the system.

0 LARGE DGP: Large LCD phone

1 LARGE ITP: Large LCD IP-based phone

2 2LINE ITP2: 2-line LCD IP-based phone

3 WIPM APPL: Wireless IP-based mobile phone software.

4 SOFT PC: IP phone emulation on PC (Soft-

Phone application)

5 SOFT PDA: IP phone emulation on PDA (Soft-

Phone application)

8 WIPM BOOT: Wireless IP-based mobile phone boot program.

9 SOFT MENU: Soft menu version

Sets phone software upgrade TFTP server IP address.

Defines the method that IP-based phones use to register with the system.

0000

0.0.0.0

0 TYPE: a) SYS PSWD: System will authenticate the

IP-based phones with the value in ITP

REGISTRATION: PSWD parameter (see 1, below).

B) PHONE PSWD: System will authenticate the IP-based phones according to entries made in MMC 840. c) DISABLE: System will not authenticate

IP-based phones.

1 PSWD: This is a system-wide password used for registration of IP phones.

SYS PSWD

1234

Sets EasySet link via LAN option with the system.

0 PSWD: This is a system-wide password used for authentication of EasySet server.

1234

1 ALIVE: This is an EasySet link via LAN alive check timer.

0 SEC

Samsung Business Communications

2-339

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

No Option Description Default

04 CTI LINK OPTION

05 ITP DSP PARA

Sets CTI link via LAN option with the system.

0 SMDR REPORT: Sets YES or NO for SMDR data to CTI link via LAN.

1 UCD REPORT: Sets YES or NO for UCD data to

CTI link via LAN.

2 ALIVE: This is a CTI link via LAN alive check timer. If this is set to 0, the system will not check link alive.

Sets IP phone DSP parameter system wide.

0 M-FRAME: This value determines the transmission interval time of VoIP packets generated by the IP phone. This data uses DOWN = SYS

DATA only (see 3, below). The range is

10~40 ms.

1 JITTER: Decides the minimum time to consider delay for jitter adjustment. This data uses

DOWN = SYS DATA only (see 3, below). The range is 10~90 ms.

2 TOS: An 8-bit binary value that will be used by external routers, switches, etc, (that optionally support TOS-bit prioritization) to identify the transport-priority value of data packets generated by the IP phone. This value can be left at the default value (00000) if your network infrastructure does not support this method of bandwidth management. This data uses DOWN

= SYSTEM DATA only (see 3, below).

3 DOWN: Determines whether system-wide data or individual phone data is used for DSP control of IP-based phones. a) SYSTEM DATA: System-wide data will be used (MMC 841) b) PHONE DATA: Individual phone data will be used (MMC 840)

06 ITP TX GAIN/HSET Sets IP-based phone Handset TX gain value of each level.

07 ITP RX GAIN/HSET Sets IP-based phone Handset RX gain value of each level.

NO

NO

300 SEC

10 ms

20 ms

All bits 0

SYS DATA

Depends on country

Depends on country

Samsung Business Communications

2-340

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

No Option Description Default

08 ITP TX GAIN/MIC Sets IP-based phone MIC gain value of each level. Depends on country

09 ITP RX GAIN/SPKR Sets IP-based phone SPKR gain value of each level.

Depends on country

UPGRADE

Sets IP-based phone software upgrade option with the system.

0 TYPE: a) MMC COMMAND: IP-based phone software upgraded manually in MMC 840. b) PHONE CON: IP-based phone software upgraded automatically when phone connected. c) AUTO TIME: IP-based phone software upgraded automatically at set time.

MMC

COMMAND

0000 (Disable) 1 START (HHMM): IP-based phone software automatic upgrade start time.

2 INTERVAL: IP-based phone software automatic upgrade interval time.

11 MGI ALIVE PERIOD Set the time interval of checking the link connection of MGI module and the system.

13 LICENSE KEY Insert the license key to enable SoftPhone connection.

14 LICENSE STATUS The status (Valid or Invalid) of the inserted license key.

10 seconds.

-

NONE

-

DEFAULT DATA

SEE DESCRIPTION

Samsung Business Communications

2-341

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 841.

Display shows the first available option.

2. Enter option category number 0-13 via dial keypad (e.g. 2)

OR

Press Volume button to make select and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter option number via dial keypad.

OR

Press Volume button to make select and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

PHONE VERSION

LARGE DGP: 0000

ITP REGISTRATION

TYPE: SYS PSWD

ITP REGISTRATION

PSWD: 1234

ITP REGISTRATION

OR

PSWD: 8228

Press Right Soft button to save and return to step 3.

5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 840 IP PHONE INFORMATION

Samsung Business Communications

2-342

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[842] SIP STATION INFORMATION

This MMC provides a means of registering the SIP with the OfficeServ 7400 system.

No.

2

3

0

1

Parameter Description

USER ID

HOST NAME

USER PSWD

IP ADDR

When phone is registered, user ID for checking user

Name of phone host device

When phone is registered, user password for checking user

IP address of IP phone

Type of phone connected

CISCO/SAMSUNG

FLAG -

4

5

8

3

6

7

8

9

Encryption algorithm used

CURRENT STATUS connected or disconnected

MAC ADDR

SIG PORT

VOICE PORT

Hardware address of IP phone

IP port to communicate with message to IP phone

IP port to communicate with voice packet to IP phone

IP TYPE

DSP TYPE

10 FRAME CNT

11

12

13

14

PHONE TYPE

REGIST CLR

JITTER BUF

TOS FIELD

SW VERSION

SW UPGRADE

Type of IP address (0. PRIVATE, 1. PUBLIC)

DSP type if communicating as IP phone

(0. G.711, 1. G.729A)

Type of IP Phone (0. SAMSUNG, 1. SIP STANDARD)

Delete information for registered IP phone

This parameter set to buffering count of voice packets in case of transferring ones

This parameter provide guideline of controlling Jitter Buffering operation when voice packet translate PCM voice packet

Set to TOS (Type Of Service) field value

Display registered IP phone version

Set to SW upgrade

Samsung Business Communications

2-343

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

DEFAULT DATA

Parameter

USER ID

HOST NAME

USER PSWD

IP ADDR

PHONE TYPE CISCO/SAMSUNG

USER FLAG

AUTH TYPE

ALGO USED

CURRENT STATUS

MAC ADDR

SIG PORT

VOICE PORT

IP TYPE

DSP TYPE

PHONE TYPE

REGIST CLR

FRAME CNT

JITTER BUF

TOS FIELD

SW UPGRADE

Default

Initial IP Phone Number (e.g. 3601)

NONE

1234

0.0.0.0

CISCO

ENABLE

LOCAL

MD5

Not registered

FFFFFFFFFFFF

-

-

PRIVATE

G.729A

SAMSUNG

-

-

2 (x10MS)

00000000

-

ACTION

1. Press Transfer button and enter 842.

2. Enter IP phone number via dial keypad.

OR

Press Volume button to make select and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter option number via dial keypad.

OR

Press Volume button to make select and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

[3201]USER ID

3201

[3202]USER ID

3202

[3202]IP TYPE

PRIVATE

Samsung Business Communications

2-344

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[3202]IP TYPE

OR PUBLIC

Press Right Soft button to save and return to step 3.

5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-345

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[844] IP STATION TYPE

Assign the IP station type (DESKTOP PHONE or MOBILE PHONE). For example,

ITP-5012L or ITP-5014D must be set to DESKTOP PHONE and WIP-5000M must be set to MOBILE PHONE.

DEFAULT DATA

001~032 for DESKTOP PHONE, 033~064 for MOBILE PHONE.

ACTION

1. Press Transfer button and enter 844.

2. Dial index number (e.g., 033)

OR

Press Volume button to select and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Dial 1 or 0 to select type.

(1: MOBILE PHONE, 0: DESKTOP PHONE)

OR

Press Volume button to select and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

INDEX:001 [3201]

MOBILE PHONE

INDEX:033 [3301]

MOBILE PHONE

INDEX:033 [3301]

DESKTOP PHONE

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-346

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[845] WLAN PARAMETERS

This MMC modifies the WLAN parameters.

The SYSTEM KEY is used internally to distinguish between systems when registering a terminal. The default value is ‘00000’, but this must be changed to another value to enable the use of WLAN terminals. In addition, the SYSTEM KEY serves as an identification ID when a WLAN terminal connects to the WBS24.

The default value of the SYSTEM ID, ‘WBS24’, must also be changed to another value in order to use multiple systems in one area. The DNS setting for WLAN is additionally described in this MMC.

Set the network configuration for WBS24 by setting the IP assignment, Netmask and

Gateway. These settings should be compatible with the Intranet since the network configuration setting is essential for data service. In addition, the RF frequency for WBS24 should be selected. Currently up to 14 frequencies may be selected.

Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) variables used for the WBS24 (Basic) can be defined.

WLAN PARAMETER

No Parameter Description Default

00 SYSTEM ID WBS24

01 SYSTEM KEY Key used for registering terminals. Different values must be assigned to each system.

02 1 st DNS IP

03 2 nd DNS IP

04 2 nd WBS IP

First Domain Name Server (DNS) IP address

Second Domain Name Server (DNS) IP address

00000

0.0.0.0

0.0.0.0

168.208.144. 10 IP addresses of all WBS in system used by wireless terminal. Different IPs must be assigned to each system.

05 CODEC LIST

ID used for distinguishing systems in a wireless environment. Different IDs must be assigned to different systems.

CODEC that can be used for VoIP calls between

WBS24 and terminal. G.711u, G.711a, G.726, and

G.729 can all be assigned.

06 RF CHANNEL Set a RF CHANNEL value that can be used by

WBS.

CODEC 1: G.729

CODEC 2: NONE

CODEC 3: NONE

CODEC 4: NONE

USE CH 1: 01

USE CH 2: 06

USE CH 3: 11

USE CH 4: 00

USE CH 5: 00

USE CH 6: 00

Samsung Business Communications

2-347

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

No Parameter Description

07 VERSION

08 TFTP SERVR

09 TFTP FILE

WBS UPGRADE Server IP.

WBS UPGRADE file name.

10 WBS TX PWR TX POWER of all WBSs.

19 CLR WBSREG Initializes registration data of all WBS.

WBS PARAMETER

Default

Version

0.0.0.0

WBS00000.TFP

DEFAULT

NO y

There are two types of WBS, the COMBO AP and BASIC AP. A system cannot use both types of WBS at the same time. The AP type to be used can be set in MMC 849. Depending on the selected AP type, this program displays COMBO AP (CWBS), and BASIC AP

(BWBS). y When using COMBO AP (CWBS)

WBS24 COMBO is connected to a WLI module. Up to three WLI modules can be installed.

(A single WLI module can connect up to eight WBS24 COMBOs.)

When using BASIC AP (BWBS)

WBS24 BASIC is connected to the system through the network and requires an MGI port to provide tone and call path connection.

No Parameter

00 IP ADDRESS

01 GATEWAY

02 NET MASK

03 MAC ADDR

04 VERSION

05 STATUS

06 RF CH.

07 TX POWER

09 TIME ZONES

10 PARA CLR

Description

WBS24 IP address for Ethernet.

Gateway address of the WBS24 Network.

Netmask of the WBS24 Network.

MAC address of WBS24 received by the system when WBS24 is connected.

WBS24 software version.

Alive operation status.

RF channel no. used by each WBS24 .

TX POWER of each WBS.

Time zone service for each WBS

Initializes WBS registration data.

Default

0.0.0.0

0.0.0.0

255.255.255.0

FFFF FFFF FFFF

Version

OFF

1, 6, or 11

DEFAULT

00:00

NO

Samsung Business Communications

2-348

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

SIP PARAMETER

No

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Parameter Description Default (ms)

RE-TRANS T1 When using an unreliable transmission protocol such as UDP, retransmission is required when no reply is received. RE-TRANS.T1 TIME is the initial retransmission interval defined in RFC2543.

RE-TRANS T2 Maximum retransmission interval defined in RFC

2543

RE-TRANS T4 RFC 2543 defines this parameter for various purposes. For example, this parameter can be used as the time waited by User Agent Server after receiving

ACK message in an unreliable transmission protocol.

GEN RING TM When using an unreliable transmission protocol, the server cannot be sure if the client has received the last reply. Thus, the server must retransmit the reply for this length of time until it receives the requested retransmission. For example, this parameter can be used as the waiting time after sending 200 OK for

INFO.

INV RING TM When using an unreliable transmission protocol, the client cannot verify if the server has received the

ACK returned to the server for the INVITE Final Response. The client waits for this length of time after sending the ACK for the Final Response.

500

4000

5000

6000

1000

GEN NO RESP Waiting time before cancelling SIP related Request. 5000

INV NO RESP Waiting time before cancelling SIP INVITE Request. 6000

5000 REQ

RETRY

Waiting time for receiving final response for SIP related Request.

PROVISIONAL On receiving Provision Response, the User Agent must wait for this length of time until Timeout.

180000

DEFAULT DATA

SEE DESCRIPTION

Samsung Business Communications

2-349

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 845.

WLAN: SYSTEM ID

WBS24

2. When the cursor is on WLAN, press Volume button and select WLAN, WBS, or SIP.

WLAN: SYSTEM ID

WBS24

3. Press Right Soft button to move to the SYSTEM ID.

WLAN: SYSTEM ID

When the cursor is below SYSTEM ID, press

WBS24

Volume button to select the setting menu for WLAN.

4. Set the items below at the WLAN menu.

SYSTEM ID: Use the Soft button to move the

Register the SYSTEM KEY.

WLAN: SYSTEM ID cursor and enter the new WLAN SYSTEM ID to

register.

WBS24

Press Soft button and proceed to next register status.

WLAN: SYSTEM KEY

00000

Register the 1 st

DNS server IP.

WLAN: 1ST DNS IP

0. 0. 0. 0

Register the 2 nd

DNS server IP.

WLAN: 2ND DNS IP

0. 0. 0. 0

Register the 2 nd

WBS IP.

WLAN: 2ND WBS IP

0. 0. 0. 0

Select the voice codec. Select from G711a, G711u, and G729 CODEC.

Numbers are given from 1 to 4 based on priority.

Select the usable RF channel. Maximum six channels can be used for a system.

(Default RF channel: 1, 6, 11)

Used to change the TX POWER of all WBS.

(Default: LEVEL 1~4)

Used to clear registration information of all WBS.

WLAN: CODEC LIST

CODEC 1: G.711a

WLAN: RF CHANNEL

USE CH 1: 01

WLAN: WBS TX PWR

DEFAULT

WLAN: CLR WBSREG

ARE YOU SURE?NO

Samsung Business Communications

2-350

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

5. Set the items below at the WBS24 menu. The selected WBS is as set in MMC 849 (SELECT AP

TYPE option) i.e. CWBS=COMBO WBS,

BWBS=BASIC WBS.

Register the WBS24 IP ADDRESS.

Register the WBS24 NET MASK.

Register the WBS24 GATEWAY.

Displays the WBS24 MAC ADDRESS.

Displays the WBS24 STATUS.

Register the WBS24 RF CHANNEL. (The WBS RF channel must be selected from the pre-assigned

RF channels in WLAN RF CHANNELS).

Register the WBS24 TX POWER.

(Default: LEVEL 1~4)

Used to clear the WBS parameter.

6. Set the items below at the menu.

The initial re-transmission time if no answer,

based on the RFC2543 specification.

The range is 0-9900 ms. (Default: 500 ms)

CWBS1: IP ADDR

0. 0. 0. 0

CWBS1: NET MASK

255.255.255. 0

CWBS1: GATEWAY

0. 0. 0. 0

CWBS1 : MAC ADDR

FFFF FFFF FFFF

CWBS1 : VERSION

CWBS1 : STATUS

OFF

CWBS1 : RF CHAN

USE CH 1:01

CWBS1 : TX POWER

DEFAULT

CWBS1 : PARA CLR

ARE YOU SURE?NO

SIP : RE-TRANS T1

000500MS

SIP : RE-TRANS T2

004000MS

The maximum re-transmission time if no answer,

based on the RFC2543 specification.

The range is 0-9900 ms. (Default: 4000 ms)

Samsung Business Communications

2-351

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

Register the RE-TRANS T4. The time the User Agent

Server waits after receiving the ACK message.

Based on the RFC2543 specification.

The range is 0-9900 ms. (Default: 5000 ms)

Register the GEN RING TM. The server retransmits the response for this length of time until the requested retransmission is received. For example, the wait time after sending 200 OK for INFO.

The range is 0-99900 ms. (Default: 6000 ms)

Register the INV RING TM. After the client sends

ACK for the INVITE Final Response, the client cannot confirm if the server received the ACK message. The client waits this long after sending ACK for the Final Response.

The range is 0-99900 ms. (Default: 1000 ms)

Register the GEN NO RESP. Before sending Cancel for General Request, the User Agent waits this long.

The range is 0-99900 ms. (Default: 5000 ms)

Register the INV NO RESP. Before sending Cancel for the Invite Request, the User Agent waits this

long.

The range is 0-99900 ms. (Default: 5000 ms)

Register the REQ RETRY. After sending General Request, he User Agent waits for the Final Response for this length of time.

The range is 0-99900 ms Default is 5000 ms

Register the PROVISIONAL. After receiving the

Provision Response, the User Agent waits this long

SIP : RE-TRANS T4

005000MS

SIP : GEN RING TM

006000MS

SIP : INV RING TM

001000MS

SIP : GEN NO RESP

005000MS

SIP : INV NO RESP

006000MS

SIP : REQ RETRY

005000MS

SIP : PROVISIONAL

180000MS

The range is 0-999900 ms. (Default: 180000 ms)

7. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

Samsung Business Communications

2-352

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 846 WIP INFORMATION

MMC 847 WLAN RESET AND STATUS CHECK

MMC 848 WLAN IP/MAC LIST

MMC 849 WLAN CONFIGURATION

OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications

2-353

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[846] WIP INFORMATION

This MMC sets up the WIP-5000M wireless terminal information.

No Parameter Description Default

00 REGISTERED

01 LOCATED

02 PHONE TYPE

Shows if the terminal is registered NO

Shows if the terminal is connected to the system DETACH

Shows the type of the terminal

03 WLI NUMBER Number of WLI connected to the WBS24 servicing the terminal

NONE

-

04 WBS NUMBE

05 IP OFFSET

06 IP ADDRESS

Number of WBS24 servicing the terminal

Location of IP pool of the terminal IP

Terminal IP address

-

-

0.0.0.0

07 MAC ADDR

08 USER ID

09 PASSWORD

10 INSERT DGT

Terminal MAC address

User ID per terminal

Password of terminal user

If five or more numbers are entered into the WIP terminal, this INSERT DGT is prefixed to the numbers, provided the entered numbers do not start with a C.O. number, C.O. group number,

LCR, network LCR, or function code.

0000 0000 0000

1212

0000

-

DEFAULT DATA

SEE DESCRIPTION

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 846.

2. Dial the WIP number.

OR

Press Volume button to select station and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Set the items below at the menu.

Confirm the status of terminal registration for each phone number.

[3301] REGISTERED

NO

[3301] REGISTERED

NO

[3301] REGISTERED

NO

Samsung Business Communications

2-354

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

Displays the location of the registered terminal.

[3301] LOCATED

DETACH

Displays the PHONE TYPE of the registered terminal.

Displays the WLI NUMBER of the registered terminal (currently not used)

Displays the WBS NUMBER of the registered ter-

[3301] PHONE TYPE

[3301] WLI NUMBER

[3301] WBS NUMBER minal.

Displays the IP OFFSET of the registered terminal.

[3301] IP OFFSET

Displays the IP ADDRESS of the registered terminal.

Displays the MAC ADDRESS of the registered terminal.

Register the USER ID of the terminal.

[3301] IP ADDRESS

[3301] MAC ADDR

[3301] USER ID

1212

Register the PASSWORD of the terminal.

[3301] PASSWORD

0000

Register the INSERT DGT for the terminal.

(These digits will be automatically inserted in front of user dialling digits when there are more than four digits and they do not start with the trunk access code or feature code)

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

[3301] INSERT DGT

_

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 847

MMC 848

MMC 849

WLAN RESET AND STATUS CHECK

WLAN IP/MAC LIST

WLAN CONFIGURATION

Samsung Business Communications

2-355

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[847] WLAN RESET AND STATUS CHECK

This MMC is used for rebooting all or individual WBS24 and for initializing the WLI module. The operational status of the WLI and WBS24 can also be displayed.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button, and enter 847.

2. Select the item number (0: RESET, 1: STATUS)

OR

Press Volume button to select item number and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Select the type (WLI or WBS)

RESET :WLI :1

RESET NOW ? NO

RESET :WLI :1

RESET NOW ? NO

4. Select the WLI/WBS number.

If you press ANS/RLS or CONF button, all WLI (or all WBS) will be selected.

5. Press Soft button, or press [1] to select YES, and the WLI/WBS will be initialized.

6. To verify the status of the WLI or WBS, select 1.

7. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

RESET :WLI :1

RESET NOW ? NO

RESET :WLI :2

RESET NOW ? NO

RESET :WLI :2

RESET NOW ? NO

STATUS: WLI

C1S1 OFF OFF

STATUS: CWBS:01

Æ

Y N N N N N N N

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 846

MMC 848

MMC 849

WIP INFORMATION

WLAN IP/MAC LIST

WLAN CONFIGURATION

Samsung Business Communications

2-356

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[848] WLAN IP/MAC LIST

This MMC is used when viewing the IP list assigned to WLAN, or when creating a new IP list. This IP address is automatically assigned to WIP-5000M during a new registration procedure. If the IP address is already assigned, the assigned terminal number will be shown in the USED field.

Also, the MMC is used to set MAC addresses in the terminal in order to use the wireless

LAN (not yet implemented).

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button, and enter 848.

2. Select the menu (0: IP LIST, 1: MAC LIST)

3. Select the table number.

4. Enter the IP ADDRESS.

5. A number next to USED indicates the terminal number to which the IP ADDRESS was assigned.

6. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

IP:001 USED:

0. 0. 0. 0

IP:001 USED:

0. 0. 0. 0

IP:001 USED:

_ 0. 0. 0. 0

IP:001 USED:

168. 0. 0. 0

IP:001 USED:3301

168.219.149. 5

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 846

MMC 847

MMC 849

WIP INFORMATION

WLAN RESET AND STATUS CHECK

WLAN CONFIGURATION

Samsung Business Communications

2-357

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[849] WLAN CONFIGURATION

This MMC is used to set the WLAN configuration.

Parameter Description

REGISTER VoWLAN Enable or disable registration of new WIP-5000M mobile phone.

WIP REGIST CLEAR Used to clear the registration of WIP. FORCED mode clearing is used when the device is not connected normally (e.g. device broken), otherwise the NORMAL mode clearing can be used.

WBS WEP SERVICE Enable or disable the WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) feature

WEP KEY Assign the WEP key (13 characters only)

STATIC WBS IP

STATIC WIP IP

SELECT AP

Select the use of Static WBS IP

Select the use of Static WIP IP

Select if using COMBO or BASIC AP. (If COMBO is selected, a WLI module must be installed in the system. BASIC allows APs to run without this module.)

DEFAULT DATA

REGISTER VoWLAN: DISABLE

WIP REGIST CLEAR: FORCED

WBS WEP SERVICE: DISABLE

WEP KEY: NONE

STATIC WBS IP: DISABLE

STATIC WIP IP: DISABLE

SELECT AP TYPE: BASIC AP (DEPENDS ON COUNTRY)

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button, and press 849.

2. Enter the PASSCODE.

(This PASSCODE is assigned in MMC 202

3. Select ENABLE to register a terminal.

ENTER PASSWORD

_

ENTER PASSCODE

****

REGISTER VoWLAN

ENABLE

4. Select WIP REGIST CLEAR to clear the registration status for a terminal.

5. Select the WEP KEY setting when ENCRYPTION is selected.

WIP REGIST CLEAR

3301:FORCED

WBS WEP SERVICE

DISABLE

Samsung Business Communications

2-358

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

6. Enter WEP KEY values when the WBS WEP SER-

VICE is enabled (13 characters only)

7. Select ENABLE to use the static WBS IP.

8. Select ENABLE to use the static WIP IP.

9. Select AP TYPE of the system.

If you change the AP type, the system must be re-

started.

Select YES to restart system.

WEP KEY

STATIC WBS IP

DISABLE

STATIC WIP IP

DISABLE

SELECT AP TYPE

COMBO AP

10. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 846

MMC 847

MMC 848

WIP INFORMATION

WLAN RESET AND STATUS CHECK

WLAN IP/MAC LIST

SELECT AP TYPE

RESET SYSTEM?NO

Samsung Business Communications

2-359

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[850] SYSTEM RESOURCE DISPLAY

This MMC is used for system resource display (used and free resources). This is a READ-

ONLY MMC.

0. DTMFR DSP’S

1. CID DSP’S

2. R2MFC DSP’S

3. CONF GROUP’S

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 850.

Display shows:

2. Enter the option number (0-3).

OR

Press Volume button to select.

3. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

DTMFR DSP’S

USE:000 FREE:012

CID DSP’S

USE:000 FREE:014

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-360

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[851] ALARM REPORTING

This MMC is used to view, store, print or clear system alarms. Two levels of faults are displayed via an alarm code: major alarms and minor alarms. Major alarms codes are usually service affecting and require a certified technician to determine the fault. A minor alarm indicates a fault that may or may not be service affecting and usually does not seriously degrade the system’s operating capabilities.

The alarm buffer holds up to 100 alarms on a first in-first out (FIFO) basis. Alarms provide a date and time stamp based on the system time. If applicable, the hardware chassis, port, and/or slot will be displayed. Alarm information can be printed on demand and as it is provided.

ALARM REPORTING OPTIONS (Select one of the options)

No Option

0 VIEW ALARMS

1 OVERFLOW

CONTROL

2 CLEAR ALARM BUF

3 PRINT ALARM BUF

Description

View alarm buffer.

Determines buffer control when buffer is full.

0 OVERWRITTEN: When buffer is full, the oldest entry in buffer is overwritten. (Default.)

1 STOP RECORDING: When buffer is full, stop recording alarms.

Clears alarm buffer.

Prints contents of alarm buffer.

ALARM CODE DEFINITION

See Alarm Code Definitions in MMC 852

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-361

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 851.

Display shows:

2. Enter desired option.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. System displays the alarm count number, date and time stamp.

Alarm type and cause code will display.

4. Press Volume button to scroll through other alarms.

OR

Press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

SYS ALARM REPORT

VIEW ALARMS

SYS ALARM REPORT

VIEW ALARMS

[00] 02/18 14:30

MNF02 C1-S02

SYS ALARM REPORT

VIEW ALARMS

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 852 SYSTEM ALARM ASSIGNMENTS

Samsung Business Communications

2-362

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[852] SYSTEM ALARM ASSIGNMENTS

This MMC allows the assignment of system alarms to ring and display on stations that have an Alarm key assigned. The Alarm key is assigned in MMC 722 (Station Key Programming). Alarm key programming is tenant wide (tenants 1 and 2). Alarms not programmed to report to the system Alarm key will still be retained in the maintenance alarm buffer for Alarm Reporting (MMC 851). The alarm buffer holds up to 100 alarms on a First

In-First Out (FIFO) basis. Pressing the Alarm key will silence the audible alarm until another alarm is generated by the system. Alarm conditions that have multiple causes (e.g.,

PRI errors and synchronization loss) will print all associated alarm information if an SIO port is programmed as an ALARM port. The specific fault alarm data can be displayed via

MMC 851, System Alarm Reporting.

Alarm Notification Off/On (0/1) determines if the alarm provides a visual and audible notification to the system Alarm key station(s). Pressing the Alarm key and the Release key will silence the audible alarm only at the station that pressed the

Alarm key and the Release key.

Alarm Code Definitions:

Alarm Name No Code

MJA--

01 MJA01

02 MJA02

03 MJA03

04 MJA04

05 MJA05

06 MJA06

Definition

MP Error System Fault

POR Restart

Soft Restart

MP restart process has been executed via power on restart

(POR).

MP restart process has been executed via button reset.

Mem Reset

MP Reset

LP Reset

The system RAM has been cleared via manual programming (PC or keyphone) resulting in a system reset.

The MP has a software exception error.

Alarm data = Reason

- BUS ERR: Restart Bus Error

- ADDR.ERR: Restart Address Error

- ILLEGAL: Restart Illegal Opcode

- ZERO DIVID: Restart Zero Divide

- PRIVILEGE: Restart Privilege Violation

- ENDL LOOP: Restart Endless Loop

The LP has reset

Alarm data = Chassis (1, 2 or 3)

PCM Switching A fault has occurred in the Switching Control

Alarm data = MP BASE, ESM: 1, ESM: 2 or ESM: 3

Samsung Business Communications

2-363

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

No

08

09

10

Code

MJB--

MJB01

MJB02

MJB03

11

12

13

14

16

17

25

26

27

28

31

32

MJB04

MJB05

MJB06

MJB07

MJC--

MJC01

MJC02

MJC10

MJC11

MJC12

MJC13

MJC16

MJC17

Alarm Name Definition

LP/TASK Error LP or TASK Fault

HDLC Com Error Communications to LP lost or faulty.

Memory Alarm 1 A RAM diagnostic check error has occurred in the MP.

Memory Alarm 2 A RAM diagnostic check error has occurred in chassis 1

LP.

Memory Alarm 3 A RAM diagnostic check error has occurred in chassis 2

LP.

Memory Alarm 4 A RAM diagnostic check error has occurred in chassis 3

LP.

IPC MSGQ Over IPC TX queue full error has occurred in the MP.

Alarm data = IPC Queue type

Task MSGQ Over Task MSG queue full error has occurred in the MP.

Alarm data = Error Task

DSP Error System DSP Fault

DTMF Fault

Tone Fault

AA-DTMF Fault An abnormal fault reported in one of the AA card

DTMF resources.

Alarm data = Chassis, Slot, Port (Cx-Syy-Pzz)

AA-MFR Rec

An abnormal interrupt has occurred in the system tone resources.

Alarm data = TONE Receiver DSP position.

An abnormal fault reported in one of the AA card

DTMF resources has recovered.

Alarm data = Chassis, Slot, Port (Cx-Syy-Pzz)

E911 Restart

An abnormal interrupt has occurred in the system

DTMF resources.

Alarm data = DTMF Receiver DSP position

E911 Block

WLI Restart

The E911 card has restarted.

Alarm data = Chassis, Slot (Cx-Syy)

The E911 card has blocked because the system detects the card does not work correctly.

Alarm data = Chassis, Slot (Cx-Syy)

The WLI module has restarted.

Alarm data = Chassis, Slot (Cx-Syy)

WLI Block The WLI module has blocked because the system detects the module does not work correctly.

Alarm data = Chassis, Slot (Cx-Syy)

Samsung Business Communications

2-364

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

No

33

34

35

Code

MJD--

MJD01

MJD02

MJD03

36

37

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

MJD04

MJD05

MJD07

MJD08

MJD09

MJD10

MJD11

MJD12

MJD13

MJD14

MJD15

MJD16

MJD17

Alarm Name Definition

DTRK Error ISDN or E1 card Fault

Sync Failure Clocking on TEPRI module has become asynchronous.

Sync Recovery Clocking on TEPRI module has become synchronous.

Red Alarm

Rec

Locally detected loss of PCM carrier on TEPRI module for more than 250 ms.

Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot (Cx-Syy)

Red Alarm Rec PCM carrier detected locally on TEPRI module.

Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot (Cx-Syy)

Yellow Alarm Remotely detected failure transmitted in frame on

TEPRI module.

Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot (Cx-Syy)

Remotely detected failure restored transmitted on

TEPRI module.

Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot (Cx-Syy)

Blue Alarm

Blue Alarm Rec A blue alarm condition has been cleared.

Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot (Cx-Syy)

Bit Error Alarm Alarm is activated when the error rate exceeds 1x10 -6 errors. Note: 1x10 -6 is threshold for minor alarm, 1 x 10 -3 is threshold for major alarm errors on E1, PRI or BRI.

Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot (Cx-Syy)

NTWRK Event

All 1's being transmitted on facility on TEPRI module.

Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot (Cx-Syy)

An Implausible event has occurred on the PRI or BRI

Network digital line. Protocols do not match or subscriber ID mismatch.

Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot (Cx-Syy)

SPID Init Error

SPID Init Rec

The BRI received an error from the network

Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot, Channel (Cx-Syy-czz)

The BRI has recovered from an error on the network

Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot, Channel (Cx-Syy-czz)

LPBK Error Internal on demand loopback failed.

Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot, Channel (Cx-Syy-czz)

LPBK Recovery Internal on demand loopback test passed.

Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot, Channel (Cx-Syy-czz)

BRI DL Unavail A BRI data link is out of service.

Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot, Channel (Cx-Syy-czz)

BRI DL Recovery A BRI data link is back in service.

Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot, Channel (Cx-Syy-czz)

RAM Error An error has occurred in the TEPRI or BRI module RAM.

Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot (Cx-Syy)

Samsung Business Communications

2-365

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

No

50

Code

MJD--

MJD18

51

52

53

54

55

56

57

58

59

60

61

62

MJD19

MJD20

MJD21

MJD22

MJE--

MJE01

MJE02

MJE03

MJE04

MJE05

MJE06

MJE07

MJE08

Alarm Name Definition

DTRK Error ISDN or E1 card Fault

E1 Restart

PRI Restart

BRI Restart

PCM Loss

The E1 card has restarted

Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot (Cx-Syy)

The PRI module has restarted

Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot (Cx-Syy)

The BRI module has restarted

Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot (Cx-Syy)

Loss of PCM coding on a digital facility.

Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot (Cx-Syy)

PCM Recovery Loss of PCM coding on a digital facility.

Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot (Cx-Syy)

MGI Error MGI module Fault

MGI Restart

MGI Stop

The MGI module has restarted

Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot (Cx-Syy)

The MGI module has stopped

Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot (Cx-Syy)

MGI IP Duplicate The MGI module IP address is duplicated

Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot (Cx-Syy)

MGI NTWK Error The MGI module has blocked because the system detects the module doesn’t respond via network link.

External ping test.

Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot (Cx-Syy)

MGI NTWK Rec The MGI module has restarted because the system detects the module does respond via network link.

External ping test.

Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot (Cx-Syy)

MGI DSP Error The MGI module DSP has blocked because the system detects the module DSP does not run correctly.

Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot (Cx-Syy-Pzz)

MGI DSP Run The MGI module DSP has restarted because the system detects the module DSP runs correctly.

Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot (Cx-Syy-Pzz)

WBS Disconnect Indicates the WBS is disconnected.

Alarm Data = CWBS:xx or BWBS:xx

Alarm Data = CWBS:xx or BWBS:xx

Samsung Business Communications

2-366

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

No

64

Code

MNF--

MNF01

65 MNF02

Alarm Name

Minor Error

Card Out

Card In

Definition

Minor Fault with Alarm Buffer saving

A module mounted in a universal slot has been removed from service or is not recognized by the system

Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot (Cx-Syy)

A module mounted in a universal slot has been returned to service.

Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot (Cx-Syy)

67 MNF04 Trunk Fault

68 MNF05 Trunk Recovery Out of service trunk detected via loop detected as out of service is now operational.

Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot, Port (Cx-Syy-Pzz)

69 MNF06 Trunk

Disconnect

Out of service trunk detected via seizure of trunk. External seizure test.

Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot, Port (Cx-Syy-Pzz)

70 MNF07

Alarm Data = Chassis-Slot (Cx-Syy)

Out of service trunk detected via loop detect. Internal

CODEC test.

Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot, Port (Cx-Syy-Pzz)

71

72

73

74

75

MNF08

MNF09

MNF10

MNF11

MNF12

Trunk Connect

SIO TxQ Over SIO Tx Queue full error has occurred in the MP.

Alarm Data = SIO number (SIO: x)

SIO TxQ Under SIO Tx Queue under error has occurred in the MP.

Alarm Data = SIO number (SIO: x)

E1 Out Of Srv E1 digital line status has been changed to out of service.

Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot (Cx-Syy)

E1 In Service

Out of service trunk recovered via seizure of trunk. External seizure test.

Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot, Port (Cx-Syy-Pzz)

SIO Out

E1 digital line has been restored to normal service.

Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot (Cx-Syy)

IO port has lost DTR

Alarm Data = SIO number (SIO: x)

76 MNF13 SIO In IO port has regained DTR.

Alarm Data = SIO 1 through 6

Time of Day Clock in the MP has erred. 77

78

MNF14

MNF15

TODC Error

TSW Over Alarm The TSW has been requested to exceed the capacity of available time slots. Maximum 192 per chassis.

Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot (Cx-Syy)

79 MNF16 PSU Alarm There are more ports than can be supported in a chassis and more power is required.

Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot (Cx-Syy)

Samsung Business Communications

2-367

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

No Code Alarm Name Definition

Rec Over-configuration of chassis has been corrected.

Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot (Cx-Syy)

81

82

83

84

85

86

87

88

MNF18

MNF19

MNF20

MNF21

MNF26

MNF27

MNF28

MNF29

SLI Fault

SLI Recovery

PSUB Alarm

DSS Alarm

MNG-- Minor Error

89 MNG01 Phone

Disconnect

An SLI module has been detected as out of service via an internal CODEC test.

Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot, Port (Cx-Syy-Pzz)

An SLI module detected as out of service has been detected as recovered and is in service via internal CO-

DEC test.

Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot, Port (Cx-Syy-Pzz)

Indicates there are over 120 ports in a chassis with two

PSUs.

Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot (Cx-Syy)

System capacity of 64-button DSS modules has been exceeded.

SIO RxQ Over SIO Tx Queue full error has occurred in the MP.

Alarm Data = SIO number (SIO: x)

SIO RxQ Under SIO Tx Queue under error has occurred in the MP.

Alarm Data = SIO number (SIO: x)

LAN Printer Err LAN printer error has occurred in the MP.

Alarm Data = Data Type (SMDR)

LAN Printer Rec LAN printer error has recovered in the MP.

Alarm Data = Data Type (SMDR)

Minor Fault without Alarm Buffer saving

Indicates the Phone is disconnected.

Alarm Data = Tel number or Cx-Syy-Pzz

91

92 MNG04 On Hook

Alarm Data = Tel number or Cx-Syy-Pzz

MNG03 Off Hook Alarm Indicates Extension Off Hook timer has expired.

Alarm Data = Tel number or Cx-Syy-Pzz

Indicates the Off Hook Alarm Extension is on hook.

Alarm Data = Tel number or Cx-Syy-Pzz

93 MNG05 MGI Packet Loss Indicates the MGI connection RTP packet loss is more than 10 %.

Alarm Data = Tel number or Cx-Syy-Pzz

94 MNG06 MGI Packet Delay Indicates the MGI connection RTP packet delay is more than 500 ms.

Alarm Data = Tel number or Cx-Syy-Pzz

Samsung Business Communications

2-368

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

DEFAULT DATA

ALL OFF

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 852.

Display shows:

2. Enter desired Alarm Display number.(e.g., 64)

OR

Press Volume buttons to select desired option and press Right Soft button to advance the cursor.

3. To select if the alarm is active, press 1 for

YES and 0 for NO.

An entry will return the cursor to step 2.

OR

Press Volume buttons to make selection and press

Right Soft button to save and return to step 2.

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

01:MJA01 ACT:OFF

POR Restart

64:MNF01 ACT:OFF

Card Out

64:MNF01 ACT:ON

Card Out

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 501

MMC 722

MMC 723

MMC 851

MMC 853

SYSTEM TIMERS

STATION KEY PROGRAMMING

SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING

ALARM REPORTING

MAINTENANCE BUSY

Samsung Business Communications

2-369

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[853] MAINTENANCE BUSY

This MMC is used to place stations, trunks and common resources equipment in a maintenance busy condition. This can be used to isolate suspected intermittent problems. Stations placed in maintenance busy will behave like a station in DND when called. The calling stations display will show ‘MADE BUSY’. Stations receiving DID or E&M type calls will receive a DND/ No more calls tone. The station display will still function with station and date.

When the busy station is accessed, it will function like a ‘locked all’ station. Trunks made busy cannot originate calls. Ring down type trunks will still ring the programmed destination. Common resource equipment such as DSPs, CID DSPs and miscellaneous equipment such as page ports and voice mail module ports can also be placed in a maintenance busy state.

MAINTENANCE BUSY OPTIONS

Option Description No

0 TRK

1 STN

5

6

2 PAGE

4 DTMFR

CID

R2MFC

7 CONF

8 MGI

Trunks

Stations

DTMF Receiver (4/DSP)

CID Receiver (14/DSP)

R2MFC Receiver (8/DSP)

DTMFR/CID/R2MFC DSP

If DTMFR, CID or R2MFC is selected when DSP is not mounted, display will show NONE. If mounted, display will show IDLE by default.

DEFAULT DATA

ALL IDLE

Samsung Business Communications

2-370

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 853.

Display shows busy functions:

2. Enter busy function type (0-8) via dial keypad.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter station number.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. Press 1 to make busy or 0 to make idle.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to save and return step 3.

5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

MAINTENANCE BUSY

TRK :NONE

Æ

MAINTENANCE BUSY

STN :NONE

Æ

MAINTENANCE BUSY

STN :201

ÆIDLE

MAINTENANCE BUSY

STN :201

ÆBUSY

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 851

MMC 852

ALARM REPORTING

SYSTEM ALARM ASSIGNMENTS

Samsung Business Communications

2-371

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[854] DIAGNOSTIC TIME

Provides a means to set the Diagnostic Time. The system diagnostics tests include memory audits, internal loopback tests on digital trunks, and DSP, AA DSP tests. Additional tests include CODEC tests on analogue trunks and station modules, and tone tests. If the diagnostics cannot complete the tests because of system traffic, the system will abort the tests and retry during the next programmed diagnostic time. It is recommended to assign the diagnostic time during non-peak traffic periods.

DEFAULT DATA

NO DIAGNOSTIC TIME SET

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 854.

Display shows:

2. Enter weekday number.

(0: Sun, 1: Mon, …, 6: Sat)

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter hour (24-hour clock) via the dial keypad.

Cursor will advance to next entry.

4. Enter minutes (24-hour clock) via the dial keypad.

Cursor will return to step 2.

5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 851

MMC 852

MMC 853

ALARM REPORTING

SYSTEM ALARM ASSIGNMENTS

MAINTENANCE BUSY

DIAGNOSTIC TIME

SUN: :

DIAGNOSTIC TIME

SUN:_ :

DIAGNOSTIC TIME

SUN:23:_

DIAGNOSTIC TIME

SUN:23:30

Samsung Business Communications

2-372

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[855] DISPLAY SYSTEM OPTIONS

This MMC provides a means to view miscellaneous hardware and daughterboards in the system without having to dismantle or power down the system to confirm if the hardware is mounted. This is a READ-ONLY MMC.

OfficeServ 7400 Main System

Option

MP40 SW

Cx-LP CONN

Cx-LP LOC y

CxSy SW

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

Description

Shows DIP software status of MP40

Shows the status of LP40/LCP module

Shows location of daughterboard (chassis x, slot y)

Shows the DIP software status of TEPRI module

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 855.

Display shows:

2. Press Volume button to view options.

SYSTEM OPTIONS

MP40 SW:00000111

SYSTEM OPTIONS

C1-LP CONN :YES

3. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-373

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[856] TECH PROGRAMMING LOGS

This MMC lists the date, time and entry location of the last eight times that technicianlevel programming was accessed. This allows a technician to determine if there was unauthorized access to system programming and where this access occurred. The information stored in this log is displayed, for each of the eight accesses, as follows: first line shows the start date and time of access; second line shows the access type (see table) and end date and time of access.

There are four access types:

Type

NNNN

MODEM

LAN

Description

The extension number of a phone that accessed programming directly (e.g. 3203)

Programming was accessed by PC programming via the integrated V90 modem attached to the MP module in the basic chassis.

Programming was accessed by PC programming via the LAN connection on the MP module in the basic chassis.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 856.

Display shows:

2. Enter number 1-8 for required access display

(e.g., 3)

OR

Press Volume button to scroll.

3. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

(1) 11/22 11:03

Æ

3203 :11/22 11:27

(3) 11/22 12:30

Æ

3203 :11/22 13:30

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 800 ENABLE TECHNICIAN PROGRAM

Samsung Business Communications

2-374

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[857] VIRTUAL CABINET

This MMC is used to program the type of module in the virtual cabinets. The following table shows the available choices.

Cabinet Slot

Max

Ports

Default

Selection

Choice

SLT DGP

Wired

ITP

WLAN

ITP

1

SLT

4

5

2

3

DGP

4

5

10

11

12

8

9

6

7

1

2

32

4

5

8

9

6

7

32

10

11

12

Wired ITP

WLAN ITP

SIP STN

BRI STN

SPnet TRK

SIP TRK

H.323 TRK

SIP

STN

Wired

ITP

IP

UMS

BRI

STN

GCONF

STN

SPnet

TRK

SIP

TRK

Available Not

H.323

TRK

DEFAULT DATA

See above.

Samsung Business Communications

2-375

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 857.

Display shows:

2. Enter cabinet number and slot number (1-12)

OR

Press Volume button to scroll and press Right soft button

3. Press Volume button to scroll and select module type by pressing Right soft button.

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

C4-S01:SLT

SLT

C4-S01:SLT

SLT

C4-S01:SLT

DGP

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 724 NUMBER PLAB

MMC 822 VIR.EXT TYPE

Samsung Business Communications

2-376

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[858] ASSIGN SYSTEM EMERGENCY ALARM

Assigns the alarms to be sent to the Remote M&A PC (remote maintenance and administration) via the LAN interface.

Alarm Code Definition

See Alarm Code Definition in MMC 852

DEFAULT DATA

All OFF

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 858.

Display shows:

2. Enter the alarm entry number.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter ON or OFF (1 or 0) for alarm.

OR

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to save and return to step 2.

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

01:MJA01 ACT:OFF

POR Restart

02:MJA02 ACT:OFF

Soft Restart

02:MJA02 ACT:ON

Soft Restart

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 852 SYSTEM ALARM ASSIGNMENTS

Samsung Business Communications

2-377

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[859] HARDWARE VERSION DISPLAY

This MMC is used for system hardware EPLD/PCB version display. This is a READ-

ONLY MMC.

No

3

4

5

1

2

Option

MP40 CARD

Cx M-BOARD

Cx LP CARD

Cx LP-y

CxSyy

Description

Shows the EPLD/PCB version of MP40 module

Shows the Motherboard and EPLD/PCB version chassis #x

Shows the LP and EPLD/PCB version of chassis #x

Shows the daughterboard and EPLD/PCB version

Shows the TEPRI module or MGI64 module and EPLD/PCB version

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 859.

Display shows:

2. Enter the option number.

OR

Press Volume button to scroll.

3. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

EPLD/PCB VERSION

MP40 CARD :V11

EPLD/PCB VERSION

C1 M-BOARD :V11

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-378

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[860] UCD STATUS SERVICE

This MMC sets the information on the UCD queue status or UCD Agent status to send to the SIO port in real time.

CONDITIONS

To use this information, a special PC application is needed. This is not supplied by Samsung.

DEFAULT DATA

UCD VIEW SERVICE: DISABLE

SENT AGENT STATE: NO

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 860.

Display shows:

2. Enter the number.

(0. UCD View Service, 1. Send Agent State)

OR

Press Volume button to select and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter YES or NO (1 or 0)

OR

Press Volume button to select and press

Right Soft button to store.

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

UCD VIEW SERVICE

DISABLE

SEND AGENT STATE

YES

SEND AGENT STATE

NO

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-379

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[861] SYSTEM OPTIONS

Sets a number of system options.

DEFAULT DATA

No.

00

01

02

03

04

05

06

08

AUTO UPDATE TIME : DISABLE

SYSTEM SPEED BIN : MAX 500

IDLE WHEN ENBLOC: DISABLE

2 LINE ENBLOCK: DISABLE

2 ZONE EXT PAGE: DISABLE

USE LB FOR PAGE: NONE

LP TRK TONE DISC: DISABLE

ISDN SS FEATURE: DISABLE

Option

AUTO UPDATE TIME

SYSTEM SPEED BIN

IDLE WHEN ENBLOC

2 LINE ENBLOCK

2 ZONE EXT PAGE

USE LB FOR PAGE

LP TRK TONE DISC

ISDN SS FEATURE

Description

Updates the system time from the ISDN network (Enable / Disable).

Sets 500 (dial 0) or 950 (dial 1) as the maximum number of system speed dial bins. If 950 is set, speed dial bin numbers are always three digits (000 to 999).

Decides the state of Large LCD phones (idle or busy) when users are dialling in ENBLOC mode (Enable / Disable).

Enables ENBLOC dialling for 2-line LCD phones with navigation buttons (Enable / Disable).

Enables paging to two external zones (one zone available by default) (Enable / Disable).

Use Loud Bell port for paging zone.

When this option is set to ON, loop trunk can be disconnected by detecting busy tone.

Enables ISDN Supplementary Services (Enable / Disable).

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 861.

Display shows:

2. Enter the option number.

OR

Press Volume button to select and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter 1 or 0 to enable or disable

OR

Press Volume button to select and press

Right Soft button to store.

AUTO UPDATE TIME

DISABLE

AUTO UPDATE TIME

DISABLE

AUTO UPDATE TIME

ENABLE

Samsung Business Communications

2-380

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 107

MMC 505

MMC 606

MMC 705

MMC 706

MMC 722

MMC 723

KEY EXTENDER

ASSIGN DATE AND TIME

ASSIGN SPEED DIAL BLOCK

SYSTEM SPEED DIAL

SYSTEM SPEED DIAL BY NAME

STATION KEY PROGRAMMING

SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING

Samsung Business Communications

2-381

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[865] FAN POWER CONTROL

This MMC controls the power of the fans in the chassis.

.

CONDITIONS

NONE

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1. Press Transfer button and enter 865.

Display shows:

2. Select the chassis number (1~3)

OR

Press Volume button to select and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter OFF to switch off power to the fan or ON to switch power on

OR

Press Volume button to select and press

Right Soft button to store.

4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

FAN PWR CONTROL

CABINET1 FAN:OFF

FAN PWR CONTROL

CABINET1 FAN:OFF

FAN PWR CONTROL

CABINET1 FAN:ON

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-382

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

[889] DISPLAY SERVER STATUS

This MMC displays the history of connection and disconnection to the Data Server and

Feature Server with the MP40 card. Also allows you to clear the recorded history log.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION

1. Press Transfer button and enter 889.

Display shows:

2. Press Volume button to scroll displays

3. Press Transfer button to save and exit.

OR

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

DISPLAY

TOTAL LOG CNT : 00

CLR RECORDED? NO

(01) 11/11 11:10

CONN-FEAT SERVER

(02) 11/13 11:20

CONN-FEAT SERVER

Samsung Business Communications

2-383

ANNEX. Abbreviations

A

Application Level Gateway

Answering Machine Emulation

Add-On Module

B

ALG

AME

AOM

C

BRI

CCBS

CCNR

CID

CLI

COS

CPLD

CR Mode

CSU

Basic Rate Interface

Call Completion to Busy Subscriber

Call Completion on No Reply

Caller Identification

Calling Line Identification

Class Of Service

Complex Programmable Logic Device

Constant Resistance Mode

Communication Service Unit

Samsung Business Communications A-1

ANNEX. Abbreviations OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

D

DASL

DECT

DGP

DHCP

Digital Adapter Subscriber Loops

Digital Enhanced Cordless Telecommunications

Digital Phone

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol

DLI

DND

DPIM

DSP

DSU

DTMF

Digital Line Interface

Do Not Disturb

Door Phone Interface Module

Digital Signal Processor

Data Service Unit

Dual Tone Multi Frequency

E

G

E&M Ear&Mouth

Expanded Switch Module ESM

H

GK Gatekeeper

GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol

HDLC

HLR

HTML

HTTP

High-level Data Link Control

Home Location Register

Hypertext Markup Language

Hypertext Transfer Protocol

Samsung Business Communications A-2

ANNEX. Abbreviations

I

OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

ID Identification

IDS Intrusion Detection System

IGMP

IMAP

IN-SCP

Internet Group Management Protocol

Internet Messaging Access Protocol

Intelligent Network Service Control Point

IPDC

IPM

IP-SCP

ISDN

ISUP

Internet Protocol Device Control

Inter-Processor communications and memory Module

Internet Protocol Service Control Point

Integrated Services Digital Network

ISDN User Part

K

L

LED

LIM

M

MDF

MFM

MGC

MGI

MGCP

MP40

MWSLI

Light Emitting Diode

LAN Interface Module

Main Distribution Frame

Multi Frequency Module

Media Gateway Controller

Media Gateway Interface

Media Gateway Control Protocol

Main (control) Processor

Message Waiting Single Line Interface

Samsung Business Communications A-3

ANNEX. Abbreviations OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

N

O

NMS

P

Network Management System

Q

PBA

PCB

PCM

PLL

POP3

PPP

PPPoE

PRS

PSTN

Printed (circuit) Board Assembly

Printed Circuit Board

Pulse Code Modulation

Phase Locking Loop

Post Office Protocol version 3

Point to Point Protocol

Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet

Polarity Reverse Detection

Public Switched Telephone Network

R

Q-SIG Q-Signalling

RIP

RTCP

Routing Information Protocol

Real-time Transmission Control Protocol

Samsung Business Communications A-4

ANNEX. Abbreviations

S

SCM

SDP

SGCP

OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

Switch and Conference Module

Session Description Protocol

Simple Gateway Control Protocol

T

SIP

SLI

SLT

SMDR

SMTP

SoL

STA

SVMi

TAPI

Session Initiation Protocol

Single Line Interface

Single Line Telephone

Station Message Detail Recording

Simple Mail Transfer Protocol

Server optimized Linux

Spanning Tree Algorithm

Samsung Voice Mail (integrated)

Telephony Application Programming Interface

U

TEPRI T1/E1/PRI

TRK Trunk

UART

UCD

UDP

USB

Universal Asynchronous Receiver and Transmitter

Uniform Call Distribution

User Datagram Protocol

Universal Serial Bus

Samsung Business Communications A-5

ANNEX. Abbreviations

V

W

VoIP

VPM

X

WIM

WLI xDSL

Voice over Internet Protocol

Voice Processing Module

WAN Interface Module

Wireless LAN Interface x-Digital Subscriber Line

OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications A-6

Samsung Business Communications

Brookside Business Park, Greengate, Middleton, Manchester M24 1GS

advertisement

Was this manual useful for you? Yes No
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Related manuals